DBS 40 72 96 Programming Guide

zce_-_r

Digital Business System

Section 400

Panasonic

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Chapter 1

General Program Outline

Prior to programming the system make

certain you have completed the following

steps.

Step 1:

Corr6rn-r the DBS system feature operations

meet the end userrequirements as outlined

in Section 700.

Step 2: ‘-“. ~ ,.,-’ :

Prepare section 450 with the end users

requirements.

Step 3:

Confirm the hardware required for the

end user.

_I._

‘ :. .,

Step 4:

Initialize the system to the default status.

See next page for this.

Step 5:

Follow the completed section 450 to

program thesystem.

The DBS program entries are divided

into 10 primary groups stored under FF

keys on the phone. The Flexible Function

Keys listed to the right show the major

programming groups. Each group

contains sub groups which combine

similar functions together.

Section 400 FE

Issue 3 July 1993

FFI

Key

System program settings

FF2

Key

Central Office line program settings

FF3

Key

Extension program settings

FF4 Key

Ring Bz Hunt group program settings

FF5 Key

Flexible key program settings for lines

& features

FF6 Key

Name & Message program settings

FF7 Key

Toll restriction program settings

FE? Key

Least cost routing program settings

FF9 Key

Copy program settings

FFIO Key

system and personal speed dial program

settings

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

issue 2 July 1993

Before beginning to program a newly

installed DHS for the first lime, set the

system programs to the default values by

following steps

1 through 5

below:

1.TurnoffthepowerfortheMainCabinet.

(Both cabinets if a dual cabinet

configuration is being used.)

2. Slide the CPC RAM switch to the

CLEAR position.

3. Turn on the power for the Main

Cabinet(s), then

wait until the bottom

LED on the CPC card

stops flashhg.

Note: The CPC-B card will take about

twice as much time to initialize the

memory as a WC-A card does.

4. Slide the CPC RAM switch to-the RAM

HOLD position..

5. Verify the software version in the

system from any display telephone by

pressing the [ON/OFF]. [CONF], and

entering 7777.

DBS

Frogramming Instructfon~

WC-A / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 /-3.0 / 4.0

This

procedure

must alwap be performed

priortoprogrammingtheDBSforthefb-st

time.orincaseswhereitisdesir&toretum

allchangedprogramming parameters to

the default initialized values. Failure to

initialize the CPC card may cause

operational problems.

Before upgrading fi-om one software ver-

sion to another, you must tit enter the

“New Function Reset” co

mmand (FF18#

l#).

For example, if you are upgrading from

Version 3.0 toversion 4.0,you must enter

this command. However, if

you

are up-

grading to a

point release

(4.10 to 4.11).

you do not need to enter the command.

The “New Function Reset” command

erases

Tl

and DID programming.

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Chapter 2

Requirements for p~gramming

Section 400 FFl

Issue 3 July 1993

I

2-l PREPARING PROGRAMMING

DATA TABLE I

2-2 HOW TOACCESS

RR-G MODE

Prior to programming the DBS, complete

Section 450 (Programming Tables).

Review the desired functionality

with

the

end user, making any additional changes

as required. Ifthe end user has requested

specific functionality you are unfaxmliar

with, refer to Section 700 to confum the

.

DBS operation prior to installation.

,

WhenPreparingProgrammingDataTable

Section 450. observe the following:

Leave the default values for all

programmable areas of central o&e

lines, extensions and equipment not

being connected.

Record all program modifications made in

the programming tables of Section 450.

Program address numbers that

cannot be changed during normal system

operation have notes to this effect.

Program address numbers that are

specially marked arc available for the

specified version(s) of software only.

Programming

can

be performed from the

attendant display telephone. An

attendant telephone is connected to

extension port

1

and has an extension

number of 100, for all software versions.

Programming is also possible f?om other

extensions. See the note in “From a

-. _

Non Attendant Port”. Section Z-2.”

To enter the program mode from the

Attendant position perform the following

steps:

[ON/OFF], [PROG], ##, thenproceedwith

the FF key program desired.

Name settings can only be programmed

from the attendant telephone, or a DSS

console connected to it.

WhenprogmmminganactiveDBSsystem

through the Attendant position in a DBS

set for only one attendant, the DBS will

automatically

change to the “night” mode.

3

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993

DBS

Ro@amming instructions

CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

When programming from a telephone

connected to the test terminal (CN3) of

the main DBS cabinet, slide the switch on

the cabinet to the test mode. This switch

provides a direct connection to ports 7

and 8.

To enter the programming mode from the

test terminal port, perform the following

steps:

[ON/OFF], #98,9999 (or presently used

Authorization code), [PROG]. ##, then

proceed with the FF key program desired.

The #98 9999 designates this device as a

programming port. Entering the

authorization code a second time turns

the authorization off for this port in

software versions older than 3.17-CPCA,

or 2.05-CPC-B. In software versions

newer than these, activating the access

code at a second programming port

automatically turns off the authorization

at any previous port that has been

activated.

When programming from a display

telephone other than the attendant’s,

press:

[ON/OFF], #98.9999 (orpresentlyused

Authorization code). [PROG], ##. then

proceed with the [FF] key program

address desired.

The #98 9999 designates this device as

a programming port. You only have to

6

enter the authorization once. Entering

the authorization code the second time

turns the authorization off in software

versions olderthan 3.17-WC-A, or 2.05-

CPC-B. in software versions newer than

these. activating the access code at a

second

programming

port

automatically

turns off the authorization at any

previous port that has been activated.

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl

Issue 3 JuIy 1993

When programming from a terminal

connected to the RS232C (SMDR) port,

perform the .following steps:

1. Make certain the cables are

configured and connected as outlined

in Section 300.

2. Make certain the DBS is in the SMDR

mode by performing the following steps

i?om the attendant port:

!’

[ON/OFF], #93

!

3. Perform the following steps from the

terminal:..

. .

#99, 9999

4. After the DBS responds, type:

P, then press the enter key:

When the communication parameters

are in the default settings, they should

be:

When performing DBS programming

changes from a remote location (using an

ASCII terminal), perform the following

step:

1. Access the DBS through a DISA line.

Once the connection is made, press #6.

9999, P. then press enter. from the

terminal.

A call can be transferred by any

extension, if it is a digital phone, to

remote programming, provided the call

is placed on hold, and #6 9999 is dialed

from the attendant position dial pad.

This function will only work if the

attendant has no other active calls.

Active calls can be determined by the

appearance of flashing green LED’s at

the attendant position.

Remote access programming capability

through DISA requires an MFR card

and special DISA programming. (see

[FF2] program addresses).

parity check set to yes, 9600 baud.

data length 8, 1 start bit and 1 stop bit.

See program addresses [FFl], 2, 2.

(

l-

5) for changes to these options.

5

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl DBS

Programming Instructions

Issue 2 JuIy 1993 WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

2-3 PROG- G METHOD

Example of date/time program

entries:

To set the date from extension port

number 1:

Press [ON/OFF], [PROG] (“F* is

displayed), # (“F#” is displayed), #

(“Program Mode” is displayed on line 1,

“MAIN MODE” is displayed on line 2).

Ffress

[FFl]. (“System Program” is

displayed on line 1, ‘SELECT

SUB-MODE” is displayed on line 2).

Press 1, #, (“Select Time Mode” is

displayed on line 1,

u

1 :DATE 2:TIME”.

is displayed on line 2).

Press 1,

#.

taDate Set Mode” is displayed

on line 1. “MONTH/DATE/YEAR” is

displayed on line 2).

From the keypad, enter the new date in

the following format:

Enter month as MM

Enter date as DD

Enter year as YY

Press #

to

store the program change.

After pressing the [ON/OFF] key, the

new date is displayed on all phones

with the LCD.

To continue with the next program

address, press the ‘Y#”

key

instead of the

[ON/OFF] key.

While programmin g, be sure to confirm

the changes being made on the display

of the phone being used.

Software UPGRADES from CPC-B

version 2.0X to 3.0X can be done

by changing EPROMS, and mawally IF-

wn$gwingthepngnzmsthban5otd-

able in the 2.0X rxrsbnpreviously used.

&faulting the CPC-B card

prior to the

instauation

of the 3.0X uersion IS NOT

quin?d.2.OXwMonusersthathave

LdilwiDJDprq-ams~toaareJiLuy

reukw the NOlESjiAhwing /ltW], 8# pm

gram

addresses. Complete manual

reprogramming of all features is not

requind.

Default values

for each

pmgmlnalddmssaredenotedbyan

-

f

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions Section 400 FFl

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue 3 July 1993

Page

Default Value

(FFI

[FFI

[FF 1

(FF 1

(FFI

[FFI

[FFl

[FFI

(FFI

[FFI

i::;

[FFI

[FFl

i [FFI

[FFl

[FFI

[FFl

IFFI

-1-1 ............................

DAY/DATE .......................................................................

-1-2 ............................

TIME ................................................................................

-2-l-l .........................

CALL DURATION DISPLAY ...............................................

-2-l-2 ......................... SMDR/DISPLAY STARTTIMER (30/ 16) ...........................

-2-l-2 ......................... SMDR/DISPLAY START TIMER (CPC-B 3.0) ......................

-2- 1-3 .........................

LEAST COST ROUTING ACCESS ......................................

-2-l-4 .........................

OVERRIDE TRS FOR SYS’lEM SPEED DIALING ...............

-2-l-5 .........................

SSD DISPLAY RESTRIClION ............................................

-2-l-6

.........................

AUTG FLASH REDIAL.. .....................................................

-2-l-7 .......................

.-ONE-TOUC H CALL ...........................................................

-2- l-8 ......................... ON-HOOK TRANSFER ......................................................

-2-l-9 .........................

CENTRAL OFFICE LINE AUTOMATIC HOLD ....................

-2-l- 10 .......................

NON-APPEARING CO LINE HOLD .....................................

-2-1-11 .......................

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FLASH CONlROL ..................

-2-l- 12 .......................

EXTENSION NUMBER DIGITS ..........................................

-2-l- 13 .......................

ALTERNATE ATTENDANT

............. .

...................................

-2-l- 14 .......................

ATIENDANT INTERCOM CALLING ...................................

-2-l- 15 .......................

EXTENSION INTERCOM CALLING

....................................

-2-l- 16 .......................

ALERT TONE FOR VOICE CALLS .....................................

-2-l- 17 .......................

ALERTTONE FOR BUSY OVERRIDE / OHVA.. .................

Jan. 1.1989 ............... 13

12:oo.. ...................... 13

Time displayed .......... 13

Starts at 16 sec.. ....... 14

Starts at 5 sec.. ......... 14

Pooled trunk access.. 15

Disabled ................... 15

SSD displayed.. ......... 16

Autoilash .................. 16

Enabled .................... 17

Disabled ................... 18

System hoid .............. 18

Retrieve CO line call . -19

3 digits.. .................... 19

Alternate mode ......... 20

voice calI ................. .20

voice call .................. 21

Alert tone sounds......21.

No sound .................. 22

-2-l- 18 .......................

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AREA CODE .............................. 1 + Area ...................

.22

-2-l-19 ....................... SSDNAMEDISPLAY.. ...............................................

.

.......

5names .................... 23

-2-1-21 .......................

VOICE MAIL BUSY TONE ................................................. Silence

..................... .23

-2-l-22 .

.......................

TRANSFER RING PATTERN (CPC-B 3.0) ........................... 3 1 set on/ 1 se-c off.. 23

-2- 1-22 .......................

ATIENDANT OVERFLOW old software (All) ....................... 8 calls ......................

.24

-2-l-23 ....................... DELAYED RING ................................................................

No Iines ring.. ...........

.25

bFij-2- 1-24 ....................... SECOND ATIENDANT POSITION attfeature pkg ............. Extension 161 . . . . . . . . . . . 25

[FFlJ-2- l-25 .......................

THIRD ATTENDANT POSITION attfeature pkg ................. None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

[FFl]-2- l-26 .......................

FOURTH ATTENDANT POSITION a&feature pkg.. ............ None . . .._..___._............. 26

[FFl]-2-1-27 .......................

ATlENDANf TRANSFER EXT. attfeature pkg .................. None . .._..._........_........ 27

[FFl]-2- 1-28 .......................

ATTENDANT OVERRIDE att.feature pkg..

.........................

Enabled . . . . .._............. 27

[FFlJ-2- l-29.. .....................

ATTENDANT LED ALARM attfeature pkg.. ....................... Enabled .._..._............. 28

[FFl]-2- l-30 .......................

EXIENSION (Bu;l DEIAYED RlNG (CPC-B 2.0) ..................... No delayed ring . . . . . . . . . 28

[FFl]-2- 1-31 .......................

TRANSFER RlNG PATTERN (CPC-B 3.0) ........................... 3-l set on/l set off ..28

[FFl]-2- 1-31 .......................

ANALGG’IRANSFER RING PATIERN (CPC-B 2.11). ............... .5secon/3.5secoff...28

[FFl]-2- l-32 ....................... MULDPIE DID (CPC-B 3.0) ................................................. Ring at 1 extension . . . 29

[FFl]-2- l-32 .......................

MI-IL= DID/DNIS

(CPC-B 4.0) ........................................

Off

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

[FFlJ-2- l-33 .......................

PAGE DURATION (CPC-B 3.0) ............................................

Unlimited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

(FFl]-2- l-34 .......................

SINGLE LINE ‘IEL DISA RING PAmRN (CFC-B 3.0) ............ 1 set on/3 set off . . . . . 30

[FFl]-2-2-1 ......................... PARITYCHECK ................................................................

Parity check.. ...........

.30

[FFl]-2-2-2.. .......................

ODD/EVEN PARITY ..........................................................

Even Parity ............... 3 1

[FFl]-2-2-3.. .......................

DATA TRANSMISSION SPEED (BAUD RATE) .................... 9600 bps .................. 31

[FFl]-2-2-4 STOP BlT LENGTH ........................................................... 1 bit ..........................

32

.........................

[FFl]-2-2-5 DATA LENGTH

.................................................................

8 bits ........................ 32

.........................

[FFl]-2-2-6 .........................

SMDR PRINTING MODE 1 ................................................ outbound & inhound.. 33

[FFl]-2-2-7 .........................

SMDR PRlNTlNG MODE 2

.. ..............................................

Local/long dis t. ......... 33

[FFl]-2-2-8 .........................

SMDR PIUIVI-ING MODE 3 ................................................ No header titles ........

.34

[FFl]-2-2-9 .........................

DATA DUMP MODE. X ON/X OFF.. .................................. No stop control. ........

.34

[FFl]-2-2- 10

....................... F&II

BAUD RATE (CPC-B 1.0)

............................................. 1200 baud ................ 35

[FFlj-2-3-( l-8) PBXACCESS CODE(S) ..................................................... None ........................

.35

....................

[FFl]-2-3-(9- 18) ..................

AUID PAUSE FOR PBXACCESS CODES 1 THROUGH 8 ....... None

........................ .36

7

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl DBS Pqpmming

Insimction~

Issue 2 July 1993 WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

[FFl]-2-4-1 ........................ RING PATIFRNS FOR UNA TERMINALS (M.C & Bl ........... 1 set on 3 set OR

...... 37

[FFl]-2-4-(2-g) ................... EXTERNAL PAGE CONTROL FOR PAGING CROUPS .......... No settings ............... 37

ml]-2-5-(l-8)-( l-20) ............ EXIENSION CIASS OF SERVICE (CPC-B 3.0) ........................

Class 0 ...................... 37

l~11-2~~1-100)-@001-~l.. .... VERIFlEDFORCEDACCOUNTCODES(CPC-B 3.0). ................ Noneset.. .................. 38

fFFl]-2-6-(l-100)-2-(0-7) ....... ToLLREsT.FoRvERFoRcED~~CODEs(CpC-B3.0) ...... TypeO.. ..................... 39

(FFl]-3- 1 ........................... AUTO NIGHT MODE START TIME .................................... Not set.. ....................

40

[FFlj-3-2 ........................... ATTENDANT HOLD RECALL ‘IlMER ................................. After 20 set .... __.

....... 40

[FF 11-3-3 ........................... EXTENSION HOLD RECALL TIMER .................................. After 140 see

............ 4 1

[FFl]-3-4 ........................... A’lllZNDAN! TRANSFER RECALL TIMER.. ...................... After 20 set .............. 41

[FFl]-3-5 ........................... EXIENSION TRANSFER RECALL IIMER .......................... After 140 set _.___. ...... 42

[FF 11-3-6 ........................... ATTENDANT HUNT GROUP RECALL ‘IIMER ..................... After 20 set .............. 42

[FFl]-3-7 ...........................

EXTENSION HUNT GROUP

RECALL ‘IIMER ..................... After 140 set .. . ......... 42

(FFl]-3-8 ........................... ATTENDANT PARK HOLD RECALL TIMER.. ......................

After 20 set .... _ ......... 43

[FFl]-3-9 ........................... EXTENSION PARK HOLD RECALL -TlMER ........................ After 140 set ............ 43

pFl]-3- 10 ......................... ATTENDANT CALL REVERSION nME R. ........................... Afk 20 set

..............

43

[FFl]-3-11

.........................

UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE TIMER ........................... 10 min. .......... ___.

...... 44

[FFl]-3- 12 ......................... AU’IOMATIC PAUSE TIMER .............................................. 3.5 set ......... . . _._. ...... 44

[FFl]-3-13 ......................... CEIVlRAL OFFICE FLASH lJMER ..................................... .8 set ....................... 45

[FFl]-3- 14 ......................... SINGLE LINE TEL. ON HOOK FLASH TlMER .................... 200.200- 1500.1500

.

45

[FFl]-3- 15 ......................... CO RING CYCLE DETECIION TlMER ...............................

6 set .............. _. ........ 46

[FFl]-3- 16 ......................... INBOUND RING CYCLE EXPANSION TIMER.. ................... 350 ms.. ........ . _. ....... 46

[FFl]-3- 17 ......................... DIAL PAUSE lIMER.. ........................................................ 1.5 set ........ ..___ ........ 47

[FFl]-3- 18 ......................... PBX LINE FLASH ‘IlMER.. ................................................. .8 set ............ ___ ........ 47

[FFl]-3- 19 ......................... CALL FORWARD NO ANSWER TIMER (CFC-B 3.0) ............. 12 set ........... . . _._. ..... 47

[FFl]-3-20 ......................... GROUND STM DElECTlON TlMER (CFC-B 1.0) ............. 4 set ............. __ .._ ...... 48

[FFl]-3-21 ......................... INBOUND GROUND DETEC’IION TYMER (CPC-B 1.0) ............ 1 set ........... ..__._ ....... 48

[FFl]-3-22 ......................... A?TEMIANT ICM HOLD RECU’IIMER (Cm-8 2.0) ............ 20 set ...................... 49

(FFl]-3-23 ......................... EXIENSION

ICM

HOFD RECAILlIMER (CIPC-B

20) ............. 140 set ........ .._ _........ 49 (- ‘)

[FFl]-3-24 ......................... ATIENDM ICMlRANS. RECALLTIMER (Cl%-B 20) ...... .: .. 20 set .......... ..__ ........ 49

(FFl]-3-25 ......................... EXIENSION ICM’IRANS. RECAI&nMER (CFC-B 20) ........... 140 set ......... . . . ........ 49

~

[FFl]-3-26 ......................... CO LJNE DEI&ED RING ‘llMER (CPC-B 3.0) ...................... 12 set .......... .._ ......... 50

jFFl]-3-27 ......................... EXTENSION DELAYED RING TIMER (CPC-B 3.0) ............... 12 sic .......... .._ ......... 50

[FFl]-3-28 ......................... HuNTGROUPNOANSWERRlTVGTlMER(cpC-B3.0) ........... 12 set ......... ..__ ......... 50

[FFlj-3-29 ......................... AUTO

DAY MODE WC-B 4.0) ...........................................

No

setting.. ... .._ _........

50

[FFl]-4 . . . . . . . .._..._._...............

REMOTE

PROGRAMMING ID CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9999 . . . . . . . . . . . .._._........ 51

[FFll-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISA ID. CODE . . . . . . . . . .

_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . / ~..........................

Not set . . . . . . . . . . ..__........ 52

[FFl]-6-(l-2) ...................... DISA OUTBOUND CALL ID CODES 1 & 2.. ....................... 9999

........................

52

(FFl]-7.. ............................. ID

CODE

FOR SYSTEM PROGRAMMING ..........................

9999.. ....................... 53

[FFl]-8-1 ........................... DID RESET (CPC-B 3.0) ..................................................... No reset.. .................. 53

[FFl]-8-1 ........................... NEW FUNC’ITON RESET (CFC-B 4.0).

.................................

No reset .................... 54

(FFl]-8-2 ........................... DID RESET CONFIRMATION (CFC-B 3.0).

..........................

No confirmation ........ 54

[FFl]-8-2 ........................... NEW FUNCTION RESET CONFIRMAnON (CI’C-B 4.0) ....... No amhnation ......... 55

pFl]-8-3(oooo-9999)-

(loo_ ............................ INBOUND DID DIALNUMBERS (CFC-B 3.0) .......................... Nonumbers set .......... 55

.......................................... Tl PROGRAMMING (CFC-B 4.0). ..........................................................................

[FFl]-8-4- l- l ..................... SYSTEM CONFIG .............................................................. DBS 40 .................... 56

[FFl]-8-4-1-2.. IST SYNC ......................................................................... Free run.. ................. 56

...................

[FFlJ-8-4-l-3 ..................... 2ND SYNC

........................................................................

None ........................ 58

[FFl]-8-4-l-4 3RD SYNC

........................................................................

None ........................ 57

.....................

[FFl]-8-4-2- 1 ..................... NEIWORK RE-SYNC TIMER ............................................. No retries ................. 58

[FFlj-8-4-2-2..

...................

DISCON TIMER ................................................................. 200 ms.. ................... 58

[FFl]-8-4-2-3.. ................... GUARD TIMER

.................................................................

1200

(

ms.. ................. 59

(FFl]-8-4-2-4.. ................... RLS ACKlIMER

...............................................................

240 seconds.. ........... 59

[FFl]-8-4-2-5 ..................... OUTPULSE DELAY ........................................................... 500 ms.. ................... 60

[FFlj-8-4-2-6. .................... WINK TIMEOUT nMER .................................................... 5500

ms

................... 60

[FFl]-8-4-2-7 ..................... INCOMING DETECTION lYMER ........................................

90 ms.. ..................... 61

8

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

Section

40OFFi

CPC-A/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 /4.0

Issue

3 July

1993

[FFl]-8-4-2-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._. . . ANSWER SUPERV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._...........

600 ms

[FFlj-8-4-2-9 . . . . ..I............... IMM-GLARE -lIMER . ..-..........._.....

61

[FFlj-8-4-2- 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 ms 62

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WK-GIARE TIMER . ..-f..................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 ms . . . . . .._.........._.... 62

[[FFlj-8-4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIGITAL PAD SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.......

[[FFlj-8-4-4- 1- 1 By circuit type . . . . . . . . . . 63

. . . . . - . . . . . . . . . . . TFUJNK

CONFIGURATION. MASIER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog only . . . . . . . . . . . _.._ 65

[FFl]-8-4-5-1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRUNK CONFIGURATION, SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog only . . . .._... __ . . . . 65

[FFl]-8-4-4-1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO. OF Tl CHANNELS., MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None

[FFl]-8-4-5-1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO. OF Tl CHANNELS. SLAVE CABINET ._....................... None

[FFl]-8-4-4- l-3 65

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAME FORMAT. MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ESF

[FFl]-8-4-5-1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAME FORMAT, SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESF

[FFl]-8-4-4- l-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

66

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR CHANNEL, MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM1

[FFlj-8-4-5-1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR CHANNEL. SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . AMI

[FFl]-8-4-4-1-5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

66

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FAILURE MODE, MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

[FFl]-8-4-5-1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. FAILURE MODE. SIAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . .._......_...............

Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

(FFl]-8-4-4-1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-LOOPBACK, MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._.. 67

[FFl]-8-4-5- l-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-LQOPBACK, SIAVE CABINEI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

[FFlj-8-4-4-1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH KEY OPERATION. MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

[FFl]-8-4-5- l-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH KEY OPERATION. SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

68

[FFl]-8-4-4-1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELL ALARM SEND, MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

68

[FFl]-8-4-5- l-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELL AIARM SEND. SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

[FFl]-8-4-4-2- 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RED ALARM DETECTION. MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

[FFl[-8-4-5-2- 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RED ALARM DETECTION, SLAVE CABINET . . . . . .._.............

8 69

[FFl]-8-4-4-2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELLOW ALARM DETECTION. MASlER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . 50

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

[FFl]-8-4-5-2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELLOW ALARM DE’IECTION, SIAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

[FFl]-8-4-4-2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELLOW ALARM RECOVERY. MASTER CABINET’ . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

[FFl]-8-4-5-2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELLOW ALARM RECOVERY. SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

[FFl]-8-4-4-2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OTHER ALARMS DETECTION. MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

[FFl]-8-4-5-2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OTHER AIARMS DETECTION. STAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

250 ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

[FFlj-8-4-4-2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OTHER ALARMS RECOVERY. MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1

[FFlj-8-4-5-2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OTHER ALARMS RECOVERY. SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.71 .’ -

[FFl]-8-4-4-3- 1 . . . . . . . . . ..I...... FRAMING LOSS COUNTER MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

[FFl]-8-4-5-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAMING LOSS COUNTER. SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

71

[FFlj-8-4-4-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLIP COUNlER MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9000 . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

[FFlj-8-4-5-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLIP COUNTER. SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 ’ L

(FFlj-8-4-4-3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RED ALARM COUNTER MASTER CABINET . . . . .._.............. 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

72

[FFl]-8-4-5-3-3 . . . . . . . . . . .._..... RED ALARM COUNTER SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

[FFl]-8-4-4-3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOSS OF SIGNAL COUNTER MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

[FFl]-8-4-5-3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOSS OF SIGNAL COUNTER. SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9000 *........................ 73

[FFl]-8-4-4-3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYNC LOSS COUNTER MASIER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

[FFl]-8-4-5-3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYNC LOSS COUNTER SIAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

[FFl]-8-4-4-3-6 . . . . . . . .._........ YELL ALARM COUNTER MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

74

[FFlj-8-4-5-3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELL ALARM COUNlER SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

[FFl]-8-4-4-4- 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELLOW ALARh4 RELAY, MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off . . . .._....................... 74

[FFlj-8-4-5-4-1 . .._ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELLOW ALARM RELAY, SIAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . ..f............ off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I..........

74

[FFl]-8-4-4-4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RED AulRM RELAY. MASTER CABINn . . . .._.................... Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

[FFlj-8-4-5-4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RED ALARM RELAY, SLAVE CABINET . . . . .._...................... Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

[FFl]-8-4-4-4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYNC LOSS RELAY, MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

[FFl]-8-4-5-4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYNC LOSS RELAY. SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

[FFlj-8-4-4-4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAME LOSS REIAY. MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

[FFl]-8-4-5-4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . ..I.... FRAME LOSS RELAY, SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

[FFlJ-8-4-4-4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIS RELAY. MASIER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

[FFl]-8-4-5-4-5 . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . AIS RJXAY. SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._..... Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

[FFlj-8-4-4-4-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELAY RESET, MASTER CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

77

[FFlj-8-4-5-4-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELAY RESET, SLAVE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . .._.._......................

Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

(FFlj-8-4-6-(1-64)-l . . . . . . . . . . . Tl TRUNK TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

78

[FFl]-8-4-6-( l-64)-2 . . . . . . . . . . . DID/DNIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not provided . . . . . . . . . . . . .

78

[FFl]-8-4-6-( l-64)-3 . . . . . . . . . . . OUTGOING TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Immediate start . . . . . . . . 79

[FF

l]-8-4-6-( l-64)-4 . . . . . . . . . . . INCOMING TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Immediate start . . . . . . ,. 79

[FFl]-8-4-6-( l-641-5 . . . . .

_ . . . . .

TRUNK MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bothway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

[FFl]-8-4-6-( l-641-6 . . . . . . . . . . .

ROBBED BIT SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

On . . . . . ..I.

_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

80

[FFl]-8-4-6-(l-64)-7 . . . . . . . . . . . INCOMING DIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MT!@ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -..- 81

[FFl]-8-4-6-(l-64)-8 ._._....... DT SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .--... 81

[FFl]-8-4-6-(1-64)-g . . . . . . . . . . . BTSEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ Off 82

[FFl]-8-4-6-( l-64)- 10 . . . . . . . . . IX- RECEIVE . . . . . . . . . .._........................................................

off

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

82

9

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl DBS Rogmmmfng Instructions

Issue 2

July

1993 CPC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

(FFl)-8-4-S-(1-64)-11 . . . . . . . .

RBTSEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._..........

Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . 83

[FFlj-8-4-6-(

l-64)-(0000-9999)-(100-699)

DNIS NUMBER SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.......... No Nos. Asstgned . . . . . 83

[FF2]-( l-64)- 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CENTRAL OFFICE LINE PORT OPERATlON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ail lines tn service ..:. 84

[FF2]-(l-64)-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOUCH-TONE / PULSE DIALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._....

_ . .._

Touch tone . . . ..-_.__..... 84

(FF2]-(l-64)-3 ....................

(FF2]-(l-64)-(4-9) ...............

(FF2]-( l-64)- 10 ..................

(FF2]-(l-64)- 11 ..................

[FF2]-(l-64)- 12 ..................

[FF2]-(l-64)- 13 ..................

(FF2]-( l-64)- 14 ..................

(FF2]-(l-64)- 15 ..................

(FF2]-(l-64)- 16 ..................

(FF2]-( l-64)- 17 ..................

(FF2]-( l-64)- 18 ..................

[FF2]-(l-64)- 19 ..................

(FF2]-(l-64)-20 ..................

[FF21-(l-64)-21 ..................

(FF2]-(l-64)-21 ..................

(FF2]-( l-64)-22 ...................

(FF2]-(1X%)-23.. .................

(FF2]-( l-64)-24 ...................

(FF2]-(l-64)-25 ...................

(FF2]-(l-643-26 ...................

FF2]-( l-64)-26 ....................

[FF3]-(l-144)-1 ..................

[FF3]-(l-144)-2 ..................

(FF3]-(l-144)-2 ..................

[FF3]-(l-144)-3 ..................

(FF3]-( l- 144)-4 ..................

[FF3]-(l-144)-5 ..................

(FF3]-(l-144)-5 ..................

(FF3]-(l-1441-6 ..................

(FF3]-(l-144)-7 ..................

(FF3]-(l-144)-8 ..................

(FF3]-(l-144)-9 ..................

(FF3]-(l-144)-10 ................

(FF3]-(l-144)-11 ................

[FF3]-(l- 144)- 12 ................

(FF3]-(l-144)-13 ................

(FF3]-( l-144)- 14 ................

(FF3]-(l-144)-15 ................

[FF31-(l-1441-16 ................

(FF3]-(l-144)- 17 ................

[FF3]-(l- 144)-18-25 ...........

[FF3]-( l- 144)-26 ................

(FF3]-( l- 144)-27 ................

[FF3]-(l-144)-28 ................

(FF3]-( l- 144)-29 ................

[FF31-(l-144)-30 ................

(FF3]-(l-1441-31 ................

(FF3]-(l-144)-32 ................

[FF3]-(l- 144)-33 ................

(FF3]-(l-144)-34 ................

(FF3]-(l- 144)-35 ................

[FF3)-(l-1441-35 ................

[FF3]-(l-144)-36 ................

POOLED CO LINE GROUP 9 ACCESS.. ............................. All lines accessible ... 85

POOLED CO LINE GROUPS 8 l-86 ACCESS ..................... No lines accessible ... 85

CENTRAL OFFICE LINE

-IYPE

........................................... Cd’li&.

.................... 86

DISA AUTO ANSWER ........................................................

Disabled ................... 87

PRIVATE CENTRAL OFFICE LINE ..................................... No private lines ........ 87

AUTO PAUSE FOR PBX

LdIUE

............................................ Pause set ................. 88

DIAL-l-ONE DETEClION ................................................... Dial digits after dt .... 88

OUTBOUND M’MJ? SIGNAL DURATION.. .......................... 75 ms on/50 ms off

.

88

UNSUPERVISED CO CONFERENCE ................................. Dkabled ................... 89

INBOUND RING SIGNAL PATIF;RN ................................... Synchronized ........... 89

CENIRAL OFFICE LINE DISCONNECT TIMER.. ............... Greater than 350 ms .. 90

DISA SIXFZT

TIME ............................................................

Disabled ................... 90

DISA END TIME ................................................................ Disabled ................... 91

TRUNKlYPE L4xp start

................................................................................

.................. 91

LOOP START/GROUND START LINE (Cl%-B 1.11) ............ Loop start.. ............... 92

UxlP ZXm/CRND SIXRT/DlD LINE (CPC-B 20) ............... Loop start ................. 93

DID START (CPC-B 2.0)

......................................................

Immediate ................ 94

WINK START’flMER (CPC-B 2.0) ........................................ 200 ms. .................... 94

‘IYME OUT FOR DIALED m DIGl’IS (CFC-B 20) .................. 18 see ....................... 95

DID lNTERDlGlTllMEOUT (CPC-B 20) ............................. 80 ms. ...................... 95

TlPORTCLASS-TRUNK ................................................. By circuit type.. ........ 96

Tl PORT CLASS - TRUNK (CPC 4.00) ............................... By drcuit type.. ........ 96

EXTENSION

NUMBERS ....................................................

lOOto699(1Oto69). .97

‘IEFXMNAL -NPE .............................................................. Automatically

set ..... 98

TERMINAL TYPE

(WC-B 3.0) .......................................... Aut~matkaUy

set ..... 99

EM/24 PORTASSIGNMENT ............................................. Extension port 0 ....... 100

FORCED LEAST COST ROUTING.. .................................... No forced LCR .......... 10 1

FORCED ACCOUNT CODE ............................................... No code set. ..... . ........ 101

VERIFIED FORCED ACCOUNT CODES (CPC-B 3.0) ........ No code set. .............. 102

EXTENSION LOCKOUTCODE .......................................... No code set.. ............. 102

OFF HOOK SIGNAL.. ......................................................... Disabled ex 100,101 .. 103’

CALL WAITING NOTIFICATION TONE / OHVA.. ................ Disabled ................... 103

BUSY OVERRIDE SEND ................................................... Enabled.. .................. 104

BUSY OVERRIDE RECEIVE .............................................. Enabled.. .................. 104

PRIME LINE PICKUP.. ....................................................... Disabled ................... 105

AUTO PICKUP (RING LINE PREFERENCE) ........................ Enable.. .................... 105

UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE ....................................... Disabled ................... 106

SMDR REPORT.. ............................................................... Disabled

...................

106

OFF HOOK SIGNAL VOLUME ........................................... 2nd level .................. 107

OFF HOOK SIGNAL PATIGRN.. ......................................... Continuous .............. 107

PSD NAh4E DISPLAY.. ....................................................... 5 names ................... 108

EXIENSION PAGE GROUP

...............................................

None ........................ 108

DISPLAY WHEN IDIE ....................................................... No change

................ 109

DISPLAY DURING DBS DIAL TONE ................................... No change ................ 110

DISPLAY WHEN CAluNG AN JXfENSlON ........................... No change..

..............

110

DISPLAY WHEN ACCESSING CO DIAL TONE ................... No change ................ 111

DISPLAY WHEN CONVERSING ON A CO LINE .................. No change ................ 111

DISPLAY WHEN RECEMNG A PAGE ................................ No change ................ 112

DISPIAYAFlERRECEIVINGACAILWAfI’TONE ................. No change.. .............. 112

DISPLAY WHEN DIALlNG AN EXTENSION ........................ No change ................ 113

EXIENSION DIRECTORY DISPLAY &XC-B 2.0) ..................... 5 name .................... 113

INBOUND DID DIAL NUMBER (CIX-B 2.0 to 3.0) .............. No numbers assigned .. 114

EXlENSlON CLASS OF SERVICE (CPC-B 3.0) .................... Class 0 ..................... 114

RINGBACK TONE FROM BUSY SIGNAL (CPC-B 2.0) .............. Enabled .................... 115

(Flq-( l- 1441-37 .................. Tl POKI- CL4SS--STA’IlON (CPC-B 4.0) ................................ No setllqq ................ 115

[FF3]-(l- 144)-38 ................ SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE HOOK FJASH (CPC-B 3.0) ........ HeId Itne amss ......... 116

10

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions section 400 FFl

WC-A/ 3.0,

CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue 3July

1993

(FF3]-(l-144)-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EXTENSION RING PAl-l-ERN (CPC-6 3.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

[FF3]-(l-144)-40 .._.............. DIGKALSLTRECEMNG VOLUME (CPC-B 3.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emulates Line rtng..... 117

Normal . . . . . . . . _..._ .._......

]FF3]-(l-144)-41

117

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO SET RELOCATlON CODE (CPC-B 3.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

[FF3]-(l-144)-42

1 18

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PERMANENTCALL FORWARD ‘IYPE (CFC-B 3.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not set . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

[FF3]-(l-144)-43

119

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERMANJZN’I- CAU, FORWARD EXTENSION (CPC-B 3.0)

. . . . . . .

Not set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

pF3]-(l-144)-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ML/MC0 SEPARATION (CPC-B 4.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MC0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._ _

120

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LARGE DISPLAY SCREEN APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._....__...._..........

121

[FF4]-l-(1-145)-(1-64) ......... CO DAY RING ASSIGNMENTS ...........................................

[FF4]-l-(151-158)-(1-64) ..... CO DAYRINGFORPILOTNUMBERS(CFcB2.0) ..............

[FF4]-2-(l-145)-(1-64) ......... CO NIGHT RING ASSIGNMENTS .......................................

[FF4]-2-(151-158)-(l-64) ..... CO NIGHT RJNG FOR PILOT NUMBERS (CPC-B 2.0) ...........

[FF4]-3-(1-S)- 1 .................... TERMINAL /

CIRCULAR HUNT GROUPS ...........................

]FF4]-3-(1-S)- 1 .................... PILOT EXIENSION NUMBER (CPC-B 2.0) ..........................

[FF4]-3-( l-8)-2 .................... CALL NEXT HUNT GROUP ................................................

[FF4]-3-(l-8)-(3- 10) ............. . GROUP MEMBER TABLE ........................................

[FF4]-3-( l-8)-2-(O-23 ............ HUNT GROUP SEARCH METHOD (CPC-B 2.0) ...................

[FF4]-3-( l-8)-3 .................... TRANSFER EXIENSION NUMBER (CPC-B 2.0) ...................

[FF4]-3-(l-8)-4 .................... TRANSFER lXvlER ............................................................

[FF4]-3-( l-8)-(5- 12) ............. HUNT GROUP EXlENSION NUMBER.. ..............................

p4]4(1-16)-(1-S) ............... CALL COVERAGE GROUP MEMBER TABLE ....................

FF41-5-(l-145)-(1-64) ........... CO DAY RING (DELAYED] @XC-B 1.07) .............................

lFF4]-5(151-158)-(l-64) ......... CO DAY RING (DEIAYED) FORHUNI’GRP. (CPC-B 2.0) ..........

lFF4]-6-(l-145)-(1-64) ............ CO NIGHT RING (DELAYED) &XC-B 2.0) ...........................

rFF4]-6(151-158)~(l-64) ......... CO NGI’. RING 0 FOR HUNl-GRP. (CFC-B 20) ..........

lFF4]-7-(l-144)-(1-144) .......... IXlENSION RING TABIE (CPC-B 2.0) ..................................

FF4j-8(1-144)-(I-144) .......... EXIENSION DElAYED RING TABIE; (CPC-B 2.0) ...................

plq-(l-144)-(1-24) .............. FF KEY ASSIGNMEN-IS FOR EXl-ENSION ........................

ml-( 145- l&i)-( l-24)or(l-72J . FF KEY ASSIGNMEMS FOR DSS CONSOLES ..................

m-(149-152)-(l-S)odl-32) ..AmNDANi- FEKIURE KEYPACKAGEASSIGNMENIS ..........

[FF6]-l-(1-144) ................... EXIENSION NAME ...........................................................

pF6]-2-(I- 144)-(00-89) ......... SYSlEM SPEED DIAL NAMES ..........................................

IFFq-3(1- 1441-w-99) .......... PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES.. ....................................

m]4-(5-9) ........................ ABSENCE MESSAGES.. ....................................................

[FF6]-5-( l-64) ....................... CO LINE NAME ASSIGNMENT (CPC-B 2.0) ........................

(FF6]-6-( 1-8) ........................ HUNTGROUPPIWTNAMEASSIGNhQZ~(CPC-B 3.0) .........

[FF6]-7-( l-5) ....................... CALL WA.ITlNG/OHVA TEXT REPLY (CK-B 4.0) ...............

Msabled ex 100.101 . .126

Disabled .................... 126

DisabId ex 100.101 . .127

Disabled .................... 127

Terminal ................... 128

None

.........................

129

None

.........................

130

None ......................... 131

Terminal ................... 13 1

None ......................... 132

2 set ......................... 133

None ......................... 133

None ......................... 134

Disabwex. 100.101 . .134

Disabled.. ................... 135

Disabled ac. 100.101 . .135

DkabkxI

..................... 136

Disabled ..................... 136

Disabled

..................... 137

C&deys l-48.. ...... 138

coltnekeys l-144 ...... 139

coIinekeys 1-144 ...... 141

Ext (number). ............ 144

None ......................... 144

None ......................... 145

None

.........................

145

None ......................... 146

None ......................... 147

Default messages ...... 147

..........................................

CO LINE TOLL RESTRICTlON OVERVIEW.. .........................................................

149

[FF7]-1-I ............................ INTERNAl-lONAL CALL ~RE-SlRICIlON TYPES 3-6 .... Restricted .................. 15 1

[FF7]- 1-2 ............................ RESTRICIlON DURING INBOUND CALL ........................... Enabled .................... 15 1

[FF7]-1-3 ............................ MAXIMUM DIALED DIGITS FORTRSTYPES 3-6.. ............. No hit ..................... 152

[FF7]- l-(4- 11) .................... .3 DIGlTRESlRICI’lON FORTRS’IYPES 2-6.. .................... Restricted.. ................ 152

[FF7]-l-(12-16) ................... SEVEN DIGIT TOLL RESlRICnON TYPES 2-6 .................. Restricted .................. 153

[FF7]-2-(3-6) ....................... AREACODETAI3LEFOR-IOURESIRICIlONlYPES3-6 ...... No setting.. ................ 153

[FF7]-3-(3-6) ....................... OFFICECODETABLE FORTOLLRESIRlC’IlONlYPES 3-6 .. No setthg .................. 154

11

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

DBS Rogramming Instructions

Issue

2 Jdy 1993 WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 /

4.0

[FF7]-4-( l-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._. SPECIAL AREA CODE TABLE FOR TRS TYPES 3-6 . . . . . . .._.. No setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 /

[FF7]-5-n-4) . . . . . . .._ _ . . . . . ..__..... SPECIAL OFFICE CODE TABLE FOR TYPES 3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No set% . . . . . . . . . . ~ . . . . _..

156

[FF7]-6-(l-50) . . . . .._..._.......... SPECIAL7 DIGVTABlE FORlRS’IWES 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No setttng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

(FF7j-7-(1-w&)-(1-64) ........... DAY TOLL RESTRICTION lYPES O-7

................................. Type 7.. ..................... 157

[FF7J-7-(l-144)-65

................ DAY TOLL RESTRICnON TYPES O-7 ................................. No setting.. ................ 158

FF7j-8-(1-b&4)-(1-64) ........... NIGHT TOLL RESIRIC’IION TYPES O-7 ............................. m 7.. ..................... 158

m-8-( l-144)-65 ................

NIGHTToILRESlRICIlON?ypEs O-7 ................................ No setting.. ................ 159

]FF7]-9-(1-4) ....................... AREACODETABLE FOR’IRSTYPES 3-6 (GWBALCOpy) .... No set&-g.. ................ 159

[m-9-(5-8) ....................... OFFICE CODE TABIJZ FOR’lRS TYPES 3-6 (GLOBAL COPY) .. No

sett.Q

.................. 160

[FF7]-9-(9- 12) ..................... AREA&OmCECODETABIEFOR?IZS3_6(CU3BALCOPY) Nosetting.. ................ 161

[FF7]-9-( 13- 16) ................... SPECIAL OFFICE CODE TRS 3-6 (GLQBAL COPY) ............. No settiM.. ................ 162

.......................................... LEAST COST ROUITNG OVERVIEW ..................................................................... 164

[FF8]-l-(1-15)-(000-999) .....

LEAST COST ROUnNG AREA CODE ................................ No

settinff

.................. 166

[FFS]-2-(l-15)-(000-999) .....

LEAST COST ROUllNG OFFICE CODE ............................. No

setting

.................. 167

[FFS]-S( l-4)-(000-999) ....... SPECIAL LEAST COST ROUl-lNG AREA CODES TABLES .. No

setttq

.................. 168

m-4-( l-4)-( l- 15)~(000-999) . SPECIAL LEAST COST ROUllNG OFFICE CODE TABLES . No setting.. ................ 168

[FF8]-5-(l-15)-(1-48)-(1-8) .

..TlM E PRIOlU-lYROUIETABLES ....................................... No settiq.. ................ 169

[FF8]-S-(1-8)-(1-8)-(1-64) .....

LEAST COST ROUllNG Cd LINE GROUP TABLES ............ No

setttq

.................. 170

[FF8]-7-(l-8) .......................

LEAST COST ROU-l-lNG DIGIT DELJZ-I-ION TABLES.. .......... No setting.. ................ 171 f

[FF8]-8-(1-8) ....................... LEAST COST ROU’IlNG DIGIT ADD TABLES ..................... No setting .................. 172

]FFQ]-l-(1-64)-(1-64) . . . . . . . . . . .

CENTRAL OFFICE LINE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..m........._..... No settirq .._............._. 174

[FF9]-2-(l-144)-(1-144) ....... EXlENSION COPY.. .......................................................... No s&m.. ................ 174

(FF9]-3-( l- 144)-( l- 144) ....... FF KEY COW ................................................................... No set-. ................. 175

[FFlOJ- l-(00-89) .................

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NUMBERS.. .................................... No set-. ..................

176

[FFlO]-2-(l-14%)-(90-99) .....

PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS.. ................................ No settiq.. ................ 177

i

12

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Section 400 FFl

Issue 3 July 1993

3-l SYSTEM PROGRAM

SETTINGS I

To set the date to February25,1985, enter

the Month, Day and Year as follows:

FF1],1#,1#,022595#

The correct day is automatically

calculated from this information.

To reset the dav/date to the default

initialized value. Dress IFFll. l#. l#,

JCONFl. ION/OFFl.

The day and date are also printed on the

Station Message Detail Recording

(SMDR) printout. Proper LCR

operation is dependent upon correct

date settings. Peripheral equipment

operation may depend on correct date

settings.

To set the time to 3:28 pm, enter the

hour and minutes as follows:

FFl], 1#,2#, 1528CA

Telephone conversation time with an

outside line is normally displayed on

telephones with an LCD. The DBS can

be programmed so that the call

duration time is not displayed.

To set the DBS so that the call duration

time is not displayed. enter:

[IFIFl],

2#,

1w. I#, ow

To set the DBS so that the call duration

time is displayed, enter:

JFFll.

2#.

l#. l#. l#

Proper LCRoperation is dependent upon

co~~ecttimesettings. peripheralequipment

operation may depend on correct time

seuings.

To reset the time to the default

initialized value. Dress lFFl1. l#. 2#,

ICONFl.

ION/OFF1 .

13

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993

DBS Programming Instruct.io~~

WC-A / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Conversation time for central office calls

will start to display 16 seconds after the

completion of dialing the number, or 16

seconds after the initial ring tone of an

inbound call. The start timer can be set

to

16

seconds or 30 seconds.

All incoming calls will start timing 16

seconds after the initial ring tone, even if

the call duration display is not activated.

To set the SMDR/display timer for 16

seconds. enter:

All incoming calls will start timing 5

seconds after the initial ring tone, even if

the call duration display is not activated.

To set the SMDR/display timer for 5

seconds, enter:

JFFll. 2w.

I#.

21. O#

To set the SMDR/display timer for 16

seconds, enter:

[eel],

2w, l#. 2w.

1w

JFFll.2#. l#. 26. OU

To set the SMDR/display timer for 30 (

To set the SMDR / display timer for 30

seconds, enter:

WFll,

2#,

l#,

2#, 28

[FFl], 2#,

l#,

2#,

1W

Conversation time for central office calls

will start to display 5 seconds after the

completion of dialing the number, or 16

seconds after the initial ring tone of an

inbound call, or 30 seconds after the

initial ring tone of an inbound call. The

start timer can be set to 5 seconds. 16

seconds, or 30 seconds.

The central office call duration display is

set by address [FFl], 2#. l#, l#.

WC-B software version 2.00 should be

upgraded to version 2.03 to eliminate two

intermittent potential SMDR defkiencies

in recording field codes. See Technote 8

(March 1992). for complete information.

CPC-B versions 3.00 or newer resolves

this potential SMDR deficiency.

14

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DES Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl

Issue 3 July 1993

Outbound calls can be automatically

routed to special carriers when LCR is

activated. To access a non LCR line for

outbound calls, (when a “9” is dialed).

enter:

JFFll. 2#. I#. 39. 08

To automatically access a LCR line for

outbound calls, (when a “9” is dialed),

enter:

/’

cFF1],2#, I#, 3#, l#

All LCRoptions are set at address number

W-1.

The

use of LCR requires cutting the

jumper on the CPC card. See Section

300 for specific details on this

hardware modification. Make certain

to register the DBS with the FCC using

the proper registration number when

using LCR trunk access programming.

A group of SSD numbers or a single

SSD number can be used, despite toll

restriction (types 2-6) that may be in

use for a specific area or offrce code. The

speed dial number entry used in this

program is the lowest entry number to

be able to override toll restriction. All

SSD numbers higher than the one

entered will also override toll restriction

that may be in use for a specific area or

office code.

To set a group of system speed dial

numbers from 56 to 89, (for example),

to bypass toll restriction types 2-6,

enter:

[FFl], 26, 1#,4#, 568

To reset the overriding of toll restriction

tvnes 2-6 of a grout of svstem sueed

dial numbers to the default initialized

value. Dress (FF11, 2#. l#. 4#. (CONFL

jON/OFFI.

If a SLT uses this feature to override toll

restriction, there is a 15 second delay

before audio is passed to the receiver.

15

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

You have the option of displaying, on

any LCD phone, the telephone number

associated with SSD codes (80-89). This

option also effects

REDL&L

and will

display or not display accordingly

when

redialing one of these SSD codes.

Telephone numbers associated with

SSD codes (00-79). and all names

associated with all SSD codes will

’

always display.

To display the telephone number

associated with SSD codes 80-89,

enter:

JFFll. 2#. I#. 5w. 06

To withhold display of the telephone

number associated with SSD codes 80-

89, enter:

FFl], 2#, 19, 5#, 19

Toll restriction for blocks of System

speed dial numbers is set at address

[FFl], 2#, l#. 4#.

Display of 5 or 10 System speed dial

numbers on a large display telephone is

set at address ]FFl]. 2#. l#, 19#.

System speed dial names are set at

address [FF6], 2#. (00-89)#.

System speed dial numbers are set at

address [FFlO], l#, (00-89)#.

Pressing the

REDIAL

key will redial the

most recently dialed number.

To deactivate the use of the redial feature,

enter:

ml],

21,

l#,

6W. O#

To enable the use of the redial feature,

enter:

JFFll.

2W.

1%.

6W.

l#

If the DBS is installed behind a PBX,

this feature must be disabled. The

central office line flash and the redial

flash features are controlled

by

the same

timer.

The PBX flash timer is set at address

[FFl], 3#, 18#.

Central office line type is set at address

[FF2]. (l-64)#, lO#.

16

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Progmxmning Instructions Section 400 FFl

CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue 3 July 1993

The one-touch call feature provides

dialing to an extension by pressing a

single programmable key, and is enabled

by both settings. This feature cannot be

deactivated.

8’

An incoming call can be automatically

transferred to another extensionbyplacing

thecallonhold,dialingan&ensionnumber

. .

and hanging up.

To disable automatic transferring of a call,

to an internal extension, enter:

pm], 2#, l#* 8#, O#

To enable automatic transferring of a call

to an internal extension, enter:

JFFll. 2#. 1n. 88. 1w

~~-I-

. ..“fii$&@$

To transfer a call with this feature

disabled the [PROG] key must be

pressed after dialing an extension, but

before hanging up the handset. When

this option

is

enabled in a CPC-B

equipped system, intercom calls and

central office line calls can be transferred.

In systems equipped with a WC-A card,

only central office line calls can be

transferred to other extensions.

Transfer recall time for attendant(s). is set

at address [FFl], 3#, 4#.

Transfer recall time for extensions other

than the attendant(s), is set at address

[FFl], 3#, 5#.

Transfer recall time for intercom calls

from the attendant(s), is set at address

[FFl], 3#, 24#. This feature is found on

WC-B ver. 2.00 or newer. so&ware.

Transfer recall time for intercom calls

from extensions, is set at address [FFlJ,

3#, 2%. This feature is found on WC-B

ver. 2.00 or newer sofhvare.

Calls transferred by an extension, that

recall to the extension, and then are not

answered, will transfer -to extension 100.

In CPC-B ver. 2.00 and newer, up to

4

attendant positions can be designated.

Addresses to be used to set these

extensions are [FFl], 2#. l#, 24-27#.

The time for this transfer procedure is

set at address [FFl], 3#, 9#.

If a Voice Announce Unit (VAU model

VB-43708) is used, this address must be

set to the default setting as follows: [FFl],

2#, I#, 8#, l#.

17

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993

DBS Pro@ammin. Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Automatically places a central office-tie

that is in use on system hold, when you

press a ringing line key to answer a new

inbound call.

To disable the automatic hold feature for

a call on an existing central oflIce line,

when a new central office line call is

ringing in, enter:

pFlL 2#.1#,9#.0#

To

automatically place

an

existing

central

office line call on system hold, and to

answer a new inbound ringing central

office call, enter:

pFl],2#, 1#,9#,1#

Central office line-calls to a telephone that

does not have a dedicated key

appearance. can be placed on either

system hold or exclusive hold. Access to a

second central office line while using this

feature is not possible.

To enable the exclusive hold fature for

central of&e lines that do not appear on

a telephone. enter:

pFl],2#, l#, lO#,O#

To enable the system hold feature for

central office lines that do not appear on

a telephone, enter:

JFFll, 21. l#. low. l#

This hold feature applies to Single-Line

Telephones and/or digital telephones that

do not have a dedicated keys for a central

office line(s).

18

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions section 400 FF1

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue 3 July 1993

To provide differing capabilities for SLT

hookflash operation, this feature can be

set to retrieve DBS dial tone, or to retrieve

a central office line caller that has been

placed on hold%-om this telephone.

To activate the DBS intercom dial tone as

a result of a SLT hookflash, enter:

When installing more than 60 telenhones,

you must use a

3-digit

(100-699)

extension number dialing plan. For sites

using fewer than 60 telephones,

Zdigit

(

1 O-69). or 3digit extension numbers can

be used.

To set the DBS for 2 digit extension

number lengths, enter:

pFl],

2w,

I#, ll#,O#

lFFl],

2#,

lW, 12#,0##

/

To retrieve a central office line caller that

has been previously placed on hold at this

telephone (via a hookswitch flash), enter:

JFFll. 2w. l#. ll#. l#

When this feature is set for DBS system

dial tone, a caU placed on hold at another

telephone can be retrieved by dialing 79

and the extension number that originally

placed the call on hold.

To set the DBS for 3 digit extension

number lengths, enter:

JFFll.

29. I#. 12w.

I##

Thissettingcanadverse~~~ttyother

DBS setting that is based on extension

numbers. Examples of this are program

entries for DSS/BLF keys and call

forwarding.

ThispmgmrnoptionreouiresaconCnning#,

at the conclusion of the programming

sequence.

19

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Ro@umning Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

The alternate attendant extension wiII

have attendant features and can receive

overfknv intercom calls if the primary

attendant extension is busy.

To enable an alternate extension, enter:

pm],

2#,

l#, 13#,0#

To have no provision for an alternate

attendant, enter:

pFll. 2w. l#. 13w. l#

This feature is not available if the

*AttendwdFeaturePack~"isusedwith

CPC-B 2.00 or later software.

CaIIs transferred by an extension, that

recall to the extension. and then are not

answered, wiIl transfer to the extension

set as the attendant at this address.

‘The time for this transfer procedure is set

at address (FFl], 3#, 9#.

Intercom calls from an attendant

telephone can be established with a ring

tone, or directly by voice. After the

connectionisestablished,theattendantcan

changeii-omonetotheotherbydiaIing”1”.

To set attendant intercom calls to “tone”

calling, enter:

[eel],

2#,

l#, 14W.06

To set attendant intercom calls to “voice”

caIling. enter:

JFFll.

2#.

lW.146. l#

An alert tone for voice calling is set at

address [FFl], 2#. l#, 16#.

In CPC-B software versions earlier than

2.00. ifaSLTtmnsfersacentraIoi3celine

caI.I to an extension set for call forward no

answer, or calI forward busy, no answer,

the call wiII not transfer if addresses

[FFl], 2#, l#, 14 & 15# are set for tone

calling (O#). If this setting is required,

tmnsfeninga~tmIofEcelinecaIIkoma

SLT to an extension set as such can be

completed by dialing an “8” after the

extensionnumbertowhichthecaIIeristobe

transferred is diakd. CR-B software ver-

sionsnewerthan2.05donotrequimthe%”

tobediaIedafterthe&ensionnumberis

diakd. SeeTechnotes 9 & 12 (March 1992)

for complete tionnation.

Ifthis address is set to IFFlIt 2#. l#,

14#, l#

Pmicd' dir@, as

opposed to

ring

tone,

and

aVoice Announce Unit (modelVB-43708) is

connecfed to the

DBS, the VAU wiII not

answeranintercomcaUtoitunlessthecaIIer

diaIsa”1”akrtheVAU~ionnumber.

See Technote

14 (March

1992) for complete

information.

20

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFL

Issue 3 July 1993

Intercom calls

from an extension (non

attendant) telephone can be established

with a ring tone or by voice. After the

connection is established, the extension

user can change from one to the other by

dialing “1”.

_.

To set extension intercom caIls to “tone”

calling, enter:

[eel], 2w, I#, 15#, on

Tosetextensionintercomcallingto”voice”

caII.ing, enter:

/ /

Dll. 2#.

l#. 1%. I#

An alert tone for voice caUing is set at

address [FFl], 2#, l#, 16#.

In CPC-B software versions earlier than

2.00, if a SLT transfers a central office

line calI to an extension set for caII

forward no answer, or calI forward busy,

no answer, the ca.II wiII not transfer if

addresses [FFl], 2#, l#, 14 & 15# are

set for tone calIing (0% If this setting is

required, transferring a central office line

calI from a SLT to an extension set as such

can be completed by diaIing an “8” after

the extension number to which the

caller is to be transferred is dialed.

CPC-B software versions newer than

2.05 do not require the “8”

to be dialed

after the extension number is dialed.

c..S.

T~cBL-r\t~~ 0 IzI

1 c) fA/l.-arr.k 1 aa

fnr

If this address is set to [FFl]. 2#, l#.

1%. l# rvoice” caIIing), as opposed to

ring tone, and a Voice Announce Unit

(model VB-43708) is connected to the

DBS. the VAU will not answer an

intercom calI to it unIess the caller dials

a “1” after the VAU extension number.

See Technote 14 (March 1992) for

complete information.

. .

An initial splash tone for “voice” intercom

c&Is can be sounded for 0.5 second before

the caller’s audio path is connected.

Intercom caI.Is can be set for no initiaI alert

tone by entering:

prlrll.

2#.

16.

16#. OW

Intercomcallscanbesetforaninftialalert

tone by entering:

ml],

28,

I#, 16#,1#

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993

DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Ifan active central office caIl is interrupted

by another caller. on an extension set for

busy override, an alert tone can precede

the interruption.

To have no alert tone preceding an

interruption of an active central office

line call, enter:

When a “1” must be dialed preceding an

areacode to make along distance call, this

option must be set.

If long distance dialing requires the

dialing of a “1” prior to the area code,

enter:

[eelI, 2W, l#, 18#,0#

JFFlL 2#. 1s. 17#.0#

To provide an alert tone preceding an

intenuption of an active central o&e line

call, enter:

pFl]* 2w, 18, 17#, 1w

A conference call, or a conversation on a

telephone which has off hook voice

announce enabled, cannot be interrupted

by the busy override feature.

Extensions to be interrupted, are set at

address [FITS], (1- 144)#, lO#.

If long distance diaIing does not require

the dialingofa’1”priorto dialing an area

code. enter:

JFFll.2#. l#. 18W. l#

This setting must be enabled when toll

restriction and/or LCR is used.

Toll restriction programming is set with

[FM] addresses.

Least cost routing programming is set

with [FFB] addresses.

22

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl

Issue 3 July 1993

Five or ten names can be displayed on the

LCD telephone directory at once. When 10

are chosen, the maximum length for each

of the names is limited to 7 characters.

To set LCD. directories for 5 name

capability, enter:

jFFll.an. l#. 19#.0#

To set LCD directories for 10 name

capability, enter:

pFl],2#, l#, 19#, 1n . .

To restrict a certain block of system speed

dial numbers, see address [FFl]. 2#, l#,

4#.

To enable or disable the display of System

speed dialnumbers see address [FFl]. 2#.

l#, 5#.

To assign a name to a system speed dial

number, see address [FFG]. 2#, (00-89)#.

Toassignanumbertoasystemspeeddial

bin, see address [FFlO], l#, (OO-89)#.

The DBS can be set to send a busy tone or

to send silence to a voice-mail port(s) at

the conclusion of a call. To set the DBS to

send silence at the conclusion of a voice

mail call, enter:

JPml. 2#. 1#.21#.0#

To set the DBS to send a busy tone at the

conclusion of a voice mail call, enter:

~1],2#. 1#,21#, l#

To utilize variable ring patterns for a

transferred call (specifically to amodem or

SLT user requiring ID of a transferred

call), this option must be used.

To set the transfer ring pattern to .4 sec.

on / 3.6 sec. off. enter:

pm,

2#. 1#.22#.0#

To set the transfer ring pattern to three .8

sec. on .2 sec. off bursts / 1.0 sec. off,

enter:

fml], 2#, 1#,22#, 1w

23

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993

To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec.

on burst / .2 sec. off, .8 sec. on / 2.2 sec.

off enter:

pm], 21, 1#,22#,2#

To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec.

on / 2.2 sec. off, enter::

pm]* 2#, 1#,22#,3#

To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec.

on / 3.2 sec. off, enter:

[eel], 2w, 1#,22#,4#

L...

To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec.

on / 5.2 sec. off, enter:

(FF1].2#, 1#,22#,5#

To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec.

on / 3.2 sec. off / .8 sec. on / 7.2 sec. off,

enter:

ml). 2W, 1#,22#,6#

DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

f

Toplacealimitonthenumberofincoming

calls that can be stacked to the first

attendant, a value must be placed in this

program. Calls exceeding the set limit are

automatically transferred to other

extensions. The day and night delayed

ring tables determine which extension(s)

receive overflow calls.

To set the attendant overflow feature to 8

calls, for example, enter:

mm 2w. 1#,22#.8#

Hold recalls, transferred recalls, and

reversion calls are included in this

number. Hold recalls are dependent on

attendantandextensionholdtimersfound

in addresses [FFl] 3#. 2# & 3#.

Transfer recalls are dependent on

attendant and extension transfer timers

found in addresses [FFl] 3#, 4# & 5#.

Hunt group recalls are dependent on

attendant and extension hunt group

timers found in addresses [FFl] 3#, 6# &

7#.

Reversion recalls are dependent on

attendant reversion timers found in

program address (FFl] 3#, 2# & lO#.

The attendant telephone is not included

as an overflow position in the delayed ring

table(s).

24

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming I.nstnxtions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 section 400 ITI

Is6ue3July1993

An alternate central office line ring

pattern is assigned in the delayed

ringing tables.

To disallow the use of delayed ring

assignments..in the DBS. enter:

JFFll. 2W. 1#.23#.0#

ToaUowtheuseofdelayedringass@mrents

in the DBS, enten

tFF1],2#, 1#,23#, l#

. . .

Delayed day ring programmmg is set at

address [FF4], 5#.

Delayed night ring programming is set at

address [FF4], 6#.

To set any DBS extension number to be

the second attendant position, this option

must be used.

To set extension number 103 to be

attendant position 2, for example. enter:

pFl],2#* 1#,24#, 103w

To reset the second attendant no&ion to

the default initialized value. Dress IFFlG

2#.

l#. 24#. lOl#. ON/OFF.

To clear the second attendant position

from extension number 101, set the

program address [FFl], 2#. l#. 24#,

ICONFJ. IOWOFFI.

The only way the second attendant

positioncanbeclearedistohaveadisplay

phone installed on the port.

The extension number must be a

number that is valid for the site.

Installation of Attendant feature package

so&ware involves the removal of EPROM

chip 1 from the CPC-B card, and

substitution of the chip with one

specifically designed with the special

Attendant features. Be sure the new

EPROM is installed in the proper

direction. See Technote 4 (September

1991). for complete information.

25

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993

To set any DBS extension number to be

the third attendant, this option must be

used.

To set extension 104 to be attendant

position 3. for example, enter:

pFl],2#, 1#,25#, 104#

To reset the third attendant nosition to the

default initialized value.

press

IFFll. 2#,

l#. 25#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl.

Installation of Attendant feature package

software involves the removal of EPROM

chip 1 from the CPC-B card, and

substitution of the chip with one

specifically designed with the special

Attendant features. Be sure the new

EPROM is installed in the proper

direction. See Technote 4 (September

1991). for complete information.

DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 /.3-O / 4.0

To set any DBS extension number to be

the fourth attendant, this option must be

used.

To set extension 105 to be attendant

position 4, for example. enter:

ml].2#, 1#,26#, 105W

To reset the fourth extension nosition to

the default initialized value. Dress 1FFlG

2#. l#. 26#. ICONFl. lON/OFFl.

f

Installation of Attendant feature package

software involves the removal of EPROM

chip 1 from the CPC-B card, and

substitution of the chip with one

specifically designed with the special

Attendant features. Be sure the new

EPROM is installed in the proper

direction. See Technote 4 (September

1991). for complete information.

26

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructiox~

WC-A / 3.0,

CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Section4OO

FFl

Iesue

3

July 1093

To set any extension number to be the

overflow position to which calls will flow

when the attendant(s) are all busy, this

option must be used.

To set extension 106, for example, to be

the overflow extension forthe attendant(s),

enter:

To set any attendant to be able to override

an existing conversation on a non

attendant telephone, this option must be

used.

To disable all designated attendant

positions to override existing

conversations on non attendant

telephones, enter:

p1],2#, I#, 27#, 106# pFl],2#, 1#,28#,0#

To reset the attendant overflow extension

position to the default iniUallzed val e,

press IFFll. 2#. l#. 27#. WON:],

ON/OFF.

This extension cannot be a pilot number.

Installation ofAttendant feature package

software involves the removal of EPROM

chip 1 from the CPC-B card. and

substitution of the chip with one

specifkally designed with the special

Attendant features. Be sure the new

EPROM is installed in the proper

direction. See Technote 4 (September

199 1). for complete in.Sonnation.

To enable all designated attendant

positions to override existing

conversations on non attendant

telephones. enter:

JFFll. 2#. 1#.28#. l#

Busy override splash tone is set with /

program address [FFl], 2#, l#. 17#.

Installation of At&dam feature package

tsofhm involves the removal of EPROM

chip 1 from the CPC-B card, and

substitution of the chip with one spedficalty

designed with the special Attendant

features. Be sure the new EPROM is

installed in the proper direction. See

Technote 4 (September 1991). for complete

kknnation.

27

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 /.3.0 / 4.0

To set an FF key that has been designated

as an alarm key on an attendant(s)

telephone to light, this option must be

used.

To disable the alarm key(s) on attendant

telephones from lighting, enter:

pm], 2#, l#, 29#, on

To enable the alarm key(s) on attendant

telephones to light, enter:

pml. 2w. l#, 29#. I#

Lnstallation of Attendant feature package

software involves the removal of EPROM

chip

1

from the CPC-B card. and

substitution of the chip with one

specifically designed with -the special 1

Attendant features. Be sure the new

EPROM is installed in the proper

direction. See Technote 4 (September

199 1). for complete information.

End

of

Attendant Feature Package

OptiOIlS

When a ringing extension is not answered,

calls can be distributed to other

extensions on the basis of extension

delayed ring programming.

To disable the extension delayed ring

option, enter:

Fell. 2#. 1w. 308. ow

To enable the extension delayed ring

option, enter:

Thisfeatureisusedtosetthetmnsferxing

signs pattern for devices

connected to an

analog extension port of the DBS. Any of

seven different ring pattern can be ’

chosen.

M

I#

2#

:3t

41

!i#

,5 Seconds ON / 3.5 M

3.0 Seconds ON/ I .O Second OFF

2.0 Srconds ON / 2.0 Seconds OFF

1 .O Seccmd ON /2.0 Seconds OFF

1 .O Second ON / 3.0 Seconds OFF

1 .O Seccmd ON / 5.0 Seconds OFF

1 .O Second ( )N I 7.0 Secmds OFF

28

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructiom~

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl

Issue 3 July 1993

Four digit Direct Inward Dial numbers

can be set to ring at one extension port, or

at multiple extension ports.

To set DID numbers to only ring at one

extension, enter:

JFFll. 2W. 1#.32#.0#

To set DID numbers to ring at multiple

extensions, enter:

ml],2#, 1#,32#, l#

When this feature is set to ” 1”. all

&e.nsion ports that have a DID number

asigned will simultaneously ring on an

inbound Central O&x call. Ifthe setting of

thisfeatureis”O”,andaDIDnumberhas

been assigned to multiple &en&on ports,

only the lowest number extension portwill

w. .

Also, if this feature is set to “1”. and

multiple extension ports have a DID

number assigned, but some or all of them

are call forwarded, ONLY the lowest

extension port number will call forward

after the call forward timer expires. The

remaining extension ports will ring from

the DID assignment until the call

foxwarding has started.

If this feature is set to ” 1”. and multiple

extension ports have a DID number

assigned. and one (not the lowest port

number) is call forwarded. the remaining

extension ports will ring ikom the DID

assignment until the call forwarding has

started.

This programming address controls two

functions.

Ifonlyanalogtrunksareused,aItums

on multiple DID numbering. Multiple DID

numbering allows the assignment of one

DID number to multiple extensions. If

one DID/DNIS number is assigned to

multiple stations, the stations ring simul-

taneouslywhen the DID or DMS number

is dialed.

IfTl trunks are used, a I also turns

on

DNIS (Dialed Number Identiiication Ser-

vice). DNISisavailableonlywithTltrunks.

More than one DNIS number can be

assigned to a single extension.

o=off

l=On

The option to set the duration that the

page circuit will be active can be set for a

deiIned or unlimited time.

Tosetthepageduraliontimetounknikd,

en&

jFF11, 2#. 1n. 33#.0#

To limit the page duration time to 60

seconds, enter:

pm], 2#, I#, 33#, 1w

29

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

The ring pattern to a device that is

connected to a Panasonic ringer box, and

receives an inbound DISA call can be set

to mering patterns. The pattern can be

set to a one second on, three second off

ring burst, or it can follow any of the

patterns found in the normal Central

Oi&etransferringpattemsfoundin[FF1].

2#, l#, 22#.

TosettheSLTDiSAringpattemto l.Osec,

on / 3.0 set off, enter:

Jmll. 2R. 1#.34#.0#

To set the SLT DISA ring pattern to be the

same as the Central Office transfer ring

pattern setting, enter:

pF1],2#, 1#,34#, l#

This part of the communication

parameters checks for errors in the

tmnsmission of data for SMDR application

products, and local/remote pro-g.

To disable the parity check for all

transmission of datathmugh the SMDR

port enterI

[eel], 2%,2#, lW, ow

Tosettheparitycheckforalltransmission

of data through the SMDR port, enter:

EFll. 21y.21. I#. l#

Be Sure to properly set all axnmunication

Programming d- wfien modifjling

any single addressvalue. Communication

parametersaresetwithaddressesthatare

found at [FFl], 2#, 2#, 1 through lO##.

30

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 section 400 FFl

Issue 3 July 1993

If the parity check has been set, this

option determines whether the check is

based on an even count or an odd count.

To set the parity check for an odd value,

enter:

The data transmission speeds between

the DBS SMDR port and peripheral

equipment can be set in arange from 300

bits per second to 9600 bits per second.

To set the data transmission speed to 300

bps, enter:

pm]* 2#,2#, 2#,OW fFFl],2#,2#,3#, 1w

To set the parity check for an even value.

enter:

JFFll.2#.2#.2#. l#

Be sure to pmpexiy set all axnmunication

pmgmmming addresses when modifjing

anysingleaddressvaiue.

Communication parameters are set with

addresses that are found at lFFl], 2#, 2#. 1

thmugh lo??.

To set the data transmission speed to

1200 bps, enter:

pm], 2#,2#, 3#,2#

To set the data transmission speed to

4800 bps, enter:

pl], 2#, 2#, 3#,3#

To set the data transmission speed to

9600 bps. enter:

plw. 2#.2#. 3#.4#

Be sure to proper@ set all communication

programming addresses when modifying

single address value.

Communication parameters are setwith

addresses that are found at [FFl), 2#, 2#.

1 through lO#.

31

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl DBS Programming Instructiona

Issue 2 July 1993 WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

f

‘This option sets the length of the stop-bit

for transmitted data.

To set the length of the stop bit data to

1

bit. enter:

~ll.2#,2#.4#. l#

To set the length of the stop bit data to 1.5

bits, enter:

Sets the length of *he transmitted data

string at 5 to 8 bits.

To set the length of the data string at 5

bits, enter:

CFFl], 2w, 2w. w, 1w

To set the length of the data string at 6

bits, enter:

pFl],2#,2#,48,2# WFl],2#,2#. 5W, 2W

To set the length of the stop bit data to 2

bits, enter: To set the length of the data string at 7

bits, enter: f-

[eel], 2#,2#,4#, 3# IFFl],2#,2#,5#, 3%

: :......: : :.:..,: :)J::> ::: > . .

D

J&p&#@

To set the length of the data string at 8

bits, enter:

Be sure to properly set all communication

addresses when modifying any single

address value.

Communication parameters are set with

addresses that are found at [FFll, 2#, 2#,

1 through lO#.

11.2#.2#. 5#.4#

,*~

E3e sure to properly set all communication

addresses when modifying any single

address value.

Communication parameters are set with

addresses that are found at (FFl], 2#, 2#.

1 through lO#.

32

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS

Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl

Issue 3 July 1993

The SMDR printer can record data for

outgoing calls only or both outbound

and inbound calls.

To set the SMDR. to record only

outbound call information, enter:

EFl], 2#, 2#, 6#, OW

To set the SMDR to record inbound and

outbound call information, enter:

FFll. 2#. 21. 6#. l#

The system must be in the SMDR mode

so that the printer can provide usable

SMDR data. This is done by performing

the following action from the attendant

extension: [ON/OFF], #, 93, [ON/OFF].

Al communication settings between the

printer and the DBS must be matched.

[FFl], 2#, 2#, 1 through 5# addresses

encompass these options. Be sure to

properly set all communication

addresses when modifying any single

address value. Communication

parameters are set with addresses that

are found at [FFl], 2#, 2#, 1 through

lO#.

CPC-B software version 2.00 should be

upgraded to version 2.05 to eliminate

two intermittent potential SMDR

deficiencies in recording field codes.

See Technote 8 & 12 (March 1992). for

complete information.

The SMDR printer can record data on

long-distance calls only or on all types

of outbound calls.

To record call data only on long distance

calls, enter:

[IFFl], 2#, 28, 7#, O#

To record call data on all types of

outbound calls, enter:

jFF11. 2#. 2W. 7#. l#

Be sure to properly set all communication

programming addresses when modifying

any single address value. Communica-

tion parameters are set with addresses

that are found at [FFl], 2#, 2#, 1 through

lO#.

CPC-B software version 2.00 should be

upgraded to version .2.05 to eliminate

two intermittent potential SMDR

deficiencies in recording field codes.

See Technotes 8 & 12 (March 1992). for

complete information.

33

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Programming h~~tn~ction~~

WC-A / 3.0, CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

f

Titles such as Time, Duration and CO#

are printed every 60 lines if this feature

is enabled.

To disable the printing of a title line on

every 60th line of the SMDR report,

enter:

JFFll. 2#.2#. 8#. 0#

To set the printing of a title line on every

60th line of the SMDR report, enter:

The X-On/X-Off feature of the DBS is a

k&ware switch” to temporarily stop the

DBS fkom sending data out the SMDR

portiftheprinterbufferhasreceivedmore

data than it can print. The ability to send

a control code to the DBS can be enabled

on most commercially available printers.

To disable the X-On/X-Off feature of the

DBS, so that SMDR data always flows

from the SMDR port, enter:

mm 2#.2#.9#.0#

leel],2#,2#,8#. 19

Be sure to properly set all communication

addresses when modifying any single

address value. Communication

parameters are set with addresses that

are found at

[FF’l], 2#, 2#,

1 through lO#+.

CRC-B software version 2.00 should be

upgraded to version 2.05 to eliminate two

intermittent potential SMDR deficiencies

in recording field codes. See Technotes 8

81 12 (March 1992). for complete

information.

To enable the X-On/X-Off feature of the

DBS, so that SMDR data will

temporarily stop flowing when the printer

bulk is fiAl, enter:

rFFll,2#,2#, 9n, 1n

Be sure to properly set all communication

addresses when modifying any single

address value. Communication

parameters are set with addresses that

are found at [FFl], 2#, 2#. 1 through lO#.

CRC-B software version 2.00 should be

upgraded to version 2.05 to eliminate two

intermittent potential SMDR deficiencies

in recording field codes. See Technotes 8

& 12 (March 1992). for complete

information.

c-

34

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS

Programming Inst~ctions

WC-A / 3.0,

CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Section

400 FFl

Issue.3 July 1993

The baud rate that is used for remote

programming capability can be set to 300

or 1200 baud.

To set the baud rate for remote

progmmmingcapabilityto 3OObaud. enter:

fH@Fl],2#,2#, lO#,O#

To set the baud rate for remote

programming capability to 1200 baud,

enter:

jmll. 2#.2#. low. 1n

When a remote administration “B” card is

used, either baud rate setting can be

utilized. However when a remote

administration “B” card is used with a

d ual DBS having a voice mail system

connected to an analog extension port,

the baud rate must be set to 300 bps. See

Technote 3 (April 1991) for complete

information.

When a remote administration “A” card is

used, only the 300 baud rate setting can

be used. Parity check, even or odd parity,

and stop-bit length parameters are fixed

on the WC-B card. The use of peripheral

equipment with this card necessitateS that

the equipment communication pammeters

must be able to be modified. Be sure

to

properiy set all communication addresses

when modifying any single address value.

Communication pammeters are set with

addresses that are found at [FFl), 2#, 2#, 1

though lO#.

The DBS has the capability to dial 8

different PBX access codes. These codes

can be one, two. or three digits in length.

Thepurposeofthisfeatureissothatwhen

the DBS is installed behind a PBX or

Centrex, and toll restriction has been set

on the DBS, the DBS will disregard the

PBX access code digit(s) as part of the

dialed number.

To store “9” as the Grst PBX access code

(for example), enter:

pFl],2#,3#,1#,9#

To set the second PBX access code of “8”

(for example), enter:

To reset the PBX dial access code feature

tothedefaukinitializedvalue.~ressfFFll,

2#. 3#. (l-8)#. ICONFl#. fON/OFFl.

Use (FFl l] to store rr*n as awild card dialed

digit. Central office line type is set with

program address [FFZ?], (l-64)#. lO#.

The first parameter of the program code

(l-8). identies the number of the access

code. The second parameter of the

program code (O-999 or O*-99*), identifies

the actual code required to access the PBX

or Centrex.

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl DBS Programming Instructions

Issue 2 July 1993 CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

To automatically insert a pause in the

PBX access code dialing (and SSD. PSD

codes), after the output of the first and/or

second, and/or third code number, use

this option. The purpose for the use of this

pause is that it may take several seconds

to connect with a central office telephone

line.

To set a pause after automatic outpuke of

the first dialed digit, (which is assumed to

be L( 1” in this example), enter:

pFl],2#,3#, 9#, l#

To set a pause after automatic outpulse of

the second dialed digit, (which is assumed

to be “2” in this example), enter:

To set a pause after automatic outpulse of

the sixth dialed digit. (which is assumed to

be “6” in this example), enter:

leel],2#,3#, 14#,6#

To set a pause after automatic outpulse

of the seventh dialed digit, (which is

assumed to be “7” in this example),

enter:

[FFl], 2#, 3W, 15#, 7W

To set a pause after automatic outpulse

of the eighth dialed digit, (which is

assumed to be “8” in this example),

enter:

@Wl].2#,3#, 16W.81

pFl],2#,3#, 10#,2#

To set apause after automatic outpuke of

the third dialed digit. (whichis assumed to

be “3” in this example), enter:

rFFl], 2#,3#, 11#,3#

To set a pause after automatic outpulse of

the fourth dialed digit, (which is assumed

to be “4” in this example), enter:

[eel], 2w, 3#, 12#,4#

To set a pause after automatic outpuke of

the fifth dialed digit, (which is assumed to

be “5” in this example), enter:

To reset the automatic cause for PBX

access code dialing to the default

initialized value. Dress lFF11. 2#. 3#,

]CONFl#. lON/OFFI.

lhe pause timer value is set with address

[FFl], 3#. 12#.

Central ofIke line flash timer options are

set at address [FF2], (l-64)+!. 13#.

pm], 2#, 3#, 13#,5#

36

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming In8t~~ction.s

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 section 400 FFl

Issue 3 July 1993

The ring pattern for the universal night

answer (UNA) relay-terminals can be set

foracontinuousorintermittent ringburst.

To set the ring pattern for a 1 second on/

3 second off pattern, enter:

JFFll. 2#.4#. l#.OW

To set the ring pattern for a continuous

ring burst, enter:

pFl],2#,4#, lW, 1w

c j n

g@yJg$&

.::.. .:.. ::.: I.:::

When using a non central office sound.

source for the buzzer, select 1 second on/

3

second off to simulate an incomingring.

See section 300, Insta.Uation Instructions,

for more information on UNA.

To establish a central office line ring over

external page speakers when the DBS is

in the day mode, (and WC-A software is

being used) see address (FF4], l#, 73#. To

establish a central of&e line ring over

external page speakers when the DBS is

in the night mode, (and WC-A sofkvare is

being used) see address ]FF4], 2#. 73#.

To establish a central office line ring over

external page speakers when the DBS is

in the day mode, (and WC-B software is

being used) see address fFF4], l#, 145#.

To establish a central office line ring over

external page speakers when the DBS is

in the night mode, (and WC-B softwareis

being used) see address [FF4], l#. 145#.

To enableaccess toextemalpaginggroups

0 through 7. the relay(s) must be

activated.

To reset the external nage interface to the

default initialized value Dress. IFFll. 2#,

#. ICONFl.

lON/OFFl.

Extension class of service provides a

method to set defined groups of extension

features to a class of senrice. This class of

service is then assigned to an extension or

group of extensions, as desired. The 20

extension features can be assigned in any

order and in any amount to any of the 8

classes of service.

37

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 FFl DBS Pro@amd.n~ hstnrctions

Issue 2 July 1993 CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

The 20

allowable features that can be

classified into any class of service

grouping are:

Fa8tum

Dial Tone On/Off 1#50)

2 Head/Handset Exchange (#51) -

3 BGM On/Off (#53)

/ 4 (Absence Message Set/Reset (71)

5 Call Forward Set/Reset (72)

6 Do Not Disturb (73)

7 Station Lockout (74)

8 Park Access (75)

9 Park Pick Up (76)

10

Meet

Me Answer (771

1 11 IUNA Pickuo (78)

12 IDirect pick Up (79) I

13 /Group Pick Up (70)

14 (Tone/Voice Mode (1)

15 /Message Waiting Set (2)

16 IBusy Override (4)

17 Icall waitin&? (3)

Single Une Telephone Transfer (8)

To set the extension class of sewice to the

default initialized value.

press

IFFll. 2#,

5#. (l-8)#. (l-20)#. O#. iON/OFFl.

The default value of this feature sets full

restriction on all classes of service. The

extension programmmg for this feature,

[FF3], (OOl-144)#, 35#, provides for all

features to be available on all extension

ports. When the DBS is in the default

condition, the extension programming of

this feature takes precedence.

There are 100 verified forced account

codes available for use. A four digit

account code ranging from 0001 to

9999 is checked against a list of up to

100 preset values. If the value of the

code matches one of the preset values,

Central Office line access is granted.

For example, to set verified forced

account code 1 to a value of 8888, enter:

[eel],

2#, 6#,

l#, 8888W

For example, to set verified forced account

code 56 to a value of 5656, enter:

CFFl],2#, 6#,56#, 5656#

To reset the ve&ed forced account code

parameter to the default initial&d value,

press IFFll. 2#. 6#t. (l-lOO)#. lCOm .

~ON/OFFl.

Forced Account codes found in earlier

versions of software have been replaced

by this feature. The account code feature

(non forced) remains.

A veiled forced account code of 0000 is

invalid.

When viewing an SMDR report, the veri-

fied forced account that was used to ac-

cess a Central Office line will appear

starting in position 70 of the call record

line.

38

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions Section 400 FFl

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue 3 July 1993

Verified forced account codes can have a

toll restriction class of service assigned to

them. A caller that uses a particular

account code with atoll restriction class of

service assigned to it would then be

allowed to dial any telephone number

allowed under the toll restriction class of

service for the verified forced account

code.Theextensiontollrestrictionclassof

service in this case would be overridden.

To set verified account code number 5, for

example, to have a toll restriction class of

“type 0”. enter:

To

set verified account code number 40,

for example, to have a toll restriction class

of “type

1”.

enter:

To set verified account code number

100,

for example, to have a toll restriction class

of “type 3”. enter:

IFFll, 2#, 6#, lOO#, 2#,3#

To set verified account code number 63,

for example, to have a toll restriction class

of “type 4”. enter:

[eel], 29,6#, 63#, 2#, 4W

To set vetied account code number 36.

for example, to have a toll restriction class

of “type 5”. enter:

Wl], 2#, 6#, 36#, 2W.58

To set verified account code number 44,

for example, to have a toll restriction class

of “type 6’. enter:

ml], 2#,6#,40#,2#, 1W ml], 2#,6#, 44#, 2#, 6U

To set vetied account code number 22,

for example, to have a toll restriction class

of “type 2”. enter: To set verified account code number 61,

for example, to have a toll restriction class

of “Iypc 7”. enter:

[eel], 2#,6#,22#,2#,2# Bl], 2#,6#,61#,2#,7#

39

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section4OOFFl

Issue2JuIylQQS DBSPro@amm~~~ctions

WC-A/ S.O.CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

‘This option sets a time for the DBS to

automatically switch from day to night

mode.

A central office line that has been placed

on hold at the attendant extension, will

recall that attendant extension in the

amount of time set in this feature.

To set a night mode start time of 8:02 pm,

(for example) enter:

pwl],3#, 1#,2002#

To set anight mode start time of midnight,

(for example) enter:

pF1],3#,1#,oooo#

To disable the automatic m&t mode start

time. and reset it to the default initialized

value Dress. IFFll. 3#. l#. ICONFl. ION/

OFFl.

cm NoRed 7t4

14OsecOnds

Automatic night start time is dependent

on the accuracy of the DBS clock. See

address (FFl], l#, 2#, HHMM.

40

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 section 400 FFl

Issue 3 July 1993

A central oflice line that has been placed

on hold by a non-attendant extension,

will recall that extension in the amount

of time set in this feature.

. ._

A central of&e line call transferred to an

extension by the attendant, that is left

unanswered, will recall to the attendant

extensionintheamountofUmesetinthis

feature.

o#

No Recall 7# 14ofL?econds

I& 20Secoods a# 160 seconds

# 80!3ecmh

ll# 220 !5iecalds

5# loo SeaRIds 12# 24oisecmds

When a central office line call is placed on

hold at an extension. and the call is not

answered, the call will recall the exten-

sion. If the call is not answered at the

original holding extension, the call will

transfer to the attendant extension(s).

41

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS

Programming Instnmtions

WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

A central office line call transferred to

another extension that is left

unanswered, will recall to the transferring

extension in the amount of time set in this

feature.

A central office line call transferred to a

hunt group by the attendant, that is left

unanswered, will recall to the attendant

extension in the amount of time set in

this feature.

o/t NolhA 7# 14osfxmds

on

No Recall fry 14OSeCOtldS

When a central office line call is

transferred to an extension, and the call is

not answered, the call will recall to the

transferring extension. If the call is not

answered at the original transferring

extension, the call will transfer to the

attendant extension(s).

lit - 8ft 160 seconds

2# 4oz3ecods w 180 seamds

3# 6oseaKKis IOU -2m.?eaJn&~

# Bosemnds

111 22oseconds

5# 1OOZkCOdS 12# 24oseculA

6# 120 secunds

A central o&e line call transferred to a

hunt group by a non attendant &ension

that is left unanswered, will recall to the

extension in the amount of time set in this

feature.

T&!l ‘.

42

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming I.nstructions

CPC-A / 3.0. CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl

hmue 3 July 1993

A central of&e line call that is parked

by the attendant in any of the 10 park

orbits, will recall to the attendant in the

amount of time set in this feature.

I 3# I 6ot3camds

I *o# I 2ooseoDnds

I

A central of&e line call that is parked

by a non attendant extension in any of

the 10 park orbits, will recall to the

extension in the amount of time set in

this feature.

This timer determines how long a

recalling hold call will re-ring the

attendant(s).

11

ExtensionrecallswUlringattheextension

for the length of time set in this option

before reverting to the attendant.

This feature is not available when the

DBS is in the night settjng.

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993

The length of time a conference call can

continue between 2 central office lines,

after a DBS extension drops out is set

with this program. At the conclusion of

the timer, the conferenced central office

lineswill automatically disconnect. This

timer also applies to outbound central

office line calls made through the DISA

line.

To allow specific central of&e lines to be

used for unsupervised conference calls,

set program address [FF2], (l-64)#, 16#.

To allow specific extensions to be used for

unsupervised conference calls, set

address [FF3], (l- 144)#, 13#.

DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

This feature is used to set the length of

the pause that is automatically inserted

during the dialing of the PBX access

code. Each time the [REDIAL] key is

pressed during the entry of PBX access

code numbers, one pause time is stored.

This timer also sets the pause time

when a pause is inserted in a personal

or system speed dial number.

44

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions Section 400 FFl

WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 lssuti 3 July 1993

This feature sets the time to release an

active central office line when pressing

the [FLASH] or (REDIAL] key.

No F&h

.2 Seconds

.3 .secorKl.s

al B.-mllds

lO# .9

Seconds

11# 1.5 seconds

(For future use.)

3# .4

Seconds

12# 2.0 seconds

(For future use.)

4#

.5 scconcls 13# 2.5 Seconds

(For uure use.)

5# .6 Seconds 14# 3.0 seconcls

(For future use.)

! ’ 8#

.7 Seconds 15# 3.5 seconds

(For f&u-e use.1

Single line telephones must press the

hookswitch and dial “87 to activate this

feature.

To set the central office line flash on a SLT

to flash or disconnect when the hook

switch is pressed, use this feature.

O# 1 400 ms 1 200-500 ms 1 >500 ms

l#

4200 ms 200-750 ms >750 ms

2# 4200 ms 200- 1000 ms

> 1000

ms

3# 4200 ms 200- 1200 ms >1200 ms

4# 400 ms 200- 1500 ms >1500 ms

5# 4200 ms NONE >200 ms

6# 4200 ms 30- 140 ms 9dCl ms

After setting this timer, the D&3 must be

turned off to set the option.

45

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 FFl DBS Ro@amming Ixistructions

Issue 2 July 1993 WC-A / 3.0. CPGB /

2.0

/ 3.0 / 4.0

For the DBS to detect the length of time it

takes for the central office to complete a

fiAl ring cycle, this detection timer must

be set. Ifthe central office has a ring cycle

of 1 on and 4 off. for example, the DBS

setting should be placed at 6 to account

for two rings and one silent period of four

second duration.

OI 4 seaonds 2t 8 SeoDnds

UL 31) 10 fsccmds

This timer expands the ring cycle to com-

pensate for the time the DBS initcally

requires to detect the ring source.

OI kurpansloo a* .40 seconds

3# .5 sannds 90 .45 seconds

2# .lO Sccoado 101 so seconds

31 .lS secon& 11a .55 Eiecmds

4# -2o- 12* 60 seconds

51 .25seauMl¶ 13# ’ .6!5 seconds

61 .30- 14n .70 seconds

IurI.35

I 151 I .75 seconds

If this timer is set for to short of a time

period, the systemwUnotrecognizevalid

centml ofke ring signals.

Setting this timer for longer or shorter

periods oftimewill cause the first audible

ring cycle to be different from the source

ring cycle.

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming InstrUctions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl

Issue 3 July 1993

To set a pause before the outpulse of

digits after access of a central office line,

use this feature.

Time

The PBX flash timer sets the amount of

preprogrammed time that is assigned to

the [FLASH] key, for the release of a FBX

line.

OI No Flash 61 .7 tckmnds

II .2 .su%Jds ztt

21 3 .sccorKls 81 .9 slxonds

31 .4 slxods 91 1.0 seconds

4r 5 t3econds 101 1.1 slxonds

5# .6 Samnds

.

a

. jq@$p&$

. ,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *?.

Ifan extension that has been set with call

forward/no answer, a call to that

extension will ring for the period of time

set in this feature. If the call is

unanswered at the end of the timed

period, the call will automatically transfer

to an extension that has been designated

in setting up the call forward option.

When the DBS is behind a PBX, the

flash feature can be used to place a call

on hold.

47

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Pro#ammin~ I.nstructions

CPC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

When ground start lines are used, the

DBS sends a ground signal to the centml

of&e and waits for a return signal. When

a return signal is detected, the DBS starts

the line connection process. If a return

signal is not detected within the sped&d

time set in this feature, the system

regards the trunk as not available and

sends a busy tone to the caller.

3w 3sealfKl 71 7 8umnis

4s 8# 8 SXONIS

This feature is only available with the use

of a CFC-B card.

A ground-start trunk card (W-43531) is

required for ground start trunk

connections. Central office line ports on

this card can be conElgured as loop or

ground start ports.

This timer determines how long aground

signal from the central office must be

present in order to start the connection

process. When the ground signal is

detected, the line LED will turn red

indicating that the trunk is in use, even

though the call has not been processed.

To activate the ground detection timer, .

set the parameters for the loop-start/

ground-start type to ground-start in

[FF2], 21# address.

Install ground-start trunk card

(VB 43531) according to the

instructions in section 300.

Setting this timer for less then 3

seconds can cause false incoming calls.

This is due to the possibility of the

ground not being removed quickly at

the end of a call.

,

423’

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions section 400 FFl

CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 lssui 3 July 1993

CaJls made by an attendant(s) to another

extension, that have subsequently been

placed on hold by the attendant, will recall

the attendant in the time designated by

this timer.

Ttule Time

O# No Recall

7r 140 seamds

21

40 Seconds

91 180 seconds

31 60 seconds 101 200 seoonds

4x 60 sesonds

11r 220 seconds

5w loo seconds 12s 240 Seconds

I I

6X 120 Eieaxlds

Calls made by an extension to another

extension, #at have subsequently been

placed on hold by the calling extension,

will recall the calling extension in the

time designated by this timer.

A call transferred to an extension by an

attendant, that has not been answered by

the extension will recall the attendant in

the time designated by this timer.

O# No F&call

7w 140 SeaJnds

lit 8X 160 seomds

3# 60 .semnds lO# 200 .semnds

41 60 seconds 111 220 sesonds

5w I 100 SeaJrKls

11201

24osecmd-1

6W 120 seconds

A call transferred to an extension by

another extension, that has not been

answered will recall the calling extension

in the time designated by this timer.

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993

DBSRogramm~Instructiom

WC-A/ 3.0,CPC-B / 2.0 J 3.0 / 4.0

If a Central Office line has been set to

ring on an extension(s), and the call is

not picked up, this timer determines

the amount of time it will ring there

until extensions that have been set for

delayed ringing on a Central Oflice line

will begin to ring.

If an -ension call is ringing at another

extension, and the call is not picked up,

this timer determines the amount of time

it will ring there until extensions that have

been set for delayed ringing for extension

callswillbegintoring.

If a call has entered a hunt group, and an

idle extension in the group starts to ring,

but the call is not picked up, this timer

determines the time that the extension

will ring before the next idle extension in

the hunt group starts to ring.

2ii - 104 Afta44seamda

31 After 16 Seumds ll# Ana46second8

7W ( Afta 32 6eamds 1 15U 1 A&r 64 6axmds 1

AutomaticDayModeallowstheDBStogo

into day mode automatically.

Automatic Night Mode (FFl, 3#, l#) al-

lows the DBS to go into night mode auto-

matically.

To turn automatic day mode off, enter:

FF13# 29# CONF key ON/OFF key#

1. If only one of the auto modes is turned

on, the NIGHT key is used to turn off the

auto mode. For instance, if night mode

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl

Issue 3 July 1993

has been activated automatically, the at-

tendant must press the NIGHT key to go

into day mode.

2. If both auto day and auto might modes

are turned on, the attendant NIGHT key

cannot be used.

3. Ifboth auto-modes are set, the starting

times must differ by at least one hour.

4. When one auto mode is turned on, the

mode cannot be reset by the NIGHT key

until 3 minutes after the auto mode is

activated. (Whenbothautomodesareset,

the NIGHT key cannot be used.]

If a remote programming ID code is set,

a dumb terminal or PC can be used to

program the DBS from a remote site or

on site, by connecting to the RS232C

interface.

To

set the remote programming ID code

to 0001, for example, enter:

[eel], 4#, ooo1n

To

reset the remote nro~ramrning ID

code to the default initialized value,

press IFFll. 4#. lCONF1. ION/OFFl.

Remote programming of the DBS requires

the foIlowing:

2.

Knowledge of the 4-digit DISA ID code.

(See-[FFl],

l#

through 5# program

addresses].

3. After the DBS automatically answers

your inbound call on the preset DISA line

with the intercom dialing tone, remote

programmingcanbeginbydialing#6and

the 4-digit remote-programming ID code.

4. An attendant or extension user can

manuaily transfer the remote

programmer into programming by

putting the remote programmer on hold,

dialing #6. and the 4 digit remote

programming lD code.

5. The following remote operations are . -

possible:

al Remote programming:

Remotely setting any DBS parameter,

just as would be done with on site

P~gramming~

b) Bus monitor data:

Remotelyviewbusmon.itordata..whichis

commonly used to troubleshoot

operational problems. This may be

possible in real time. depending on the

buffer of the device being used.

1. A

central o&e line that is set with DISA

CapZlbility.

51

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFI

issue 2 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0. WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

The DISAID code provides direct access to

a DBS intercom dial tone, on an inbound

central ofIke Iine that is preprogrammed

as a DISA Iine.

To set the DISA ID code to 0001, for

example, enter:

pFl1, St, OoolW

To reset the DISA ID code to the default

initiaIized value. Dress IFFll. 5#. ICONfl

ION/OFFl.

The default setting of the DBS supplies

intercom dial tone to a Iine defined as a

DISA line. If a DISA ID code is stored in

place of the default setting (via remote

programming) an intercom dial tone wiII

not be heard, but rather a DISA dial tone

(fast busy tone).

The DISA dial tone is a signal to proceed

with your caII until you enter the stored

DISA ID code. After the DISA ID code is

entered, the intercom dial tone is

presented. This provides the opportunity

to make a DBS extension caII.

To make an outbound central office Iine

call. enter #7, dial 9 or 81-86 (to access a

central ofke line), then dial the 4-digit

DISA ID code. See (FFl], 6#, l# and 2#

addresses.

To provide an inbound DBS caller with

access to “fresh” outbound central

office dial tone, a four digit access code

is required.

To set the first DISA outgoing call ID

code to 0001, for example, enter:

IFFlI,6#, lW, OOOl#

To reset the first DISA outgoiw calI ID

code to the default initiaked value,

press IFFll. 6#. l#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl.

To provide an inbound DBS caller with

access to “fresh” outbound central

office dial tone, a four digit access code

is required.

To set the second DISA outgoing caII ID

code to 0002, for example, enter:

WF1],6#, 2W, 0002#

To reset the second DISA outgoing caII

ID code to the default initiahzed value,.

press IFFll. 6#. 2% ICONFl. ION/OFFl.

52

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl

Issue 3 July 1993

To perform DBS programming ikom an

extension other than the attendant

position, this option must be set. The

4-digit ID code set in this option must be

used as part of the access attempt to

program the DBS. when a non attendant

position is used in this manner.

To set the ID code for system

programming to 000 1, for example, enter:

To reset the ID code for svstem

c- promamming to the default initialized

/ value. Dress IFFll. 7#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl.

Only one non attendant extension can be

a programming extension at a particular

time. To set a different non attendant

position as the programming &en&on.

cancel the capability of the first extension

by reentering the 4digit ID code at the

original non attendant extension, then

enter the same ID code at the second

extension.

On CPC-A software versions later than

3.2 1, and WC-B versions later than 2.00,

entering the ID code for system

programming at a second extension, will

automatically cancel the programming

capabiltty that may have been previously

set but not canceled at a different

extension.

Direct Inward Dial numbers that have

been set up as a part of WC-B ver. 2.11 or

older software, need to be defaulted with

the use of this program after upgrading a

DBS to ver. 3.00 software. Also, at any

time that a default of ALL assigned DID

numbers is desired. this program must be

used.

To choose not to reset existing DID

number assignments, enter:

pFll.8#. l#.O#

At any time a reset of all assigned DID

numbers to the default value (no DID

numbers assigned) is desired, enter:

-

DrIrl], 8#. I#, 1n

DID settings have to be manually

configured if the DBS has a software

version older than 3.00, that is being

upgraded to version 3.00 or newer. Before

this manual reconfigurafion can be done

however, the DID reset program ([FFl],

8#, l#), must be done.

The maximum amount of DID number

assignments that a DBS can have is 500.

Multiple DID number assignments canbe

assigned to any extension port, and/or

the same DID number can be assigned to

multiple extension ports. Each DID

assignment uses one of the 500 that are

available.

53

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructi01~1

CPC-A / 3.0,CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 /4.0

c

This is a

cor&rmation program for the

resetting of DID numher assignments

that can be accomplished with the use of

program number [FFl], 8#, l#.

To not reset the DID number

assignments, enter:

j?'Fll. 8#.2#.0#

To reset all of the DID number

assignments, enter:

ml), BW, 2#, 1W

DID&tingshavet&emaWlllycO~

ifthe DBS has a software version older than

3.00, that is being upgraded to version

3.00 or newer. Before this manual

reco&gumtion can be done however. the

DID reset program ([FFl]. 8#, l#), must be

done.

The maximum amount of DID number

assignments that a

DES can have is

500.

Multiple DID number assignments can be

assigned to any extension port, and/or

the same DID number can he assigned to

multiple extension ports. Each DID

assignment uses one of the 500 that are

available.

Resets program settings stored in SAM

(Static Random Access

Memory). The

reset

must be performed before upgrading from

one software version to another. For ex-

ample. if you are upsadirq from Version

3.00 toVersion4.00, you need to perform the

reset.

However, if you are

upgradiq to a

point release (4.10 to 4.11). you do not need

to perform the reset.

CkNo (retain settinfls1

l=Yes (clear settings)

c

.

54

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl

issue 3 July 1993

The purpose of this display is to make sure Direct inward dialed numtws that have

you want to reset the data Enter “0” or ” 1,” been dialed by a cakr need to be assigned

depending on whether you want to complete to extension ports, so that the number

or cancel the reset. dialed will ring on all extensions they are

supposed to appear on. A DID number can

~~~

::‘“‘~~~~~. be set to ring on muhiple extensions, or only

one extension.

O=Do not reset

l=Reset To set DID number 4444 to ring on

extension number 120, for example,

enter:

1. If you enter a “1,” the following display

Wll, 8#, 3#, 4Q44#, 120#

appears:

CONFmM To set DID number 6358 to ring on

0: NO 1: YES extension number- 500, for example,

enter: -LT.

2. This command erases a.U Tl and DID

programming.

@WI], 8#,3#,6358#, 5oon

To reset DID numbers that have been as-

signed to extensions to the default

initialized value.

Dress lFF1’. 8#. 3#,

didWCXX#. lCONFl#. ION/OFF.

55

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993

I

Tl PROGRAMMZN G OPTlONS

Allpcmmekm inthissectionreferbCPC-B,

Vet-son 4.00 or newer.

The following information describes pro-

gramming parameters for the Tl Interface.

The descriptions of each parameter include

alist of available options and the associated

programming address.

Default options are shown underlined.

Tl SYSTEM SFXTINGS

DBS Programming @iWuctions

CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

cwcKsETTnvGs

I

The Sync Card (installed on the WC-B)

providesamethod ofsynchronizingtheDBS

with the public network. This parameter

determines the first clocking source for net-

work synchronizmon. If the first source

kils, the system will switch to the second

source. The system will attempt to go back

to the first source based on thevalue entered

under the Network Re-sync Timer.

The system considers a clock source to have

failed when the slip rate error counter is

exceeded within a 24-hour period.

In most cases, the 1st sync source is set to

“1.”

Idenmes the system size.

Optlons M 4p

1 =DB!5 72

2=DBS 96

3=DBS 40 + DES 40 Cl-1

must be in the slave

cabinet.)

4=DBS 72 + DBS 40 VI

IS

not supportrd.)

S=DBS 72 + DEB 72 VT1

must be tn the slave

cabinet.)

6=DE3s 96 + DBS 40

7=DL3S 96 + DEE 72

R=DL3S 96 + DEE 96

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down, then

back up again.

To apply changes to this parameter, power

the system down, then back up.

56

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Inst~ctions Section 400 FFl

WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue 3 July 1993

Determines the source of clocking for the

second sync source. The system will at-

tempt to switch from the second source

back to the first source based on the value

entered under “Network Re-sync Tfmer.”

lfthe second source fails and the first source

is not working, the system will switch to the

third source..

ln most cases, a system with one Tl has the

2nd sync source set to “3.” Systems with two

Tls normally have the 2nd sync source set

to “2.”

One of the three sync sources should be set

to “3” (free run). A free-run setting is needed,

so the DBS Tl can provide its own clocking

if the network clock fails.

Options O=None

l=Tl of the master cabinet

2=Tl of the slave cabinet

Deterrnines the source of clocking for the

third sync source. The third sync source is

used ifboth the first and second source fail.

The system will attempt to switch from the

third source back to the first source based

on the value entered under “Network Re-

sync Timer.” _._

In most cases, a system with one Tl has the

3rd sync source set to “0.” Systems with two

Tl s normally have the 3rd sync source set to

“3.”

One of the three sync sources should be set

to “3” (free run). A free-run setting is needed,

so the DBSTl can provide its own clocking

if the network clock fails.

3=Free run (internal clocking)

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down, then

back up.

For changes to this paraxneter to take effect,

the system must be powered down, then

back up again.

57

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993

I

lf one clock source falls, the system will

switch to another clock source. The re-sync

timer determines how often the system at-

tempts to return to the original clock source.

For example, if the first clock source (1st

sync) f&, the system switches to the sec-

ond source. However, the system will try to

return to the fxst source based on the re-

sync timer.

Ifthesecondsourcefailsandthefirstsource

continues to be out-of service, the system

switches to the third source. Again, the re-

sync timer determines how often the system

will attempt to return to the first source.

3ptions O-25

O=lmmechatc

(DBS returns to

the first clock tmmedlately.)

I-24=hours (Determines how

often the DBS attempts to

return to the first clock)

I

25=no reties (DBS does not

attemDt to PO hack to the tlrst (

clock.1 I

When the system attempts to go back to the

fI.rst clock source, existing calls will be dis-

connected.

DBS Programming Instnictions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

f

Determines how long the DBS waits before

sending a disconnect signal from the Tl to

the CO. (II&e CO Disconnect Timer (FF2 (l-

64)# 18# (0-15#)] determines how long the

system waits to receive a disconnect signal

from the CO.)

3ptions

rralues

o-15

(1)

0= 15Oms

1=200ms

2=25Oms

3=3ooms

4=4ooms

!XiOOms

6= 1OOOms

7=15ooms

8=2oooms

9=25OOms

10=3000ms

11=35OOms

12=Off (DES does not

automatically send a

disconnect signal.)

f-

For changes to this

pammeter to take effect,

the system must be powered

down, then

back up.

‘-

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Sectfon 400 FFl

Issue 2

July 1993

DBS

Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

/ . . .

Determines how long the system waits be-

fore outpulsing dialed digits to the network.

3ptions

o-15

Values

O=lOO Ins

1=300 ms

2=500 Ins

3=700 ms

4=1000 ms

5=1200 ms

6=1500 ms

7=1700 ms

8=2000 ms

Whenwink-start signaling is used, the DBS

waits for a wink-start signal fi-om the CO

when a user goes ofbok. Once the DBS

receives a wink start, the DBS sends a CO

dial tone to the extension.

This timer determines how long the DBS

waits for a wink signal once an extension

goes ofbook.

lptions

Ialues

o-15

0=150 ms

1=250 In.5

2=5ooms

3=7!50 ms

Jklooo ms

5=12!TJo Ins

6=1500 rns

7=1750 Ins

8=2ooo ms

9=2!500 Ins

1o=sooo Ins

11=3500 ms

12-4Qoo ms

13=4500 ms

14=5ooo ms

15=5500 ms

60

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF,

Issue 3 July 1993

Once anincomingcallseizes aT1 trunk+ this

timer determines how long the DBS waits

before recognizing the seizure as an incom-

ingcall.

This parameter only applies when E&M

signaling isused.

I

5=70 ms

7

I

12= 140 ms

l

When the DBS generates a call over the Tl,

answer supervision is provided to determine

if the call is actually answered. This timer

determines how long the oflhook signal Tom

the called party must last before the DBS

treats the oilhook signal as an answer.

oplions o-8

v*es lo=..=.. ms I

I l=loo ms I

12=200 ms

I

3=6ooms

c

4=1ooo ms

l5=2ooo ms

I

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down. then

back up.

61

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl DBS Ro@ammiq Instructions

Issue 2 July 1993 WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Aglare is a conflict between an incoming call

and an outgoing call.

When immediate-start signaling is used,

this timer detennines how long the system

searches for an incoming call before con-

necting a station user to a trunk channel.

The timer begins when the station goes

offhook.

If this parameter is set to “0” (non glare), the

DBS does not check for glare. Therefore, if

a trunk call is coming into a station that is

going oi3hook. the station does not ring but

is connected to the incoming call automati-

*

Aglareisaconflictbetweenaninconringcall

and an outgoing call.

Whenwink-startsignalingis used, the timer

determines how long the system.searches

for an incoming call before connecting a

station user to a trunk channel.

The timer begins when the a wink is re-

ceived.

lf this parameter is set to 0 (non glare) and

a trunk call is coming into a station that is

going o@ook, the station does not ring but

is connected to the incoming call automati-

m

c

Iptions ~ IO-15 I

3ptions

iralues

o-15

O=The DBS does not check for

glare.

1=20 ms

2=40 ms

Jalues ETlMdoesnotcheckforI

I2=40 ms I

3=60 ms 1

14=80 ms I

15=100 ms

I

16=120 ms

I

~7=140 ms

I

11=250 ms

I

12=300 ms

I

I13=350 ms

I

14=400 ms

IS=450 ms

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Adjusts the volume of connections made via

the Tl. In this parameter. the first “(l- 12)”

represents the receiving circuit type. The

second “l-12” represents the sending cir-

cuit type. “0-30” represents the pad num-

ber. The volume settings are controlled by

changing a pad number, which in turn

changes the loss or gain of the connection.

In most cases, the default pad settings do

not need to be changed. If the volume level

of a connection is unsatisfactory, include

thereceivingandsendfngcircuittypes inthe

command, then adjust the volume by as-

signing a new pad number.

Figure 1 shows the numbers used to identify

each circuit type.

1

Figure 1.

Circuit-type

Numbers

CircuitTypes No.

K-TEL 1

SLT

2

DATA#

3

Analog CO Trk

4

Tl Master

5

Tl Slave

6

OP-l-lON l*

7

OPTlON 2* 8

DTMF#

9

CONF (SCW 10

TONE1 (MFRlW 11

TONE2 (MFR2)# 12

1

section 400

FFl

Issue 3 July1993

Figure 2 shows the default values for the

most common Tl connections.

Fire 2. Default pad values

(Tl #1 = master, T1#2 = slave)

Tl #l SLT 16

-2 dB

T1#2 SLT 16

-2 ClB

K-TEL Tl #l 16

-2 ClEt

K-TEL T1#2 16

-2 dF3

SLT Tl #l 16

-2 dB

SLT T1#2 16

-2 dE3

#Circuit Types 3 and 9-12 are reserved for

future use.

*Options 1 and 2 can be used to assign

unique PAD levels to circuits that require

special volume levels. For example, if an

OPX station needs a higher volume level

than other SLTs, the OPX station could be

defined as an Option 1 circuit type.

The following table lists the adjustments

provided by each pad number.

63

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl DBS

Programming Instructions

Issue 2 July 1993 WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Figure 3. Pad Nos.

Pad No. I Level

I

0 dB I

+2 dB

.

14 +28 dB

I

15 I +30 dB I

I

16

I

-2 dB I

.

I

-4 dB

I

29

I

-28 dB

I

30

I

-30 dB

I

If calls to SLTs via a master Tl have low

volume levels, the PAD level for connec-

tions fi-om the master Tl to all SLTs can

be changed.

By referring to Figure 2, you can see that

the default pad setting for connections

from the master Tl to all SLTs is 16. You

can also tell by Figure 2 that the default

pad value for setting 16 is -2 dB.

To raise the volume by 2 dB, you can

change the pad value to 0. (As you can

see fkom Figure 3, the dB level for value 0

isOdl3.)

The following example shows the pro-

rg required to change the value to

.

FF18##3#2#5#0#

Circuit type number for SLTs (Figure 1).

5=Circuit type number for the Tl in the

master cabinet (Figure 1).

O=Pad number for 0 dB loss/gain (Figure

3).

64

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming In.structiona

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

section 400 FF

Insue 3

July 1993

Specifies the trunk combinations used in

the DBS.

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down, then

back up.

o=Analoa only

l=Tl and analog trunks

thermore, the number of analog &unks that

canbeusedisahvaysdecrementedinquan-

tities of 8.

For instance, if you’re installing a Tl in a

DBS 96 and you only want to use 12 Tl

channels, the logical: number of analog

trunks thatwould be available is 20 (32 - 12

= 20).

However, because the number of analog

trunks must be decremented in quantities

of 8, the actual number of analog trunks

that can be used is 16:

(32 total trunks - 16 (two 8-trunk incre-

ments) = 16.)

See Installation &rfion 3001 for a list of

possible Tl and analog trunk channel com-

binations.

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down, then

back up.

O-24 (0)

Determines how many Tl channels are

used.

Though each Tl Interface provides 24 trunk

channels, Tl trunks do not increase the

overall trunk capadty of the DBS. Each Tl

channel subtracts from the total number of

analog trunks that can be installed. Fur-

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Ro@ammiqf Imtnactionn

WC-A / 3.0, CF’GB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

i

TZWlVKSIG-G

l

Selects the framing format used by the Tl .

The framing format must match what is

offered by the CO.

O=SF (Superti-ame, which is also known as

D4. The superframe consists of 12 frames,

with each frame incIuding 193 bits. Each

frame is separated by a fi-aming bit.)

l=ESF (Extended Super Frame. An ex-

tended super kame consists of 24 ti-ames,

thereby doubling the length of the super

fi-ame (SF) format. ESF also supports moni-

toring and maintenance capabiIities that

are not available with the SF format.)

Selects the clear channel format used by the

Tl. The clear chan.neI format must match

what is offered by the CO.

&AIM1 @MI standsforaltematemarkinver-

sion.)

l=B8ZS (B8ZS stands for Binary 8-Zeroes

Suppression.

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down, then

back up again.

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down, then

back up.

i

66

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Ro@ammhg I.nat~ctiox.u3

WC-A / 3.0. CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Determines the way the system responds to This parameter only applies to a DBS within

kZ&XIllS.

a private network.

If the remote loopback parameter is turned

on, the DBS can receive a loopback com-

mand from another DBS.

Forexample,forDBS”A”toreceivealoopback

command i?om DBS ‘73,” this parameter

must be turned on at DBS “A.” DBS 73”

would initiate the loopback by entering the

“Remote tiopback” command.

O=Mode

1 vl stays in operation even if

errors are detected.)

l=Mode 2 (II’1 shuts down if errors are

detected.)

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down, then

back up.

section 4OOFFl

IssneBJdyl993

O=No (llxe system does not respond to

loopback si@Mls.)

l=Yes (Ihesystemdoesrespondtoloopback

signals.)

67

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

In the current version of DES Tl, a

“switchhook flash“ releases and resizes

theT1 line.

O=Release and reseize

Determines whether the DES sends a yellow

alarm signal to the CO.

O=No

l=Yes

68

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF1

Issue 3 July1993

The default value for this parameter is deter-

mined by network spec&ations. it should

not be changed.

Lfared alarmoccurs. theCFALEDontheT1

card lights. Also, if the ‘Bed Alm Relay’

parameter is turned on, the alann relay on

the Tl MDF card closes.

3ptions O-5

Values 0=4

1=6

2=8

3=10

(?+.?+.>

%&xpg j::

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down, then

Determines how long a yellow alarm signal

must be on before the system detects a

yellow alarm. When a yellow alarm occurs,

the YEL LED on the Tl card lights. Also, if

the ‘Yel Alm Relay’ parameter is turned on,

the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card closes.

>ptiOllS

o-15

o=oIIls t34ooms

orDmedhte1

1-30 945orm

2=100 ms

10=5OOnzS I

3=1!50 ITS 11=5!5oms

4=200 nB 12=600ITlS

25=25oms 13=65OIIlS

6=3oom!3 14=700 Ins

I

7=350 l-m I 15=75OmS I

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down. then

back up.

’ 69

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS RolErpmmipg hdxuctions

CPGA / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Determines how long the DBS tries to re-

cover from a yellow alarm before it re-syncs

the Tl trunk.

Options lo-15 I

Values 1 O=O ms (immediate) I8=80 ms

1

JElshls

!%I0 ms

2=2oms lO=llOms

3=30 ms 11=120 ms

44oms Lb130 ms

s=50 ms 13=140 ms

6=6oms 14=150 ms

7=70 ms 15=160 ms

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down. then

back up.

Detennineshowlonganoutoffixne(OOF),

loss of signal. sync loss. 0rAiS signal must

be on before the system generates an alarm.

lfan OOF, sync loss, or AIS alaxm occurs, a

corresponding LED on the Tl card lights.

(Sync loss alarms light the SLIP LED.)

‘IhealarmrelayontheTlMDFcardwillalso

close ifthe corresponding relay parameter is

turned on.

315

a=oms 8=mms

l=w) 9=25ooms

2=5ahs 10=3000~

3=7soms 11=35ooms

4=1ooOmS l2=4omlns

s=l2soms l3=45ooms

6=15alms 14==mS

7=1750 ms l5=5sahns

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down. then

back UD.

70

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Insl~~ctions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Section400

FFl

bsue 3 July

1993

Determines how long the DBS tries to re-

cover from an out-of-frame (OOF), Loss of

Signal, Sync Loss, or AIS alarm before it

resyncs the Tl trunk.

Options lo-15 I

values lo=o~

18=3cxIoms

I

1=250 ms 9=4oooms

2=500 ms lO=SCCIO ms

13=7SOms 111=6OOOms 1

14=1OOOms ~12=7OOOms I

I5=1500 ms

I

13=8000 ms

I

6=2000 ms 14=9000 ms

7=2500 ms lS=loooO ms

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down, then

hack up.

ERRORCOUVTERSMIRT1AIARM

The following counters determine when FF

alarm keys light. FF alarm keys light when

an error counter exceeds the spectied num-

ber within 24 hours. FF alarm keys can

indicate the following types of alarms:

Red alarms

Loss of signal abmx3

sync loss alarms

Yellow alarms

slip alarms

Fl-arne loss alarms

Thealaxmkeyscanbeassignedtoanykey

telephone. However, the keys onlywork on

a non-attendant phone that has the pro-

gramming authorization code (#98 9999)

activated. With attendant phones, the keys

work whether or not the programming au-

thorization code is activati.

Determines how many fi-ame losses occur

beforeaFbmeLossAlarrnkeyislit.

Thekeylightswhenthecountxxexceedsthe

spedfied number within a 24hour period.

0-9CXM/24

hours Jm

71

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Pro@amming Intstruction~

CPGA / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Determines how many slips occur befonz a

Slip Loss Alarm key is lit.

‘Ihe key lights when the counter exceeds the

specified number within a 24-hour period.

This parameter also determines the number

of slips that can occur before the system

switches to the next clock source. When the

system switches to the next clock source,

the slip en-or counter for the first clock

source is reset.

Slips are losses of data bits due to fixming

errors.

Determines how many red alarms occw

before a Red Alarm key is lit.

The key lights when the counter exceeds the

specified number within a 24-hour period.

O-9000/24 hours I90001

72

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl

Issue 3 July 1993

Determines how many instances of signal Determines how many instances of sync

loss occur before a Signal Loss Alarm key is 1ossoccurbeforeaSyncLmsAkmnkeyislit.

lit. The keylightswhenthecounterexceedsthe

The key lights when the counter exceeds the specified number within a 24hou.r period.

specitM number within a 24-hour period.

73

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl DBS Ro#ammlqj Instn~ctions

Issue 2 July 1993 WC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Determines how many yellow alarm indica-

tions occur before a Yellow Alarm key is lit.

The key lights when the counter exceeds the

specified number within a 24-hour period.

(See instructions on programmingT1 alarm

keys.) Determines whether the system closes the

-alarmrelay&th&TlMDFcardinthee&nt

of yellow alarms.

like ah-m rday can be connected to an

tztemalalaxmdevicesuchasabuzzer. The

external alarm device must be purchased

separate& it is noit provided with the DBS

Tl.

f-

~

‘~~

O=OfT@he alarm relay does not close.)

i

74

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions Section 400 FFl

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue 3 July 1993

Determines whether the system closes the

alarm relay on the Tl MDF card in the event

of

red alarms.

The alarm relay can be connected to an

extemalalarmdevicesuchasabuzzer. The

external alarm device must be purchased

separately; it is not provided with the DBS

Tl.

A red alarm indicates a loss of fi-ame @OF)

or loss of signal has continued for over 2.5

seconds.

O=OB (The alarm relay does not close: the

alarm is not reported.)

l=On (The alarm relay closes, so the alarm

is reported.)

Determines whether the system closes the

alarm relay on the T MDF card in the event

of sync loss alalms.

The akmn relay can be connected to an

externalalanndevice suchas abuzzer. ‘Ihe

external alarm device must be purchased

separately; it is not provided with the DBS

Tl.

O=Off (the alarm relay does not close: the

alann is not reported.)

l=On (Ihe alarm relay closes, so the alarm

is reported.)

Sync-loss alarms result from clocking er-

rors.

75

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl DBS Programming Instructions

Issue 2 July 1993 CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 i 3.0 / 4.0

Determines whether the system closes the

alannrelayontheT1MDFcardintheevent

of fi-ame

loss alarms.

The alarm relay can be connected to an

external alarm device such as a buzzer. The

external alarm device must be purchased

separately; it is not provided with the DBS

Tl.

O=Off CIhe alarm relay does not close: the

alarm is not reported.)

l=On me alarm relay closes, so the alarms

is reported.)

Determines whether the system closes the

alannrelayontheT1 MDFcardin theevent

of alarm

indication signals.

An alann indication signal is comprised of

all l’s and is unfi-amed.

The alarm relay can be connected to an

extemalalarmdevicesuchasabuzwr. The

cxtemal alarm device must be purchased

separateb it is not provided with the DBS

Tl.

O=OB flhe alarm relay does not close; the

alarm is not reported.)

l=On me alarm relay closes, so the alarm

is reported.)

76

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions Section 400 FFI

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 bsire 3 July 1993

Determines whether the Tl alarm relay is

cleared (opened) automatically or manuaJly.

If cleared automatically, the relay is opened

approximately one second after the alarm

condition ceases.

Ifcleared manually, the relay can be opened

by entering the Alarm Relay Clear code.

To enter the Alarm Relay Clear code, first

enter the programming authorization code

(#98 9999). .

Determines what trunk type each Tl chan-

nel emulates.

o=LQop start

l=Ground start 1

2=Gmund start 2

3=E&M

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down, then

back up.

O=Auto

l=Manual

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Programming Instruct.io~

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Deterrnines the type of trunk signaling that

each Tl channel emulates.

O=Loop start

I=Ground start 1

2=Ground start 2

3=Ex!zM

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

the system must be powered down, then

back up.

Determines if DID and/or DNIS is provided

for a trunk. DNIS is available only with Tl .

If DID is selected, the system uses a DID

Numbers Table, which supplies 500 DID

numbers. If DNIS is selected, the system

uses aDNISNumbersTable, which supplies

500 DNIS numbers.

The DID NumbersTable canbe used for DID

or DNIS. Therefore, ifall the numbers in the

DNISNumbersTableareused, aT1 channel

can be set to DID, and DIVE service can still

be used.

O=Not nrovided

l=DID

2=DNIS

1. The DBSonlysupports 4-digit DID/DNIS

numbers.

2. For changes to this parameter to take

effect, the system must be powered down,

then back up.

3. When the central oI3ce sends a DID/

DNIScalltotheDBS.itfi.rstrece.ivesawInk

from the DEB before sending the digits.

Once the wink is received, the central of&e

should wait at least 200 ms before sending

the digits. It is the installer’s responsibility

to request the delay from the central office.

i

78

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Inst~ctions section 400 FFl

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 bsue 3 July 1993

Determines the signaling cbs used by T1 Determines the signaling class used by Tl

channels on outgoing calls. channels on incoming calls.

O=Immediate start

l=Wink start

2=Dial-tone start

~~~

@ggzpJg;:;

O=Immediate start

l=Wink start

c?z!ym!J

..ij~~~

For changes to this parameter to take effect.

the system must be powered down, then

i' ~

For changes to this parameter to take effect, back

up.

the system must be powered down, then

back up.

79

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

f

Determines whether Tl channels are used The robbed bit setting determines lfAJ3CD

as outgoing only, or bothway. signaling is used. ABCD signaling robs bits

~ from the Tl channels and uses those bits to

..:“.$;, transmit signaling information.

O=Bothwav

l=Outgoing only

cw3

--::~~

O=Off (ABCD signaling is not used.)

~~~

l=On @BCD signaling is used.)

.:‘i~~~~~~ #@ggy$::

For changes to this parameter to take effect,

~~~ ~

the system must be powered down, then For changes

to

this parameterto take effect,

back up. the system must be powered down, then

back up.

f--

80

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instn~ctions Section 400 FFl

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue 3 July 1993

Determines whether the system expects DP ‘hnsmits dial tone hm the Tl channel to

or DTMF digits for incoming DID or DNIS another DBS within a private network.

calls.

If YXIVIF” is selected, the DBS must be

c- ) equipped with an MFR card.

81

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFl

Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

lbrmn.its busy tone from theT1 channel to lhnsmits dial tone from the Tl channel to

another DBS within a private network. DBS stations.

o=off

l=On

o=m

l=On

c

82

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructiona

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Transmits ringback tone f?om theT1 chan-

nel to the central office

within a private network. or another DBS

o=off

l=On

section 400 FFl

Issut% 3 July 1993

Associates a dialed number with a station.

Associatesafour-digitdialednumberwitha

station number. DNIS is available onlywith

theT1 Interface.

Stations are numbered using one of two

patterns: 10-69 or 100-699.

83

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF2 DBS

Issue 3 July 1993 Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

To set a central o&e line in service, or to

remove it from service, this option must be

used.

To set a central office line for touch-tone or

pulse dialing. (10 pulses per second), this

option must be used.

To set any central office line in service.

enter: To set any central office line for touch tone

dialing, enter:

,lDBSl.ine~ort

numbed#.l#.OW

1. rDBs Iine

Dolt mmbex~#.

2#. on

To remove any central ofllce line from

service, enter: To set any centml o&e line for pulse

dialing, enter:

[FF2l,@BSlineportnumber)#,1#,1# CPllrZ),@BSlineportnumber)#,2#, l# /

A steady, red LED on any FF key

programmed as a line key, indicates

If a central office line is removed from

service, a new caller to that line will

an out-of-service line.

hear a ring, but the DBS user will never

be aware of the caller because ring

assignments for the line will not function.

If the central office line port is designated

as a ground start line (FF2]-(1-64-21)1 it

If a central oflice line port is used for a

is imperative that the 48 volt external

power supply be properly connected to

door-box adapter sensor, set the port for

the terminals on the DBS backplane.

Misconnection of this power supply

pulse dialing.

can result in serious damage to the

DBS main cabinet. See DBS In&all&on

Instructions manual (section 300). and

Technote 1 (March 1991). for further

information.

The j-lash and redial features will not

operate if a line has been designated as

“ground start*. See technote 13 (March

1992) for further information.

84

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

I

/ \

\

Section 400 FF2

Issue 3 July 1993

To place a central office line in a group so

that it can be one of many that can be

automatically chosen for outbound

dialing, this option must be used.

When dialing a “9” from an SLT or

digital extension, or pressing an FF

key that is set as a pooled trunk key,

any available line in the group will be

accessed.

To not include a central office line to be a

member of the “9” access group, enter:

.- .:\ ,i

~),@BSIlneportnumber)#,3#,0#

To set any central office line to be ‘a

member ofthe “9” access group, enter:

.IDBSline~ort

number)#.3#.1#

n. @gJgg’i

:..- .i.,.i,.,., . ..e

Set FFl option “LCR Access” for “Pooled

Trunk Access” cdl. If this option is set for

“LCRAccess”, central o&e line selection

will default to pooled central office line

access group 9, if all lines that could be

used for “ICR Access” are busy.

The line selection is made from the

highest line number in the group, to the

lowest line number in the group.

To place a central office line in a

group so that it can be one of many

that can be automatically chosen for

outbound dialing, this option must

be used. When dialing an

“81, 82.83,

84, 85 or 86” from ‘an SLT or digital

extension. or pressing an FF key that is

set as a multiple central office (MCO)

line key, any available line in the group

wilI be accessed.

To set any central office line to be a

member of the “81” access group, enter:

-:

~],@BSIlneportnumber)#,4#,1#

-To ‘set- any central office line to be a

member of the ?82” access group, enter:

To set any central office line to be a

member of the 333” access group, enter:

To set any central office line to be a

member of the “84” access group, enter:

To set any central office line to be a

member of the “85” access group. enter:

@FZJ,(DBSlineport

number)#,8#,1#

85

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF2

Issue 3 July 1993

To set any central office line to be a

member of the “86” access group, enter:

[eez], (DBS line port number)#, 9#, l#

To remove any central office line &om any

access group (81 through 86), enter:

1. (DBS line Mlrt numberld. (49lW,

06

The same trunks may appear in more

than one line access group and include

access group 9.

The line selection in a particular group is

madef+omthehighestavailablelinenumber

to the lowest available line number.

DBS Programxdq Ix~tructiona

WC-A

/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Each central of&e line port must be

identified as a regular central o!IIce line, or

PBX line.

To set the central of&e line type to central

offke, enter:

1.KBSl.ineportnumber)#. 1OW. l#

To set the central of&e line type to PBX,

enter:

Toll restriction settings can be affected by

this setting.

lf a central o&e line port is used for a

door-box adapter sensor, set the port for

pulse dialing.

Ifthe central office line port is designated

as a ground start line [FF2]-21#. it is

imperative that the 48 volt external power

supply be properly connected to the

terminals on the DBS backplane.

nnection of this power supply

aznmsuZtinsedusdamagetothe

DBsmainctlbheL

See DBSlnstallation Instructions manual

(section 300). and Technote 1 (March

1991). for further i.nformation.

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Inst.ructions

WC-A / 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

i

Section 400 FF2

Issue 3 July 1993

To set acentral office Iine(s) to automaticaRy

provide DiSAtone upon connection with an

inbound cakr. this option must be set

To set any central office line to provide a

DISA tone when connected to a new

inbound caller, enter:

~],@BSlinep0rtnumher)#, ll#, l#

To ‘set any central of& I&e so that it does

not provide a DISA tone when connected

to a new inbound caller, enter:

l.lDBSline~ortnumberM. ll#.O#

To set automatic DISA start and end

times, see [FIG?] 19#. and 20# program

addresses, and the DISA code program

address at [FFl], 6#.

Any extension can be set with a private

centml ofIke line(s). A number of private

lines can belong to one extension, but

the same private line cannot be set on

multiple extensions.

To set extension port 15 for central office

Iine 12 to be a private central of&e I.i.ne(s),

enter:

pF2], lS#, 12#, 12#

To reset anv extension to the default

initialized

~rh&e he

value. Dress IFI%?L

@BS line oort number)#. 12#. ICONFZ,

JON/OFl?l.

Anincom.ingcalIonaprivateIinewiIlonIy

ring on one extension.

Once the private line option is set, other.

extensions cannot make outbound calls

or receive inbound caIls on that line.

Ifthe private Iine setting is disabled, caIIs

cannot be made or received on that line(s)

without manualIy reprogrammingthe toil

restriction options of an extension(s) to

which the line should now appear.

In DBS instaIlations using the WC-A

card, the highest extension port number

that can be used is 72.

87

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF2

Issue 3 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

To set an automatic pause during dialing

on a central of&e line defined as PBX this

option must be used.

To set the automatic pause on line 15 for

example, (once line 15 is defined as a

PBX). enter:

pm. SW. 13w. 19

To disable the automatic pause on line 12

for example. (once line 12 is defI.txd as a

PBX), enter:

pF2], 128, 136, ow

See [FFl], 3.# 12# program option, for the

timer used for this pause.

To define whether dialed digits will be

outpulsed after dial tone has been

detected, or not, this option is used.

To outpulse dialed digits only after dial

tone is detected, enter:

1,fDB!3liDeDOrtnumber~u.

141y.on

To outpulse dialed digits according to the

system dial pause timer, enter:

lfthis option is not set, the dialed number

is outpulsed according to the system dial

pause time.

To increase the duration of the MMF

signal when making an outbound call,

use this feature. c

To set the on/off duration of an

outbound

IXMF signal to 75 ms. on and

sd’ms.‘tAT.

enter:

1.nlBSliDeDortllDmber~#.

15#.1#

To set the on,!off duration of an

outbound .

M’MF signal to 125 ms. on and 125 ms.

off. enter:

PW2],(DBSlineportnumber)#, 15#,2#

To set the on/off duration of an

outbound

MMF signal to 250 111s. on and 250 ms.

off, enter:

lFF2], (DBSlineportnumber)#, 15#, 3W

fFF2],@ESlineportnumber)#, 14#, 111

88

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A

/ 3.0

WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF2

Issue 3 July 1993

To allow a central ofike line(s) to be able to

be used in an unsupervised conference

call, this feature is used.

To disable line 22, for (xample, so that it

cannot be used in aline to line conference,

enter:

JFKBl. 22#. 16W. OW

To set line 22 to be able to be used as one

of the lines in a line to he conference.

enter:.

c ‘> m], 22W. 16#, l#

See [FF3], 13# program address to start a

conference call.

A conferenced call will be disconnected if

the call go& beyond the time set in

unsupervised conference timer.

The ring pattem of each central oflice line

can be set in one of nine patterns to

provide easy recognition of different lines.

- MI

lon/3off 1

I I

1# 3on/loff I I

6# 5

OKl/.5Off

I

I I

2#

2on/2off ?I#

1 I 5 on I.5 off 1.5 onf2J

Off

I

I I

Y lon/lon I I

8# 5 onl3.5off I

I I

4# 1 on/2off I I

9# lon/7off I

There is no change in the ring pattern for

transferred calls.

89

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF2

Issue 3 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

WhenaazntmIoi3keIinecaIIisdisconnected,

theaxdralofficeSendSadiScoMectSignal.

TheDESneedstoint.erpretaIIvaIidsi@aIs,

so that the central office line can be

disco~ected fbm it This

feature provides

this function.

I

. -Ins I

I l# I >5OIllS 14 zQ5oms. I

I 2# I >loOlllS I 1o# I >5OORlS

I

I 3ff I

>15oms 1 11% I 9350 ms I

I7# 1 235oms I15# 1 >75oms /

Any centraI of&e Iine that is set as a DISA

line, can be set to start DISAoperation at

a speciBed time.

To set a central of&e I.ine that has DISA

capability to start DISA operation at a

certain time, enter:

FW, @BS tie port number)#, 19#,

HHMBM.

To reset DISA start time czmbiIitv to the

default initiakedvalue. mess lFF21. (DB!3

mrt numberl#, 19#. ICONFl. ION/ f-

The start time is set in a 24hour format

without punctuation or a space between

the hour and minute.

90

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Inst~ctione

Section4OOFF2

WC-A / 3.0 WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

hue

3JulJr 1993

AI-IY central oflke line

that is set as a DISA

line. can be set to stop DISA operation at

a speclfied time.

To set a central oflEe Iine that has DISA

capability to stop DISA operation at a

certain time, enter:

fFF2], (DBS line port number)#, 20#,

HH.MM#.

,f “\

\

To reset DISA ston time canabiI.itv to the

default i.nitializedvaIue. Dress IFF21. (DF3S

rmrt numberlt 20##. lCONFl. iON/

%I.

Determines whether the trunk circuit is

ananaIogloopstart, analogground start,

analog DID, or Tl.

o=bOD Start

l=Ground start

2=DID

3=Tl

For changes to this parameter to take

eBect,thesystemmustbepowereddown,

then back up.

‘Ihe stop time is set in a 24-hour format

without a space between the hour and

minute.

91

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF2

Issue 3 July 1993

Any central office line position in the DBS

can be set as either a loop-start or

ground-start circuit.

To set central office line position 3, for

example, as a loop start line, enter:

ml. 3#.21#.0#

To set central o&e line position 7. for

example, as a ground start line, enter:

pF2],7#,21#, l#

Ground. start line capability is available

only with CFC-B configurations.

lfaground-starttrunk is enabled, FFl],

3#.

%I## and 21# progmm addresses must

beset

Trunk card VB 43531 is also required.

The DBS must be turned off, then turned

on to set any change that is made in this

program option.

lf a central of&e line port is used for a

door-box adapter sensor, set the port for

pulse dialing.

If the central of3ce line port is designated

as a ground start line in this program

address, it is imperative that the 48

volt external power supply be properly

connected to the terminals on the DBS

backplane.

DBS Rogramming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

See DBS installation Instructions manual

(section 300). and Technote 1 (March

199 1). for further information.

The j7mh and mdiaf features will not

operate if a line has been designated as

ground start”. See technote 13 (March

1992) for further tiormalion. :

Miinnection of this power suppZy

can result in serious damage to the

DBS main cabinet.

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF2

Issue 3 July 1993

AnycentmlofficelinepositionintheDBScan

be set as either aloop-start, ground-start or

DIDcimuit..Loopstartlinesarethemost

common @pe of centml office line. Ground

start lines pi&on-n similaj, except they

provide

the” most reliable connection

between the Central office and DBS, in

terms of positive disconnect signals and

no possibility of line crashes or ‘glare”.

DiIrctInwaKlDiaJinglin~arebeneficialin

that the centml oilice can place multiple

inbound calls, with different numbers, over

thesamecircuit.Also, thesenumberscan

be .programmed to appear on multiple

DBS extensions. DID circuts can only be

used for inbound calls.

To set central office line position 3, for

example, as a loop start line. enter:

JFlm 3#.21#.0#

To set central office line position 7, for

example, as a ground start Iine, enter:

pT2],7#,21#, I#

To set

central office line position 14, for

example, as a Direct Inward Dial line,

enter:

p=m]*14#,21#,2#

If

a

ground start line(s) is enabled. [FFl]

3#. 20# & 21#

adresses

must be set.

When a ground start card is in use, the

ports on that card can be configured as

either ground or loop start lines.

Trunk card VB 43531 is also required.

‘Ihe DBS must be turned off. then turned

on to set any change that is made in this

program option.

If a central office line p0i-t is used for a

door-box adapter sensor, set the port for

pulse dialing.

Ifthecentxalofficeliieportis~iii&akdas

a

ground start line in this program

address, it is imperative that the 48 volt

external power supply be properly .-

connected to the terminals on the -.

DBS backplane.

IfDIDis chosen.

checkthe [FE!] 22#, 23#.

24# & 25#

adresses.

DID circuits involve the use of a dedicated

DID card.

nnection of this pozoer supply

am

result

in serious damage to the

DBS main cabinet.

See DBS Installation Instructions manual

(section 300). and Technote 1 (March

199 1). for fixther information.

‘The J&I and red&I features will not

operate

if a line has been designated as

“ground start”. See

technote 13 (March

1992) for further information.

Ground start line capability is available

only with WC-B configurations.

93

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF2

Issue 3 July 1993 DBS Ro@ammin~ Ins~ctions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

After connecting with a Central office,

the DBS will wait 65 milliseconds

before accepting the digits of a dialed

number, or can be set to wait for a

“wink” signal from a central office

before accepting the digits of a dialed

number.

To set the DID line to immediately accept

the dialed number Tom the central oflice.

enter:

. CDBS DID line sort numbed%,

22w. on

To set the DID line to wait for the central

office wink signal before accepting the

dialed number f&m the central of.Ilce,

enter:

If “wink” signalling is used for the

operation of Direct Inward Dialing

line, a timer is required to be set. This

timer sets the maximum time the DBS

will wait before accepting the dialed

digits from the central office.

llun3 .~. . . . ..^ -me..y

14oms.~ lw 3ooms.

l# 16OmS 9# 32om

2# 18OmS lo# 34oms.

Id

26oms. I 14# I 42orIK I

FW, PBS DID line port number)%,

22#, l#

7# 28oms 44oms

94

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

Section400

FF2

CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue 3July1993

Once the central office starts to send the

dialed digits to the DBS over a DID line, it

is necessary to be able to disconnect the

line in the case of a transmission

disruption.-The maximum amount of

time that is allowed for the transmission

of the digits is set with this feature.

Tinle Time

o#

No Time Out 8#

22Second.5

I I

l#

15 seconds I I

w

23Second.s I

2# 16Seconds

lo# 24 Seconds

3# 17Seconds

ll#

25

Seconds

48 18 Seconds 12#

26SecorKis

S# 19

Seconds 13#

27Seconds

6#

20 Seconds 14#

28Seconds

7# 21Seconds

1%

29Secods

L

Oncethedigitsbegintobeoutpulsedii-om

thecentralofEiceonaDIDline,itisnecessary

to define the maximum allowable time

between digits. This -feature sets the

maximum allowable time between the

outpulsing of digits from the central

office, before a central office time out is

assumed.

95

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF2

Issue 3 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Assigns a port class to each trunk port

that will access the Tl. Port classes are

used to assign pad levels to connections

made via the Tl. (Pad levels control

volume.)

Figure 1 shows circuit-typenumbers. Cir-

cuit Apes 4-6 are used to assign port

classes to tlunks.

Figure 1. Circuit-type Numbers

circuit Types No.

K-TEL 1

SLT

2

DATA#

3

Analog CO Trk 4

Tl Master

5

Tl Slave

6

OPTION l*

7

OPTION 2* 8

DTMF# 9

CONF (SCC)# 10

TONE1 (MFRl)# 11

TONE2

(MFR2)# 12

DBS trunks are assigned a default cir-

cuit type. based on whether they are

analog or Tl. The circuit type is used

with digital pad settings to determine

the loss/gain settings for connections to

the Tl (See ‘Digital Pad Setting.“).

The Tl Port Class parameter is provided

in case a specific trunk or group of

trunks needs a unique pad level.

For example, aT1 in a slave cabinet

may be assigned as a ‘circuit type 6.”

However, the circuit type for the Tl

bunk port could be changed to 8 (Op-

tion 2). Once the port number is

changed to circuit type 8, the pad levels

for circuit type 8 could be changed to

provide the correct volume setting.

Circuit types are also provided for sta-

tion ports. See Figure 1 for a definition

of circuit types.

This programming parameter allows

youtoassigncircuittypes l-12toa

trunk port. However, the default circuit

type for a trunk port should only be

changed to circuit type 7 or 8 (Options

1 or 2).

c

96

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

i

,’

DBS Romanming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF3

Issue 3 July 1993

3-3 EXTENSION PROGRAM

SETTINGS

The choice of 2-digit or 3-digit extension

numbers are assigned in this feature.

To set extension port 3 to extension

number 333, for example, enter:

pF3], 3#, I#, 333w

To set extension port 4 to extension

number 222, for example, enter:

FF31,4#, I#, 222%

To clear a DBS extension nor-t number,

press lFF31. (DBS extension nort

number)#, l#. lCONF1.

Cl>

&&)$g&ii;;

3-digit extension numbers must be used

with 60 or more extensions.

See the [FFl], 12# program address to

check the digit length that has been set in

the DBS .

If an alternate attendant position is set,

the extension numbers are as follows:

Attendant telephone 1: Extension 100 or

10.

The default DBS extension numbers are

1OOatpor-t 1,101 atport2.102atport3,

etc. _

Extension 100 cannot be assigned to a

different port.

If extension 10 1 or 11 is deleted, the

alternate attendant is canceled.

_ _.

ClearingtheextensionportnumberDOES

NOT retrun it to its default value. Once an

extension port number is cleared. the port

is inoperative until an extension

number is reassigned to it.

Attendant telephone 2: Extension 101 or

11.

97

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section4OOFF3 DBS Rogramming lnstn~ctions

Issue 3July1993 CPGA/ 3.0, WC-B /;r.O / 3.0 /4.0

Some DBS extension ports are

automatically configured as to the type of

equipment, when the hardware is

physically installed on the port. Terminal

type designations are assigned to

extension hardware as follows:

l#:

Single-line telephone devices will

automaticallyconfiguretheextensionport

28: 16 key telephone devices will

automatically configure the extension port

3#: 22 key telephone devices will

automaticallyconQuretheextensionport

48: 34 key telephone devices will

automaticallyconfQuretheextensionport

58:

Future option

6W: Future option

7W:

EM/24 device will automatically

configure on the extension port

8W: OPX pulse device needs to be

manually configured on the extension

pod

9W: OPX touch tone’ device needs to be

manually configured on the extension

Poe

lO#: Voice mail (non proprietary) devices

that are corrected to an analog extension

port need to be manually configured on

the extension port

ll#:DSSl (forextension lOOor 10)needs

to be manually configured on the

extension port

12#: DSS2 (for extension lOOor 10) needs

to be manually configured on the

extension port

13W: DSS3 (for extension 10 1 or 11) needs

to be manually configured on the

extension port

14#:

DSS4 (for extension 10 1 or 11) needs

to be manually configured on the

extension port

15#:

Voice mail (non proprietary with

OPX) needs to be manually configured on

the extension port

168 to lQ#:

DSS consoles l-4 need to be

manually confIgured on the extension

port.. The Attendant feature package is

available with the use of CPC-B, ver. 2.00

or newer, as a special EPROM set.

206: Future option

21W to 286: Proprietary ACD channels

willautomaticaUy configure the extension

PO*

29U:

Future option

39U: Futureoption .

31#

to

38#: Proprietary Automated

Attendant channels will automatically

co*m the extension ports

396 to 46#:

Proprietary Voice Mail

channels will automatically configure the I

extension ports

lfDSS1istobeinstalledonextensionport

2,

for example, enter:

pF3].2#,2#,11#

‘lhedefaultinitia&edvalueofaoarticular

extension nor-t is based on the tvne of

extension card that is installed in the DBS

cabinet.

After manually setting types 1 l- 14, or ’ :

16- 19, disconnect the modularjacks from

the devices and then reconnect them.

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming I.nstructionf~ Section4OOFF3

CPGA/ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Issue

3July1993

Some DBS extension ports are

automatically configured as to the type of

equipment, when the hardware is

physically installed on the port. Terminal

type designations are assigned to

extension hardware as follows:

OW: No assignment

l#: Single-line telephone devices will

automaticallyconfiguretheextensionport

2#: 16 key telephone devices will

automaticallyconfrgurethe extensionport

3#: 22 key telephone devices will

automatically configure the extension port

4C: 34 key telephone devices will

automaticallycotiguretheextensionport

5#: Future option

6W: Digital SLT telephone

7W: EM/24 device will automatically

configure the extension port

SW: OPX pulse device needs to be

manually configured on the extension

pod

9#: OPX touch tone device needs to be

manually confIgured on the extension

PO*

lO#: Voice mail (non proprietary) devices

that are connected to an analog extension

port need to be manually configured on

the extension port

11%: DSS 1 (for extension 100 or 10) needs

to be manually configured on the

extension port

12#: DSS2 (for extension 1OOor 10) needs

to be manually configured on the

extension port

13d: DSS3 (for extension 10 1 or 11) needs

to be manually configured on the &en-

sion port

14W: DSS4 (for extension 10 1 or 11) needs

to be manually configured on the &en-

sion port

SW:

Voice mail (non- proprietary with

OPX) needs to be manually configured on

the extension port

16# to-19%: DSS

consoles l-4 need to be

manually configured on the extension

port. The Attendant feature package is

available with the use of WC-B, ver. 2.00

or newer, as a special EPROM set.

lfDSS 1 is tobeinstalledonextensionport

2,

for example, enter-z

W],2#, 2#, 11w

The default initializedvalue of anariicular

extension nort is based on the tyne of

extension card that is installed in the DBS

cabinet.

Aftermanuallysettingtypes 11-14, or 16-

19, disconnect the modular jacks from

the devices and then reconnect #em.

99

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Scction4-OOFF3

Issue3JulylS93

Define the EM/24 extension module

hardware port number, then assign an

extension port number that will be used

with it. The first program entry relates

to the EM/24 port number, the second

program entry refers to the extension

port that the EM/24 works with.

To set a po& for the EM/24 to work with

extension port 30, for example, enter:

pF3],

55#, 31c;3ow

To reset the use of an EM/24 on anv

extension

sort

to the default initialized

value. Dress (FF31. (DBS extension

DOI%

number). 3#. lCONF1. ION/OFF1

DBSRo@ammin~Ins~ctions

CF'GA/ 3.0, CPGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

a. set the port that the EM/24 is on

[FF3], (l- 144)#, 2#.

b. Reset the EM/24 by unplugging it

and reconnecting it.

c. Proceed with key programming via

[FF5], (l-144)#, (l-24)#.

When programming an EM/24 with

CPC-B software versions newer than

2.11. this programming order is not

required. SeeTechnote 15 (August 1992)

for complete information.

After manually reprogramming an

EM/24 when any version of CPC

software is used, disconnect the

modular jack from the device and then

reconnect it.

When a change to the default key

assignments is required on an EM/24,

and CPC-B 2.0X series software prior to

version 2.05 is being used, the program

procedure must be done in the following

order:

100

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Inst~~ctlons

CPGA / 3.0 CF’C-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF3

Issue 3 July 1993

If an extension is set for Least Cost

Routing, the user must dial “9”. or press

an FF key that is set for the LCR h&ion,

in order to gain access to a central office

line.

To set an extension port so that the dialing

of a “9”. or the necessity to press an LCR

key is not needed. enter:

[FF3], (DBS eit&on port number)#,

46, on

Tosetanextensionportsothatthedialing

of a “9”. or the necessity to press an LCR

key is needed, enter: .

DBS extensions can be set so that central

office-line calls can only be made after

entering an account code.

“I.

To set an extension so that an account

code is not needed to make a central office

line call, enter:

1. IDBS

extension sort number)%,

5#.0#

To set an extension so that an account

code is needed to make a central of&e line

call, enter:

WI. @BS extension port number)#,

5#,

I#

1, lDBs

extension

sort

numb&#,

4#.1#

101

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Scction4OOFF3

Issue3

July1993 DBS I’m@ammiq Iustructions

CF'GA/ 3.0, CPGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

DBS extensions can be set so that central

office-line calls can only be made after

entering a forced account code that is

verified. Verification is enabled or

disabled on an extension basis.

To set an extension so that a verified

forced account code is not needed to make

a central of&e line call, enter:

1. lDB6 exte!nsion DOIt

numberI%,

5#. on

To set an extension so that a verified

forced account code is needed to make a

central office line call, enter:

D31, @Bs

extension port number)#,

5#,

1#

WC-B versions 3.00 and newer, do not

have the forced account code capability of

earlier versions. All forced account codes

have to be verified. The use of non forced,

non verified account codes is still an

option if stringent access to Central Office

lines is not required.

A

4-digit lockout code can be set on an

extension to prevent unauthorized people

from making central office line calls from

the extension.

To set extension 100, with lockout code

452

1, for example, enter:

PF3],11y,6#,4521#

To reset anreviouslvlocked out

extension

to the default inttialtzed value.

DRSS

lFF3l

IDBS extension

sort

number)#. 6#,

jCONFi. lON/OFFI,

102

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Pro@ammh~ I.nstructions Section 400 FF3

CPGA/ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue 3 July 1993

To be notified by a tone. when a new

central o&e line call has anived at an

extension that is currently engaged in a

conversation, this option must be set.

To disable extension 100, for example. for

off hook signaling, enter:

ml, I#*

7#,0#

To

send a tone from acaJling extension to

an extension that is in use, this option

must be set. A tone is not sent however,

when off hookvoice announce is enabled.

ln the case of OHVA being used, the

calling party to an extension in use can

verbally override the existing

conversation.

To enable extension 100, for example, for

off hook signaling, enter:

To disable the call waiting notitication

tone or the OHVA capability on extension

100, for example, enter:

JFF3L I.#. 7#. l# pFe31. 1#,8#,0#

,' \

./'

To reset anv extension

DORIS

to the default

initialized value, Dress IFF31. uort.#. 7#, To enable the callwaitingnot&alion tone

conf#. ION/OFFl. or the OHVA capability on extension 100.

for example, enter:

pm.

I#. 8#. l#

This tone will not be sent during a

conference call, while the called extension

is on hold, or during a &l on m central

office line for which there is no kne key on

the telephone. The call waiting noti&ation tone cannot

be sent to an extension set with an

The off-hook signal volume and the

off-hook signal pattern are separate

settings. See program addresses [FF3],

15#, & lf3. When an off-hook tone is

enabled on an extension. the extension

will be excluded Tom any hunt group

setting that may be enabled for it.

absence message, or that is on hold, or

that is receiving another call or that is

involved in a conference call.

IfaVoiceAnnoun~ Unit (modelVB-43708)

is co~ected to the

DEB off hook signalkng

@ES], (l-144)#, 7#, l#) must be enabled on

all&ensions.SeeTecbnote 14(March 1992)

for complete tiormation.

103

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF3

DB3RogmmmhnInstructions

Issue3July1993 WC-A / 3.0, CPGB /2-O / 3.0 / 4.0

To be able to “barge into” an extension

that is currently in use from another

extension, this option must be enabled

on the baruinq extension.

To

disable the use of the busy override

option from extension 100, for example,

enter:

plea. l#. 9#,0#

To enable the use of the busy override

option from extension 100, for example.

enter:

pF31, lW, 9#, l#

The busy override option cannot be

disabled on the attendant telephones in

all WC-A software versions, and CPC-B

softwareversi0nsearlierthanversi0n2.00.

The busy override option can be

disabled on the attendant telephones in

CPC-B software. newer than ver. 2.00

Busy override is not possible to an

extension: that is not set to accept it, or

is involved in a conference call.

To be able to override a busy extension,

the calling extension must be in the

same page group. Page group 00 is not

included in this exception.

To allow an extension to be able to be

“barged into” from another extension,

this option must be enabled on the

barged extension.

To disable extension 101, for example,

from being barged into by another

extension enter:

fFF3],2#,10#,0#

To enable extension 101, for example,

to be able to be barged into by another

extension enter:

jFF31.2#.10#:1# l

The override tone can be set to sound

during an ongoing central office call, to

indicate a new call arrival.

104

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Pro@ammin~ Instmctions

CPCA / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF3

Issue 3 July 1993

Access to an available central office line

assigned to the FFl key can be

automatic by picking up the receiver.

If the FFl key is a pooled trunk key, an

available central office line is accessed

in numerical order from the highest line

number assigned to the key, to the

lowest.

To disable prime line pickup on

extension 100, for example, enter:

pF31.

l#. ll#.O#

To enable prime line pickup on

extension 100, for example, enter:

fm3],1#,11#,1#

Picking up the receiver at a ringing

extension connects the incoming

central office line call, hold recall, or

transferred call, if this option is

enabled. . .

To disable auto pickup at extension

100. for example, enter:

p3],1#,12%,0#

To enable auto pickup at extension 100.

for example, enter:

@F31. l#. lb. l#

Intercom calls cannot be made with this

option enabled, unless an intercom call

key is assigned to another FF key.

105

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF3

Issue3

July1993

DBS ~ogmumiq~ Instructiona

WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B /2.0 /-3.0 / 4.0

c

To enable a DBS user to initiate a three

party conference between 2 central office

lines and his extension, this option must

be set. Once the conference is initialized,

the DBS msion user can drop out of the

callbypmssingeitherofthecentralofficeline

keysusedtocalltheoth~parties.

To disable extension 100, for example, to

not be able to initiate a three party

conference, enter:

mm

1#.13#.0#

To enable extension 100, for example to be

abletoWiateathreepartyconfen3rce,enten

pF31, 1n,131Y, l#

TheDBSusercanreentertheconferenceby

pressing either of the two centml office line

keys used to initiate the conferenaz. The

conferencewillautornaticallyexpireafterthe

period of time set in the Unsupervised

conference

l7me.r. set by the Wl], 3#,

1 l#

address.

See auto pause for PBX line address (FF2],

13#. Auto pause cannot be used ifthe

mnfmce feature is desired when the DBS

isusedbehindaPBX

The Central Office line program for

conferencing, [FF2], 16# must also be

set when conferences are allowed.

Any extension can be removed from the

SMDR report, so that call activity from

that port will not be recorded.

To not include extension 100. for

example, in the SMDR report, enter:

ml,

lW, 14#, ow

To include extension 100, for example,

in the SMDR report, enter:

ml.

I#. 14#. l#

Check the SMDR start timer feature

found at program address [FFl], 2#, l#,

2#.

Communication program options

that need to be checked when this

option is set include all options found

under [FFl], 2#, 2#, l-lO#. I

CPC-B software version 2.00 should be

upgraded to version 2.05 to eliminate

two intermittent potential SMDR

deficiencies in recording Aeld codes.

See Technotes 8 & 12 (March 1992). for

complete information.

106

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Ro@ammin~ Instructions

CPGA / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF3

Issue 3 July 1993

Off-hook signaling volume can be set to

either of four different levels.

To set the off hook signal volume to the

minimum level on extension 100, for

example, enter:

When off hook signaling is set on an

extension, the tone pattern can be sent

continuously or only once.

To send a continuous tone pattern for

an off hook signal to extension 100, for

example, enter:

wF3], 19, 15#, l#

LFF31.

1#.16#.0#

To set the off hook signal volume to the

next level on extension 100. for

example, enter: To send a single tone pattern for an off

hook signal to extension 100, for

example, enter:

jFF31.

l#. 15#.2# lep3], l#, 166. 1W

To set the off hook signal volume to the

third level on extension 100, for

example, enter:

(pLIp3], lW, 15#,3#

To set the off hook signal volume to the

maximum level on extension 100, foi

example, enter:

(FF3],1#,15#,4#

See alert tone for busy override at

address [FFl], 2 #, l#, 17#.

See alert tone for busy override at ad-

dress [FFl], 2 #, l#, 17#.

See off hook signal address [FF3], 7#.

See offhook signal volume address [FF3],

15#.

See off hook signal address ]FF3]. 7#.

See off hook signal pattern address

[FF3], 16#.

107

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section4OOFF3 DBS Ro@ammin~ Instructions

Issue3July1993 WC-A/ 3.0, WC-B /2.0 13.0 / 4.0

The large screen telephone can show

either 5 or 10 personal speed dial names

when this feature is chosen.

To choose to display 5 names on a large

display telephone that is at extension

100, for example, enter:

If an extension is to be included in one

or more of the eight hunt groups, this

option needs to be set.

To exclude extension 100 from page

group 0, for example, enter:

m3],1#,18#,0#

JFF31.1#.17#.0#

To choose to display 10 names on a

large display telephone that is at

extension 100, for example, enter:

wF31, l#, 17W, l#

When the 10 name option is used, the

maximum length of a name is 7

characters.

See address [FFG], 3#, to assign

personal speed dial names to personal

speed dial numbers.

See address (FFlO], 2#, l-14# to assign

personal speed dial. numbers to an

extension.

To include extension 100 in page group

1. for example, enter:

rFF31, 18, 19#, l#

To exclude extension 100 from page

group 2, for example, enter:

.

/-

pw3],1#,20#,0#

To include extension 100 in page group

3, for example, enter:

pm], 1#,21#, 1w

To exclude extension 100 from page

group 4. for example, enter:

ml. 1#,22#,0#

To include extension 100 in page group

5, for example, enter:

lFF3],1#,23#,1#

To exclude extension 100 from page

group 6. for example, enter:

tFF3],1#,24#,0#

10s

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Pro@mmhg Inb-uctions

CFGA/ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Section 400

FF3

Issue3

July1993

ThejXowing program options apply

toI~dispZayte&phonesonZy.

To include extension 100 in page group

7. for example, enter:

p3], I#, 25#, I#

To reset Dagle IlrOuD inclusion to the

default initialized value. Dress lFF3L

IDBS extension Dart number)#,

j18-25)#. O#. lON/OFFl:

c

\

I

. -I

To display soft key options on the large

display telephone (VB-43225). when the

phone is in the idle mode, this option

must be set.

To review the screen prompts associated

with the options of this program, see the

appendix following this section.

109

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF3 DB3 Programming Instructtons

Issue 3 July 1993 WC-A / 3.0. CPGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

To display soft key options on the large

display telephone (VB-43225). during

the time DBS dial tone is heard, this

option must be set.

To display soft key options on the large

display telephone (VB-43225). when

calling another extension, this option

must be set.

o#

1#

No Change

Main Menu

12# Function Saeen 2

lut Function Saeen 3

2# Personal Speed Dial 14# Function Screen 4

3# System Speed Dial 15# Function Saeen 5

4# Extension Index 16# Function Screen 6

o#

l#

No Change 12# Function Screen 2

Main

Menu

13# Function Screen 3

2# PersonalSpeedDial 14# Function Saeen 4

3# system speed Dial 15# Function Screen 5

4# Extension Index 16# Function Screen 6

5# Guidance Menu 1 17# Function Screen 7

6# Guidance Menu 2 1% Function Screen 8

1 1 7# Guidance Menu 3 I-># 1 Function Screen 9 I

8# Attendant Menu 1 20# Function Screen 10

y# Attendant Menu 2 21# Function Screen 11

1 lo# 1 Attendant Menu 3 ~ ---22# [~Function Saeenl2 I

1 l# Function Screen 1 2ut Function Screen 13

2# Function Screen 14

11# Function Screen 1 23# Function Screen 13

2# Function Saeen 14

To review the screen prompts associated

with the options of this program, see the

appendix following this section.

To review the screen prompts associated

with the options of this program, see the

appendix following this section.

110

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBSPro@-~Instructions

WC-A/ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Scction4OOFF3

Issue3

July1993

To display soft key options on the

large display telephone m-43225).

when accessing a central office line,

this option must be set.

LCD Menu LCD Menu

o#

No Change 12# 1 Function Screen 2

(1#)nMen u 1 13# 1 Function Screen 3 1

2# .Personal Speed Dial 14# Function Screen 4

3# System Speed Dial 15# Function Screen 5

4# Extension Index 16# Function Screen 6

5#

Guidance Menu 1 17# Function Screen 7

6# Guidance Menu 2 18# Function Screen 8

7# Guidance Menu 3 19# Function Screen 9

ll# Function Screen 1 23# Function Screen 13

24## Function Screen 14 1

D -:#@J!$$p

. . . . .::. : . . ..*:‘.

To review the screen prompts associated

with the options of this program, see the

appendix following this section.

To display soft key options on the large

display telephone W-43225). when in

conversation on central office line, this

option must be set.

::..i .pb9 : ...I ~~eQll

a#

No Change 12# Function Screen 2

4#

Extension Index 16#I Function Screen 6

5# Guidance Menu 1 17# Function Saeen 7

rir-

Guidance Menu 2 I 1~

I

Function Screen 8

I

To review the screen prompts associated

with the options of this program, see the

appendix following this section.

111

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF3 DBS Pro@ammiqf InsIndions

Issue 3 July 1993 CPGA / 3.0, WC-B /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

To display soft key options on the large

display telephone (V&43225), when

receiving a page, this option must be

set.

LCJI Main

Function Saeen 2

I 1# I

Main Menu 1 13# 1 Function Screen 3 I

To display soft key options on the large

display telephone (VB-43225). when a

receiving a call waiting tone, this option

must be set.

OH

l#

No Change !2# Function Screen 2

Main Menu 13# Function Saeen 3

I

2#

I

Personat Sueed Dial

I

1~ I Function Screen 4

I I

2# I Personai Streed Fiat I 14#

I

Function Screen 4

7

3##

System Speed Dial 15# Function Saeen 5

4# Extension kdex 16# Function Screen 6

3# System Speed Dial 1% Function Screen 5

4# Extension Index 16# Function Saeen 6

I

H

I

GuidanceMenu 1 I 17# I Function Saeen 7 I

6# Guidance Menu 2 18# Function Saeen 8

7# Guidance Menu 3 I# Function Saeen 9

I

8#

~1

Attendant Menu 1 I 20# I Function Screen 10 I I 8# I Attendant Menu 1 --I 20#

I

Function Screen 10 I

9#i Attendant Menu 2 21# Function Screen 11

1W Attendant Menu 3 22# Function Screen 12

9# Attendant Menu 2 21# Function Screen 11

10# Attendant Menu 3 22# Function Screen 12

I Id

Function Saeen 1

I

23#

I

Function Screen 13

I

24# Function Screen 14

To review the screen prompts associated

with the options of this program, see the

appendix following this section.

ll# Function Screen 1 23# Function Screen 13

24# Function Screen 14

To review the screen prompts associ-

ated with the options of this program,

see the appendix following this section.

112

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Pro@ammin~ Instructions Section 400 FF3

CPGA / 3.0 CF’C-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue 3 July 1993

To display soft key options on the

large display telephone W-43225).

when dialing an extension, this option

must be set.

UJDMUIU LCDMHUI

o#

No Change 12# 1 FunctionScreen

The large display telephone (W-43225)

can be set to display 5 or 10 extension

names after the extension menu hasbeen

displayed.

rxD h4eau

No Change

LcDMe4ltt

12# I Function keen 2

I 1# I

Main Menu 1 13# 1 FunctionScreen I

I 1# I

Main Menu I 13# I Function Screen 3 1

I

2#

I

Personal speed Dial I 1~ I Function Screen4 I I 2# I krson~ Speed Dial I 14# I Function Screen 4 I

3# System Speed Dial 1% Function Screen 5

# Extension Index 16# Function Screen 6

3# System Speed Dial lS# FunctionSaeen5

4# Extension Index 16# Function Saecn 6

5#

c 6#

7#

E

8#t

9f#

lO#

Guidance Menu 1

Guidance Menu 2

Guidance Menu 3

Attendant Menu 1

Attendant Menu 2

Attendant Menu 3

Guidance Menu 3. Function Sacen 9

Function Screen 10

I Id ~ :-

Functton Screen 1

To review the screen prompts associ-

ated with the options of this program,

see the appendix following this section.

ll# Function Screen 1 23# Function Screen 13

24# Function Screen 14

To set an extension port to display 5

extension names. enter

1. fD= extt%MiOXl

DOti Xlumber)#,

341. on

To set extension port 22 for example, to

display

10

extension names, enter:

FF3],22#, 341, 1w

113

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF3

Issue3July1993 DBSRograrmPaingI.n&ructions

CPGA/ 3.0, WC-B /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Direct inward dialed numbers that have

been dialed by a caller need to be assigned

to extension ports, so that the number

dialed will ring on all extensions they are

supposed to appear on. A DID number

can be set to ring on one extension port

only.

To set DID number 0000 to ring on a DBS

extension port number, enter:

1. (Dm C?XtC!DSiOll DOrt llUIDk~~#,

35#.oooo#.

To set DID number 4444 to ring on

extension port 50. for example, enter:

Once extension features have been put

into one of 8 possible classes of service in

address [FFl], 2#, 5#, aparticularclass of

service has to be assigned to an extension.

To assign all extension features to a DBS

extension for exxnple, enter:

1. tDBS

extension port numberl#,

35#.0#

To assign class of service 4 to extension

port 54, for example. enter:

ml* 54#,35#,4#

~

:_ . . . : *: :. *FF

See programming at the (FFl]. 2#, 5#

address for the list of features that can be

applied to a class of service.

This feature has been moved to address

[FFl], 8#, 3# in UC-B software versions

3.00 and newer. This changes provides

greater flexibility in the assignment of DID

numbers.

114

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DB!3F'rogrammh.g~~ctio~

WC-A/ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section4OOFF3

iseue 3July1993

The ringback tone a caller hears when

arriving at an extension that is busy

because the same multi line key is in use

bythecalledparty,canbesetintbis

address.

To give the calling party a ringback and

busy tone, enter:

1. (DBS extension Port number)#,

36#.0#

To give the calling party a busy signal,

enter:

fFF3], (DBS extension port xwmber)#,

36#,1#

To give the calling party a ringback tone,

enter:

[FF3), (DBS extension port number)#,

36#,2#

Assigns a port class to each station port

that will access the Tl. Port classes are

used to assign pad levels to connections

made via the Tl. (Pad levels control

volume.)

By default, DEB phones are assigned a

circuit type, based on whether they are

lCEI.s or SLTs.

The

circuit

type is used with digital pad

settings to determine the loss/gain set-

tings for connections to the Tl. (See

“Digital Pad Setting.”

The Tl port Class parameter is provided

in case a specific phone or group of

phones needs a unique pad level.

For example, an SLT is assigned by de-

fault as “circuit type 2.” However, if an

SLT in a remote warehouse has inad-

eQi2.e volume levels, the circuit type for

the SLT could be changed to 7 (Option

1). Once the SLT is changed to drcuft

type 7, the pad levels for circuit type 7

could be changed to provide the correct

volume setting.

Circuit types are also provided for trunk

ports. See Figure 1 for a definition of

drcLlit types.

This programming parameter will allow

youtoassigncircuittypes l-12toasta-

tion port. However, it should only be

changed to circuit type 7 or 8 (Option 1

or 2).

115

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF3

Issue 3 July 1993 DBS programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0. CFGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

f

Figure 1 shows circuit-type numbers. Cir- To determine what type of action will occur

cuit ‘Apes 1.2.7, and 8 are used to assign when an SLT user hook flashes while in

port classes to stations.

Figure 1. Circuit-type Numbers

circuit Types No.

K-TEL 1

SLT _ 2

DATA#

3

Analog CO Trk

4

Tl Master

5

Tl Slave

6

OPTlONl* 7

&llON 2* 8

DTMF## 9

CON-F (SCC)# 10

TONE1 (MFRl)# 11

TONE2 (MFR2)# 12

~nversationwithacallerwithanothercaIler

already on hold, this

feature must be set. The two possible types

of action are alternately tog@ng between

the party on hold and the party being talked

to, or, conferencing the two parties together

with the SLT user.

To toggle between the two parties

connected to an SLT user, enter:

. mBs

extension

DOrt

number)#.

38w. O# -.- .. c

To conferencetwopartieswiththe SLTuser,

enter:

P31, @BS extension port number)#,

38#,

l#

116

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Rogramminx instructions

CF’GA / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

To set a distinctive extension ring pattern

for central office calls that are set to ring at

an extension, this feature must be set.

The ring patterns for proprietary DBS

phones are different than those of SLT or

OPX phones. Either of ten different

patterns can be set for an extension.

Section 400 FFS

issue

3

July 1993

The handset receive volume of the digital

single line telephone can be set to a

normal or louder than normal volume.

The louder than normal setting gives a

+fSdB gain over the normal setting, which

results in a volume level approximately

twice that of the normal setting.

To set the digitial SLT handset receiving

volume to the normal level, enter:

.fDBs extensionDOrt numberl#.

40#. ow

To set the digitial SLT handset receiving

volume to louder than normal, enter:

W], (DBS extension port number)#,

40#,1#

117

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section4OOFF3

Issue3July1993 DBSRo@ammin~Instructions

CPGA/ 3.0, CPGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

2#

3#

4#l

Digital Ring Pattan

2 Seconds ON/

2Seconds OFF 7#

1 Second ON/ 1

Second Off

1 Second ON/ 2

Seconds OFF

lSecondOnl3

Sceonds OFF

.5 Second ON/ .5

Second OFF

.5 Second ON/ .5

Second OFF.

.5 Second ON/ .5

Seconds OFF,

.5 Second ON t3.5

Seconds OFF

.5 Second ON/ 3.5

Seconds OFF

1 Second ON/7

Seconds Off

SLT&X?XRing SLT/ovxRia~.

F%ttan . Pattan . . .

DeDends On SLT

w Transfer Ring 5# 1 Second On/ 5

Settine Sctxnds OFF

l# 3 Seconds ON/ 1

Second OFF 1 Second ON/7

Second Off

I I

2# 2 Seconds ON/ I I

7# .5 Second ONn.5

2Seconds OFF Second OFF,

I I

3#

1 Second ON/2

Second OFF I I

8# .5 Second ON/ 3.5

Seconds OFF I

4## 1 Second ON/ 3

Seconds Off .5 Second ON/ 3.5

Seconds OFF

This feature enables an extension to be

physically moved from one position to

another, and to take all features that have

been applied to the extension in it’s

origInal position, to the new position

without doing manual program changes.

By applying an auto set relocation code to

a phone, and using this code when an

extension is moved, extension moving is

eflkient and quick.

To apply no auto set relocation code to an

extension port, enter:

1. mBs

extension Dolt

number)#,

4lklCONFl

To apply an auto set relocation code of

7777 to extension port 45, for example,

enter:

rFF3]*45%*41#,7777#

~ :.. :: .:... :::, ..:.. _ ,... *

The auto set relocation code is applied to

the original extension being moved. After

the extension is plugged into the new port

position, press ON/OFF. #lo. (original

DBS port number)#, then the (4 digit auto

set relocation code number). After the

process is complete, reset the phone on

the new port by disconnecting the

modular plug, and reconnecting it. The

origlnal port position converts to a “0”

type. The transfer of phones between

digital and analog ports cannot be done.

The transfer of phones between analog

ports, or between digital ports can be done.

118

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Rogrammin~ hstructions Section 400 FF3

CE’GA/ 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue3 July1993

An extension can be set in a permanent

call forward setting. This fatunz is mainly

forusewithperipheralequipment(s~~

voice mail applications)), where it is desired to

haveanexknsionring for a period oftime,

and then always forward to the same

extension port.

To not have an extension permanently

call forwarded for all calls, enter:

l rDBs extension Dort numberl#,

42W. On

To turn permanent call forwarding off,

enter:

FF3], (DBS extension port number)#,

.-.

42#, 1W

To have an extension permanently call

forwardedwhenanextensionuserisbusy,

enter:

(FF3], (DBS extension port number)#,

42#, 26

To have an extension permanently call

forwarded when an extension user does

not answer, enter:

(FF3]. (DBS extension port number)#,

426.36

If permanent call forwarding is applied, an

extension number must be set as the

target of forwarded calls. This ad-

dress sets the call forward target.

If permanent call forwarding is not

enabled, no call forwarding extension

is required. The default initialized

value of this adddress would then be:

jFF31. (DBS extension

DO&

number)#,

43w. ICONFL

To set extension number 333 as the

target extension of calls from source

extension number 105, enter:

(FF3],105#. 438.333%

Permanent call forwarding can be

overridden by call forwarding set at

the extension level.

119

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF3

issue 3 July 1993

DBS Rogmmmin~ Instructions

WC-A / 3.0, WC-B /2.0 /. 3.0 / 4.0

As of CPC-B Version 4, extensions can

have MC0 or ML keys. In previous

versions, the keys were avaiIable on a

system-wide basis. The type of key

available ditTered with the software

release. In this parameter, “(00 1 - 144)”

represents the extension port number.

In “0 or 1,” ” 0” represents the MC0 keys

and ” 1” represents the ML keys. The

following table shows MCL/ML avail-

ability.

1. The initial setting for all extensions

(except the first attendant phone) is

MCO.

2. The initial setting for the first atten-

dant phone (port 1) is ML.

CPC Version 1 TypeofKey 1

1

CPC-A I MC0 only I

I

CPC-B 1.0 I MC0 only I

1 CPC-B 2.0 - 3.1 1 ML only 1

I I

I

CPC-B 4.0 and

above I MC0 or ML I

120

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Pro@mming Instructions

CPC-A

/ 3.0

WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Large display screen APPElVDlX

%‘%tion 400 FF3

Issue 3

July 1993

The fotlowing are the possible screen appearances of the large display

telephone

(‘VB-43225),

when any of the 25 screen selections are chosenfor a

particular telephone condition, Some screens can not be set to display during

certain telephone conditions if the prompts are not reteuant to the conditions

of the phone. ‘No Change”

(/ T%sonaz speed Did”

\

rnJ, CDBS ext port rlum&+, (26-33)#, 2#

09:51 Thu APR 02

RI CH 6 0 4

>

- PSDSO -PSD95

> -PSDOl -PSD96

> - PSD92 -PSD97

> - PSD93 -PSD96

> -PSD94 -PSD99

‘!&tension Index”

0 9 2.5 1 Thu APR 02

R 1.C H 4 0 4

.EXT. DIRECTO‘RY

ABC MN0

DEF PQRS

GH I TUV

JKL WXY2

‘system speed Dial”

PT3J, (Dss set pat ruunkd#.

@6-3333)#, 3#

09:Sl Thu APR.02.

RICH 804

SSD DI R.ECTORY <

ABC MN0 <

DEF PQRS c

GH I TUV <

JKL WXYZ <

“Guidance Menu I ”

r,

0 9

: 5 .1 T h: u: &i?:@+O 2

:..- ‘..

R I CH ,.[a 0 4 y

Absence 1H Q -,.i ye

-

ACCT Code E.n tti--

S.t

a

t I o n ;..L-o c k 0 u:.t

T I me Reminder

FF-Key Sett lnQ

<

121

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Prorpammins Instructions

CPGA / 3.0, CPC-B /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

‘Guidance Menu 3”

ml, DE3 at pt rtumbe#* cxxE#k

Section 400 FF3

Issue 3 July 1993

“Guidance Menu 2”

ml, ms ext. port numbaf#, c26-331#, is

‘Attendant Menu 3”

Em, DBssctport-. l%3--33)#

At&U&&J&

00

:Si,. Thu

A-PR 02

RI CR’ 0 0 I

> PI og’t a-mm In g Y o d-e

> Ou tgolng‘.Amount

1, 1m

‘IAttendant Menu 2”

ml, D~ex?Qofinumber)#, tz?6-33..#* 9?Y

Attendant 0nl.g

Tunction Screen 1 *V

<

-2

<

*

<

f

122

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS F’ro@ammin~ hst~ctions

CPGA / 3.0

CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

‘Function Screen 2”

pl?3], DBS exL pat lllm&ed#, (2&33M, 1%

hAion 400 FF3

Issue

3

July 1993

‘Function Screen 3”

WJ, DES ed pat rurmber)#, Wz)#,

13#

I 0 9 .: F :I .. 1 ‘I! ‘U

A P R -‘,o’-a

I RICH ( 0 .*.-.

‘!Function Screen 6”

f-31, Iz>Bs fzxt port number3#, (26-331#, 16#

09:51 Thu APR 02

RI CH

6

0 4

Set

C6 I I

W8I

tlng

set Y 0,s 9 a g 0

set co -Queu!ng

Busy--0vrrrIdo

R e I e a’s e

‘Function Screen 5”

rnL DB-Qxldnumber)#, (26-33Pt, 15#

‘Function

Screen

7”

ml. DB act pat numberf#, (B33)#, 17#

O-9 : 5 t .;r h-u

RICH -

> A c c 1 ,Yc 0 d 0

> L.C d ‘:.,c @ i’ I

123

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Sectton 400 FF3

Issue 3 July 1993

‘Function Screen 8”

m3L 03s ext p-t number3#, t26-331#. 18#

>

P

Ri r e-as-a.

toti*

c- 0 8’ ‘f .e c 0 n c 0 Park

Function Screen

12”

09 :Sl

Thu APR 0.2

RICH

6 0 4

s a 'V e uu t 4

PSD-DIR RBlars4

SSD-DIR Transfer

r

coit Rdrirrn’dar

^. -.

cc..: -

A C-C,.T,‘.- 6 0. d .; E a. i: r

y

. . ‘,

DBS Rogrammtng Instructions

CPGA / 3.0,

WC-B /2.0 / 3.0 /

4.0

‘Z%mction Screen 2 l)(

P-J iz?ix.BM* 21#

z

>

m

,

>

3h

I

‘Function Screen 13”

09:Sl Thu APR 02

RI cm 6 6 4

Plge- Answer Mute <

tlordaet _ UNA .c

. ,

T 0. n 0

124

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

/

DBS Pro@mmiqj Instructions

Section 400 FF3

WC-A/ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 /CO Issue 3 July 1993

‘!hnction Screen 14” Tunction Screen 15”

LFF31, DES ext p-t nuJnM#,

c=331#, 24#

ml, DBsct port number)#, c26-33)#, 2!3#

\

>

0 9

:51 Thu APiI 02

R I CH

0 0.4

Telkback DND

Release Park

Conference

Transf.er

< >

09

:, 5 1 T h u;

:A:.P p. ,iJ ?

_. .” . :: .,.I

RI CH

8 0.4

HOLDING N 0 1 II‘ .i N- i

TRF’-TO

WAI T: 0 0

125

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF4

Issue 3 July 1993 DBS Rogramming I~tructions

WC-A / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

I

3-4 RING8tHUNTGROUP

PROGRAMMING

P

Central office line “day mode” ring Central office line “day mode” ring

assignments for all extensions are set assignments for all hunt group pilot

with this option. numbers are set with this option.

To set extension 120 not to ring on

central office line 19 when the DBS is in

the “day mode”, for example, enter:

JFF41.

l#. l#. 19W. OW

To set extension 120 to ring on central

office line 50 when the DBS is in the

“day mode”, for example, enter:

_ P'F41, lW, lW, 50#, 1X

DefhIt initialized mIues for DBS extension

port 1 is:

EF41.

l#. l#. (1-64I#. l#. ION/

OFFI. and for extension rxxt 2 is: IFF41. l#,

2#.

fl-W#. l#. ION/OFFl.

If an outbound central office call is

made from an extension that is not set

to ring on for any inbound cent.ra.I ofice

line calls. the automatic answer option

wiII not function. To answer inbound

central office Iine caIls, press the &&.ing

green Iine key. To pick up a central office

linecallthatisrin&ingatanothertelephone,

use the Dimcted caIl pickup or Group caII

pickup options. Port number 145 is used

to assign ringing to the extemaI page /

UNA interface. Ail unassigned ringing

trunks wilI be directed to the attendant.

To set pilot number 600 (which has

been assigned as. the pilot number for

hunt group 3, in this example) not to

ring on central office line 14 when the

DBS is in the uday mode”, for example,

enter:

jFF41.

1W. 153W. 14Q. O#

To set pilot number 500 (which has

been assigned as the pilot number for

hunt group 1, in this example) to ring on

central office line 10 when the DBS is in

the @day mode”, for example, enter:

pF4],

I#, 151#, lO#, l#

126

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS F’ro@amming hStruC~onS Section 400 FFQ

CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B / 2.0 issue 2 June 1993

Central office line “night mode” ring

assignments for all extensions are set

with this option.

To set extension 120 not to ring on

central ot&e line 19 when the DBS is in

the “night mode”. for example. enter:

JFF41.2#. 218. lQ#.O#

To set extension 120 to ring on central

offke line

50

when the DBS is in “night

mode”, for example, enter:

Central office line “night mode” ring

assignments for all hunt group pilot

numbers are set with this option. The

address numbers 15 1 - 158 refer to hunt

group numbers l-8.

To set pilot number 300 (which has

been assigned as the pilot number for

hunt group 2, in this example) to ring on

central ofiice line 13 when the DBS is in

the “night mode”, for example, enter:

@'F4].2#, 152#, 13#, l#

~F4].2#,21#,50#, 1n

Defiult initialized values for DBS extension

port 1 is: lFF41. 2#.

l#. (1-64M l#. ION.+!

OFFI. and for &ension uort 2 is: 1FF41.2#,

2#.

11-641#. l#. ION/OFFl.

To set pilot number 350 (which has

been assigned as the pilot number for..

hunt group 4, in this example] not to

ring on central of&e line 17 when the

DBS is in the %ight mode”, for example,

enter:

JFF41.2#. 154w. 17%.0#

Ifanoulboundcentmlofficecallismade~m

an&ensionthatisnotsettoringonforany

inbound central office line calls, the

automatic answer option wiIl not function.

To answer inbound central office line calls,

pressthefkhinggreenlineky. Topickup

a central office line call that is ringing at

another telephone, use the Directed call

pickup or Group call pickup options.

Port number 145 is used to assign ringing

to the external page / UNA interface.

Toresetcentiof3ceni&Wingass&nments

for nilot numbers to the default fnitialized

value. mess lFF41. 2#. 151-KM. kentral

offie sort numberl#. CM. ION/OFFl.

127

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF4

Issue 3 July 1993

A maximum of 8 extensions can be put

in each of 8 hunt groups. Each hunt

group can be designated as a “terminal

type”, or “circular type”.

Terminal Hunt Group Operation

The call must be transferred or a

central office line set to ring at the

first extension in the grout in order

for the terminal hunt feature to work.

If the first extension of the hunt group is

busy, an incoming call will automatically

access the next extension of the group.

If all the extensions in the group are

busy, an internal caller will hear a

busy tone, a non transferred central

office line caller will hear ring tone. If

additional feature options are chosen, the

search will continue with an additional

hunt group,(s).

To use the first extension position (analog)

as a pilot position, place a 2 watt 450 ohm

resistor across the tip and ring. This will

busytheport,andallowittobeusedasa

“pilot numb& for the remaining &f!nsions

inthegroup. Directcallstomembersofthe

hunt group will not hunt to other members

of the group ifthe called extension is busy.

DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Circular Hunt Group Operation

Circular Hunting is performed when any

extension in the group is ringing and left

unanswered. The ringing can originate

from tranferred, or extensions assigned to

ring for outside lines. No pilot number is

provided for this type of hunting.

The hunting will follow the next member

in the hunt group until the end ofthe hunt

group is reached. When the end of the

hunt group is reached the call will then be

directed back to the first member until

one full circle has been completed. At this

point of time the call will overflow to the

next hunt group assigned.

If all the extensions in the group are

busy, an internal. caller will hear a

busy tone, a non transferred central

office line caller will hear ring tone. If

additional feature options are chosen, the

search will continue with an additional

hunt group(s).

To set hunt group 5. for

example, to

terminal type, enter:

JFF41. 3w. 5n. l#.O#

To set hunt group 4, for example to

circular type, enter:

/-

Iee41, 3#, 4W, l#, l#

128

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

WC-A / 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 Section 400 FF4

Issue 2 June 1993

If all extensions are busy, an incoming

call will wait for an available extension.

If an extension within either type of

hunt group: is set with an absence

message, with a call forward feature, or

to DND, the hunt feature will skip that

extension, and procede to the next

extension within the group. If the fast

extension within either type of hunt

group is set with an absence message,

with a call forward feature, or to DND,

the hunt feature will not work.

6 ”

If a SLT hunt group member takes a

central office line call, puts it on hold,

and replaces the handset, additional

central office line calls will not hunt to

idle extensions.

Previously searched hunt groups

cannot be searched again. If all

members of all searched groups are

busy, the call will be parked for the frst

group searched only.

Central of&e lines that are set to ring at

extensions set to call forward to a hunt

group will not call forward to extension

types 10 and 15.

An extension that is a member of a hunt

group cannot be a member of another

hunt group, nor a member of a call

coverage group. The off hook signaling

[FF3]- 16 address should be removed

from members in a hunt group.

A maximum of 8 extension numbers

can be assigned to work as one of a

maximum of 8 pilot numbers. One

pilot number can be,used as the lead

number for each of the 8 hunt groups.

To assign extension number 255, for

example, as a pilot number for the frost

hunt group, enter:

WF4], 3W;l#, lW.2558

To assign no extension number (and ..

therefore no pilot number), for example,.’ ., .. :.

for the first hunt group, enter:

pF4], 3W, lW, lW, conf,# ,. ..I

To assign extension number 110, for

example, as a pilot number for the

second hunt group, enter:

cIpIp4). 3#, 2W, l#, 1lOW

To assign extension:.number 300. for

example, as a pilot number for the third

hunt group. enter:

IFF4],3#,3#, l#, 3006

To assign extension number 699, for

example, as a pilot number for the

fourth hunt group, enter:

WF4], 3#,4#, lW.6996

To assign extension number 600. for

example, as a pilot number for the fifth

hunt group, enter:

129

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF4

Issue 3 July 1993

FF4],3#,5#, 1#,600#

To assign extension number 199, for

example, as a pilot number for the sixth

hunt group, enter:

[FF4],3#,6#, l#, 199#

To assign extension nuqber 400, for

example, as a pilot number for the

seventh hunt group, enter:

lFF41.35 7C, 1#,400#

To assign extension number 255,. for

example, as a pilot number for the

eighth hunt group, enter:

[FF4], 3#, 8#;1#, 255W

To reset the uilot extension number

assignment for anv hunt Q~OUD. Dress

jFF41 3#. (hunt groun number l-81#,

l#. ICONFl. fON/OFFl.

DBS Ro@amrnin~ Inst~ctiom~

CI’GA / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

If all the extensions in a particular

hunt group are busy, the calI can be

automatically transferred to another

hunt group. A call to hunt group 3

could be made to overflow to hunt

group 5, if all the extensions in group

3 are busy. If all extensions in the

overflow group are also busy, the call

will rem-t back to group 3, and con&me

to search extensions until one becomes

available.

To set hunt group 3 to overflow to hunt

group 5, for example. enter:

[FF41, 3w, 3#, 21, 51

To set hunt group 4 not to overflow to

any other hunt group, for example,

enter:

rFF41, 3#, 48, 26, [CONF]

To reset hunt grout overflow for a

particuku hunt PROUD to the default

initialized value. Dress lFF41.3#. (hunt

gr-ou~numberl#. 2#. ICONFI. lON/OFFl.

130

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Inst.ructions

WC-A / 3.0

WC-B / 2.0

Section 400 FF4

Issue 2

June 1993

Use this option to insert an extension in a

specific position of one of the eight hunt

groups. A maximum of 8 extensions can

be put into a hunt group.

To place extension number 500 in the

first hunt group’s first position, enter:

pF4],3#. lW, 31.5001

(FF41. 3t. (l-SW. (3)t. (IOO-699H

1 st member for hunt groups ( l-8)

?OCorXXX.#

(FF41, 3U. (l-8lrt. (4)#, (loo-699M

2nd member for hunt groups (I-81 xx0rxxx.n

(FF41, 3#, (l-81#. (5)#, (loo-6991#

3rd member for hunt groups (l-8) xx0rxxx.t

(FF41. 3#. (1-8l#. (6)#. (IOO-6991#

4th member for hunt groups (l-81 xxorxxx.%

IFF4). 3t. (I-8)t. (7’J#. (loo-699)#

5th member for hunt groups (l-81 xxorxxx,#

(FF41. 3#. (l-8)#. (8)#, (lOO-699)t

6th member for hunt groups (1-B) xx0rxxx.U

(FF41. 3#. (l-8)+!, (9)#. (IOO-699)#

7th member for hunt groups (l-8) xxorxxx.#

(FF41. 3#, (l-8,!+. (lOl#. (lOO-699M

8th member for hunt groups (l-81 I xx0rxxx.U

To reset an extension to it’s default initial-

ized hunt $30~~ value.

press:

IFF41. 3#

(DBS hunt grow numberl#. (DBS hunt

grout nositionI#. fCONFl#. fON/OFFl.

An extension that is a member of a hunt

group cannot be a member of another

hunt group, nor a member of a call

coverage group. The off hook signaling

[FF3]- 16

address should be removed

from members in a hunt group.

The type of extension search that is

used once the call is connected to a

hunt group can be set to terminal,

distributed, or longest idle.

.-. .-

TenninuZ Hunt Group~Operation

The call must be transferred or a central

office line must be set to ring at the nilot

number of the hunt groun in order for

the terminal hunt feature to work.

The hunt begins with the pilot number,

and sequentially moves through the

eight extensions. If all the extensions in

the group are busy. the hunt for a free

extension W-III terminate.

If the pilot number of another hunt

group, or same hunt group. is specified,

the search will continue with an

additional hunt group(s). If not, the

caller will receive a busy tone.

Distributed Hunt Group Operatim

The call must be transferred or a central

ofke line must be set to ring at the Dilot

number of the hunt

croup

in order for

the distributed hunt feature to work.

The hunt begins at the extension after

the last one to pick up the previous

caller, and continues in a circular

manner for successive calls.

If the pilot number of another hunt group

is specified, the search will continue with

an additional hunt group(s). If not, the

caller will receive a busy tone.

131

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 FF4

hue 3 July 1993

Longest Idle Hunt Group Operation

The call can be transferred or a central

of&e line must be set to ring at the pilot

number of the hunt

a-OUD

in order for

the longest idle hunt group feature to

work.

The hunt begins at the extension in the

group that has been idle for the longest

period ofTtime, and progresses through

the other extensions in the same manner.

lfthe pilot number of another hunt group

is spedfled, the search will continue with

an additional hunt group(s). If not, the

caller will receive a busy tone.

. .

To set hunt group .l, to the termin&

search method, for example, enter:

JFF41. 34. I#. 2W. O#

To set hunt group 2, to,,the distributed

search method, enter:

WF4], 3#, 21, 2#,

l#

To set hunt group 3, to the longest idle

search method, enter:

DBS Rogrammixag In#ructi~ns

WC-A / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Once all extensions in a hunt group

have been searched, the caller can be

transferred to the pilot number of a

different hunt group, an individual

extension, the attendant, or an SLT

device. This option sets the extension

numberthatthecallwillbetransferredto,

in the event of an overflow Tom the hunt

group.

To set extension number 600 as the

~owMensionafteracallhasoverflowed

hunt group 3, for example, enter:

[FF4),3#,3#,3#,600# P

To set the overflow extension from anv

hunt

BOUD

to the default initialized

value. Dress (FF41.3#. (DBS hunt Proun

numberHI. 3#. O#. ION/OFFi.

rFF4].3#, 3#,2#.2#

132

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming In!kructiox.w

WC-A / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 section 4c90 FF4

Issue 2 June 1993

To set the maximum amount of time

before the caller overflows to an extension

or additional huntgroup, this option must

be set.

111 11 seconds 271 27 Seconds

121 12 seamcls 281 28 semnds

13u 13 seconds 291 29 seconds

141) 14 seamds 301 30 tseamds

15# 15 seconds 31 # 31 SeoJnds

16# 16 Sea&s 32 I 32 !Seamds

To set the transfer timer for hunt group

1 to 10 seconds, for example, enter:

[FF4], 3W,lW, 4#,10#

To assign an exkMon to an exact position

within a hunt group, this option must be

used.

To place extension 3OO.in hunt group 1,

in the tist position, for example, enter:

pF4], 3w, 1#,5#y,300#

To reset an extension to the default

initialized DBS hunt groun setting. Dress

jFF41.3#. lDBS hunt

LOUD

numberl#,

JPositionwithin hunt grounj#. ICONFl#,

JON’OFF’* .:. ._ :.. _

IFF41. 3#. (1-81s. (51#. (100-6991#

1st member for hunt grows (l-8) I

XX0rDCX.U

I

(FF41, 3#. (I-8lU. (8H. (IOO-699M

4th member for hunt

groups

(l-8) I xx0rxxx.l

I

(FF41. 31. (l-8)#, (9)#, (100-6991X

5th member for hunt gmuns (l-81 I xx0rxxx.W I

I

(FF41..3#. (I-811. [lOl#, (100-6991#

6th member for hunt gmuns (l-81 I xx0rxxx.t

I

IFF4J. 3W. (l-8)ff. (1 IIN. (loo-6991#

7th member for hunt gmuos I1 -81 I xxorxxx.# I

I

(FF41. 3U. (l-8)#, (121X. (lOO-6991#

8th member for hunt grows (l-81 I xx0rxxx.n

Versions older than 2.11 do not have

program settings 0 or 1.

133

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF4

Issue

3

July 1993

DBS Ro@ammiq Inst~ctions

-C-A/ 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

An extension can be assigned to any

position within any one of the 16 call

coverage groups in the system. Each

group has a maximum of 8 extensions,

comprising 6 member extensions and 2

secretarial covering extensions.

To set extension

100 as the

first secretary

caIl coverage member of call coverage

group 1, for example, enter:

[FF4], 48, I#, l#, lOO#

;&&; ,t

:,.

iFF41. 41. ‘1-1611. ‘1)X.

coverage group # Fiea-etaly I1 xxorxxx.#

I~41. 4#. (1-16)X.: (211. .’

cavenge @-up# secretary x2 ‘.A & k , #

xxorxn.#

IFF41. 41. (l-16)1. ‘6)#.

-eraBe ID-UP # Member #4 xx0raa.t

tFF41. 4X. (I-16)#. (7)#.

Q=rage group # Member #5 I XXW?ZX.# I

I

IFF41. 4#. ‘l-16)#. ‘8M

covcra&?e SOUP t Member #6 I xxorxxx .# I

To reset call cover=

~OUDS

to the

default initialized settings. Dress IFF4L

4#.

lcall coveraee groun)#. (oosition

within COVeraf!e aOUD)#. iCONF1.

An extension can not be a member of a

hunt group, as well as a member of any

other call coverage group. The second

covering extension becomes active only

when the first covering extension is set

for Do-Not-Disturb.

Central o!3ce Iine “day mode” delayed ring

assignments for all extensions are set

with this option. When inbound centml

o&e line cab are not answered in the

time set in the Call-Forward/

No-Answer/Delayed-RingUmer,thedelayed

ring assignments are utilized.

To set port 115 for no delayed ring in the

day mode on line 6, for example, enter:

W41. 5#.

1151y. 6#.0#

To set extension 110 to delayed ring in

the day mode on line 22, for example,

enter:

pF4], 5#,

110#,22%, l#

Inclusion of the first-attendant position

in the delayed-ring tables. wiIl disable

the attendant-overflow feature.

If the delayed ring function is

enabled and no extensions are assigned,

or capable of ringing (DND, unpluged.

etc...), the ringing line will

automatically ring the attendant.

134

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Pro@amming hdruCti0~ 3eCtion4OOFF4

WC-A / 3.0 WC-B / 2.0 Issue 2 June 1993

Central office line “day mode” delayed ring

assignments for pilot numbers of hunt

groups are set with this option. When

inbound central office line calls are not

answered in the time set in the

Call-Forward/No-Answer/Delayed-Ring

timer, the delayed ring assignments are

unlized.

To set the pilot number for hunt group 1

for no delayed ringin the day mode on line

22,

for example. enter:

(

JFF41. 5#.

151#. 22#.0#

To set the pilot number for hunt group

2 for delayed ring in the day mode on

line 15, for example, enter:

Central office line “night mode” delayed

ring assignments for all extensions are

set with this option., When inbound

central office line callsare not answered

in the time set in the, Call-Forward/

No-Answer/Delayed-Ring timer, the

delayed ring assignments are utilized.

To set extension 120 for no delayed ring

in the night mode on line 3, for example,

enter:

JFF41. 6#. 120#. 3W.

O#

To set extension 400 to delayed ring in

the night mode on line 20, for example,

enter:

[FF4], 66, 120#, 3#,

l#

WF4]. 5#, 152#, 15W. l#

Inclusion of the first-attendant position

in the delayed-ring tables, will disable

the attendant-overflow feature.

If the delayed ring function is

enabled and no extensions are assigned,

or capable of ringing (DND, unpluged.

etc...). the ringing line will

automatically ring the attendant.

,135

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section4OOFF4

Issue3July1993 DBSRo@ammfngInstructions

WC-A / 3.0. WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Central of&e line “night mode” delayed

ring assignments for pilot numbers of

hunt groups are set with this option.

When inbound central office line calls are

not answered dn the time set in the Call-

Forward/No-Answer/Delayedelayed-Wngtimer,

the delayed ring assignments are utilized.

To set the pilot number for hunt group 4

for delayed ring in the night mode on line

28, for example, enter:

JFF4l. 6W. 154#.26i/.O#

To set the pilot number for hunt group

1 for no delayed ring in the night mode

on line 10, for example, enter:

Extensions th at have a DSS/BLF key

assignment for other DBS extensions

can be set to ring on those keys for

any type of call that is directed to the

other extensions. This feature allows

a second extension user to answer a

ringing call to an absent extension

position(s) by accessing the DSS/BLF

key on their phone that represents

the other extension position(s). The

first extension enumerated in the

address is the target extension; and

the second is the source extension.

To set extension port 15 not to ring for

calli directed to ‘extension port 44, enter:

JFF41. 7w. 44w. 15W.06

[FF4], 6#, 151#, 106, l#

To set extension port 1 to ring for calls

directed to extension port 60. enter:

tFF41, 76,6O#,l# 1n

136

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS ROM Inntnwtions

WC-A / 3.0 WC-B / 2.0

Extensions that ham a DSS/BLF key

assignment for other DBS extensions can

besettodelayedringonthosekeysforany

type of caU-*t is directed to the other

&ensions.‘cs feature allows a second

extension user to answer a ringing call on

a delayed basis to an absent extension

position(s) by accessingthe DSS/BLFkey

on their phone that represents the other

extension position(s).?he Brst extension

enumerated in the address is the target

extension. and the second is the source

extension.

To set extension port 13 not to delay ring

for calls directed to extension port 44,

enter:

JFF41. wt. 44u. 13#. ow

To set extension port 5 to delay ring calls

directed to extension port 40, enter:

W4], su, 4ow, 5# l#

section 400 FF4

Isane 2 June 1993

137

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFS

Isrue July 1993

Each flexible feature key on the

telephones and EM24 consoles can be

programmed with a code so that pressing

it wiU perform the function associated

with the code assigned to the key.

To set extension port 120. FF key

number 5, to be an Alarm key, for

example, enter:

PF5], 12OW. 5#, pF12],

4#

To set extension port 55, FF key

number 10, to be a call forward/all calls

key, for example, enter:

EF5], 55#,10#,720#

To reset the FF extension kevs to an

unassigned value. [which must be done

before a feature can be aDDlied to a

defaulted CO line kevl. Dress lFF51. (l-

1441#. (l-24I#. ICONFI. IONIOFFI.

To reset FF Extension kevs to the

default initialized value. Dress fFF5L

jl-1441#. 11-241#. (DBSCOlinenumber

that is the same as the kev number on

the nhoneI#.

When using CPC-B software later than

ver. 2.00. the default values for all kevs

on the attendant nositions default to

Pooled Trunk 89 kevs.

DBS Ro@ammin~ I~tructio~~

CPCA / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

f

71#

[FFl2]. 7#

[FF12], 4#

IFFll], l#

IFF121, 53#

720#

721#

722#

723#

724#

79#

70#

Ol-64#

73#

[PROGI , lo-69#

IPROGI, lOO-699#

(FF121, 51#

1FF121, 8#

lFF121, 50#

89#

77#

[FFl lj,[FF12]#

IFF121, 52#

IFF121, 00-07#

75#

81-86,89#

[FFll]. 2#

74#

[AUTOI. 00-89#

IAUTOI, 90-99#

IFFlll, 3#

78#

Absence Msg

Accountant Code

Alarm

Answer Key

BGM

C-F/AU CaIls

C-F/Busy .NA

C-F/Busy

C-F/CO Line

C-F/NAWGB~~.~~

Qm

DkCtCdlpfckup

Group call pllckup

CO Lines

DND

2 dQgi~~ensions

3 dglt F57di&ions

Headset

Intercom Key

Internal Dial Tone

Stop LCR

Meet Me Answer .

Mute ”

Night Mode

Page

Park Hold

MC0 Access

Release

-onLockcnlt

SSD Key

PSD Key

Talk Back

UNA Pickup

(-

IPROGI, [FRGGI, xzawcx

-Y Key

[AuToI, [REDIAL] Auto Redial to Ext.

81-86,

89 MuIUpleIzop (United

to3pereKtfnsi~ 12

per attendan m-2 i

138

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Promming Inst~ctio~u

CPC-A / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

‘lhedef&knumbenngschemeonextension

FFke@AayedoutstarUngfmmbottoml&

andendingattopright.AUFFkeys default

to LCR/MCO keys.

Only the first 24 FF keys will light for

CO lines that are assigned to them, the

remaining keys on anyextensionhaving

thatmanyFFkeyswillnotlightifCOhne

assignments have been given to them.

Sincethe~and#keysonthedialpadare

used for entering data, when the use of

these symbols are required for feature

codes, (FFll] provides the 0 and (FF12)

provides the #. When entering these

symbols by using the FF keys, the

display will not indicate that any data

was entered.

To program several telephones with the

same key layout, see [FF9] progmmming.

section 400 FFS

Issue 3 July 1093

Each flexfble feature key on the DSS

console can be programmed with a code

so that pressing it will perform the

functionassodaWwiththecodeassigned

tothekey.

To set DSS console 1, FF key number

25. to be a BGM key, for example, enter:

lFF51, 145w, 251, [FF12].53#

TosetDSSconsole 2, FFkeynumber44,

to be a call forwarded all call key, for

example, enter:

@'F5],148#,44#,720#

To reset DSS Console 1 & 2 kevs to the

default initialized val e. Dress fFF51,

J145-148w fl-721#. YDBS extension

number~#. DSS Consoles 3 814 have no

default values set,

To reset the DSS Console kevs to an

unassigned value. Dress fFF51,

J145-1481#. fl-144N. ICONM. IONI

OFFI.

139

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFS

luue SJuly1993 DBSRo~rammin~Instructio~

WC-A

/ 3.0,

CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

KEYQDE-

71# Absence Msg

[FFlZ], 7# Accountant Code

[FF121, 4# Alarm

[FFll]. l# Answer Key

[FF12], 53# BGM

720# C-F/Au calls

721# C-F/BusyNA

722# C-F/Busy

723# C-F/CO Line

7248

C-F/NA(c~~~versoo

@=aerer)

79#

Direct Call Pickup

70# Group Call Pickup

Ol-64# CO Lines

73# DND

[PROG], lo-69# 2 d&it E7clxnsions

[PROG], lOO-699# 3 dlgtt I3dm!3ions

[FF12], 51# Headset

[FF12), 8# Intercom Key

[FF121. 50# Internal Dial Tone

89# Stop LCR

77# Meet Me An&er

[FFl l],[FF12]# Mute

[FF12], 52# Night Mode

[FF12]. 00-07# Page

75# Park Hold

81-86,89# MC0

Access

[FFll]. 2# Release

74# ExiznstonLcchut

IAUTOl, 00-89# SSD Key

[AUTO], 90-99# PSD Key

[FFl 11, 3# Talk Back

78# UNA Pickup

IPROGI. I~oGl* ~ Any-

IAUTOI, [=Dml

Auto Redial to Ext.

81-86, 89 Multiplex

(limited to 3 per

extension, 12 per

ElttfBldaIl~ K==Brer

The default numbering scheme on

extension FF keys is layed out starting

from bottom left and ending at top right.

All FF keys default to LCR/MCO keys.

Only the first 24 FFkeyswilllight for CO

lines that are assigned to them, the

remaining keys on any extension

having that many FF keys will not light

ifC0 line assignments have been given

to them.

Sincethe~and#keysonthedialpadare

used for entering data, when the use of

these symbols- are required for feature

codes, (FFll] provides the * and [FFl2]

provides the #. YWhen entering these

symbolsbyusingtheFFkeys,thedisplay

will not indicate that any data was

entered.

To program several telephones with the

same key layout. see (FF9J programming.

140

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS F’ro@amxdng Instructiona

WC-A / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Section 400 FFS

batte SJ* 1993

Eachflextblefeature keyontheAttendant

console can be pmgmnmed with a code

so that pressing itwill perform the function

assodatedwitbtbecodeassi$ledtothekey.

Tosetatt@antcmsole 1,FFkqynumber

25, to be a BGM key, far example, enter

(P'Irg], 145#,25#, pFl2], 53W

When usin#

softwa.re Ihe DSS Console kevs default

as indicated in the am endix following

i this section

:

To

reset the Attendant Console keys to

m unassigned value. mess IFF5L

1149-152)#. (l-144)#. lCONF1. ION/

OFF1 .

71#

[FF12], 7#

[FF12], 4#

[FFll]. l#

[FF12], 53#

720#

721W

722#

723#

724#

79#

70#

Ol-64#

73#

[PROG], lo-69#

[PROG]. lOO-699#

[FF12], 51#

(FF121. 8#

[FF12], 50#

89#

77#

[FFl l],[FF12]#

[FF12]. 52#

IFF121. 00-07#

75#

8 1-86,89#

(FFlll. 2#

74#

[AUTO], 00-89#

[AUTO], 90-99#

[FFll]. 3#

78#

Absence Msg

Accountant Code

Alarm

Answer Key

BGM

C-F/AU CalIs

C-F/BusyJW

C-F/Busy

C-F/CO Line

C-F/NA

(CPGB w 2.00 or a-)

DirectCanPlckup

GroupCaIlPichp

CO Lines

DND

2 d.ig¶t l9cknsiorls

~ 3 digtt Rctensions

Headset

Intercom Key

Internal Dial Tone

Stop LCR

Meet Me Answer

Mute

Night Mode

Page

Park Hold

MC0 Access

Release

ExtensionLockout

SSD Key

PSD Key

Talk Back

UNA Pickup

m-4. mm* Jmmxx *Key

[AUTO] t IREDIAL] Auto Redial to Ext.

81-86. 89 Multiple Loop

(limited to 3 per

extension, 12 per

attendant)(cpc-B VQ

2.00 or -1

141

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 ma

I~sue3

July1993 DBSRo#ammin~Instructions

CF’GA

/ 3.0.

WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

The default numbering scheme on

attendant console FF keys is layed out

starting from bottom left and ending at

top right. All FF keys default to LCR/

MC0 keys.

Only the Arst 24 FF keys will light for CO

lines that are assigned to them, the

remaining keys on any attendant con-

sole having that many FF keys will not

light if CO line assignments have been

given to them.

Since the * and # keys on the dial pad are

used for entering data, when the use of

these symbols are required for feature

codes, [FFl l] provides the * and [FI712]

provides the #. When entering these

symbols by using the FF keys, the display

will not indicate that any data was

entered.

To program several telephones with the

same key layout, see [FF9] progmmming.

142

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Pro@-ammh~ Instruction

CPGA/ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 section 400 Flw

Isaue3Juiy1993

143

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 FM DBS Programming Instructions

Issue 3 July 1993 WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

,

3-6NAMEANDlUESSlGE

PRrnRAMS~Gs

c

Names of up to 10 characters can be

assigned to each extension number. This

name appears on the second line of a

telephone with a display, and on the top

line of a display extension that is calling.

,.

To assign a name to extension port 40,

with the characters RICH M.. for example,

enter:

Names of up to 16 characters can be

assignedtoSystemSpeedDialnumbersOO-

89. The namesaredisplayedalphabeticauy

on large screen ICD telephones to provide

comlnnation of the name of the person

being cakd when using a SSD code.

Toassignthename”Panasonic”tosystem

speed dial number 05. for example, enter:

ml, iw, 40#, C0NPW. (see am-~

following this sectim)# ,. (ITS), 2#, 05#, (see appendix following

this s+ion)#

To assign a name to extension port 1, with To reset the names of s&em sneed dial

the characters Operator. for example, numbers to the default initialized values,

enter: press IFF21..2#. 00-691#. ICONFl. ION/

[FF6], l#, IS. [CONFIn, (see appendix

OF-n.

folbwing this sectim)# ~~~

.:W$

To reset &ension names to the default

iniuauzed val

e.

DIZSS

rmw.

l#. fl-144

jCONFl#. fONU/OFFI.

If the “Attendant Feature Package”

sotiisbeingused.theDSSConsole

mustbejn&3llysetastypellin[Fl?3],2#to

enaIde thelqsfo--es.

See Ihe appendix following this section for

key designations on the DSS Console

which is used to store characters for

extension names. IfaDSS is not available

seesectfon700,intheopgatingInstructions

Manual under UAttendant Telephone

Features” for alternate instructions

on how to store characters.

If the “Attendant Feature Package”

sofhvare is being used, the DSS Console

mustbein.iUallysetastype llin(FF3]2#,

to enable the keys for programming

capabilities. See the appendix following

this section for key designations on the DSS

Consolewhichisusedto store characters

for system speed dial numbers. If a

DSS is not available, see section 700,

in the Operating Instructions Manual,

under “AttendantTelephone Features”

for alternate instructions on how to

store characters.

144

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Pro@8mxd.n~ Instn~ctions

section 400 FF6

WC-A / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issge 3 July 1903

Names of up to 16 characters can be

assigned to PersonalSpeed Dialnumbers

90-99. The names are displayed alpha-

betically on large screen LCD telephones

to provide con3rmation of the name of the

person being called when using a PSD

code. .

To assign the name “Bill” to personal

speed dial number 90, on prt 21 for :

example, enter:

Amessageofupto 15chamdemcanbe

aeatedsothatapemoncalkngfmma

displayphonetoanextensionthatissetwith

anabsencemessage,canbetiomxdofthe

status ofthe extensionwer.

Toassignthemessage”Leavingat3:00”to

absence message 5, for example, enter:

W61,

4#, 5% [coNelK (see appendix

following this secfiion)#

m, 3#, 021#, 90#, [CONFl#,

(see

appendix following this section)# To assign the message “Don’t Bother Me”

to absence

message 6, for example, enter:

To reset the names of nersonal sneed dial

numbers

to the default initiaked values,

press

rFF61. 3#.

(ool-144#. @o-99)#,

JCONFl. ION/OFFl.

If the “Attendant Feature Package”

software is being used, the DSS Console

must be initially set as type 11 [FF3] 2#,

to enable the keys for programming

capabilities.

See the appendix following this section

for key designations to be used to store

chara~forpemonalspeeddialnumbers.

IfaDSSisnot availabe, see section 700, in

the Opeding Instructions Manual, under

“AttendantTekphoneFeatures*faaakemate

instruc%nsonhowtostomcham&zs.

W61,4#,

6% ICOW% b= appendix _

following this section)U

To assign the message ‘Call Later’ to

absence message 7, for example. enter:

[eesl, 48, 7#, [CONFj#, (see appendix

following this section)#

To assign the message “Return at 2:OO” to

absence message 8, for example, enter:

lFW, 4#. 8% ICOlW% (see appendix

following this section)#

To assign the message “In Bathroom” to

absence message 9, for example, enter:

ml, 4#, 9#, [CONFlU, (see appendix

following this section)#

See Technotes 10 & 12 (March 1992) for

complete information.

145

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 FF6

IssueBJulylQQB

To reset the absence me-es to the

default initialized values.

press

IF’FU. 4#,

J5-91#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl.

If the “Attendant Feature Package”

software is being used, the DSS Console

mustbeinitiaIIysetastypellm[FF3]2#,

to enable the keys for programming

capabilities.

See the appendix folIowing this section

for key designations to be used to store

characters for absence messages.

A

DSS Console must be used to set

absence messages.

DBSRogrmnmh~Inrtrrrctioxu

CI'GA / 3.0, CFGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Central office Iines can be given names of

up to 6 characters to help ident@ the

source of the caII. When an inbound calI

rings at an &ension, the top lfne of the

ED indicates the Iine name.

To set central o&e line 3 to “support!‘. for

example. enter:

BW, SK 3% KONW, be appendix

folhwing this section)#

, To reset central omce Ihe names to the

defauItinitiaI&dvaI e .

press

IFF61.5#,

fl-641#. ICONFM. ,0uN/&.

If the “Attendant Feature Package”

software is being used; the DSS Console

mustbemMaIIysetastype11in[FFB]2#,

to enable the keys for programming

capabilities.

See the appendix following this section

for key designations to be used to store

characters for central of&e line names.

If a DSS is not available, see section 700,

under “Attendant Telephone Features”

for alternate instructions on how to store

characters.

f-

See Technotes 10 & 12 (March 1992) for

complete information..

146

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Pro@ammin~ h~tructions 2%ction 400 FF6

CPGA

/ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 bme3JdylSQ3

Hunt grouppilot numbers can be given a

name of up to 11 characters to help

identify the source of an inbound centraI

office line call to the hunt group pilot

_-

name.

To set a hunt group pilot name for hunt

group 1 to “support”, for wple, enter:

lees], 6#, l#, [CONFlU, (see appendix

following this section)#

To reset hunt

E~OUD Dilot

names to the

default initialized values. Dress IFI?

6#. ll-8l#.

ICONF]#. ION/OFFI,

If the “Attendant Feature Package?

software is being used, the DSS Console

mustbeinit&IIysetastype11i.nFF3)2#.

to enable the keys for programming

capabilities.

See the appendix following this section

for key designations to be used to store

characters for hunt group pilot names.

If a DSS is not available, see section 700.

under “Attendant Telephone Features”

for alternate instructions on how to store

characters.

When a busy party receives an indica-

tion of an incoming intercom call, the

busy party can respond by sending a

text message back to the caller.

.In this parameter,

“p’ represents a

15character text message.

The text message can be sent after a

call waiting tone, a call waiting tone

followed by a text message, or an

oflhook voice announce.

The following table shows the default

text associated with messages 1 to 5.

These messages can be changed

using an attendant phone or a DSS/

72.

I

2 I Please

Hold I

I

3 I

Will Call Back I

4 I

Transfer I

5 I

Unavailable I

See Technotes 10 & 12 (March 1992) for

complete information.

147

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 FF6

Issue 3 July 1993 DBS Rogramming I~tmctions

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

\ \ \

148

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

se!ction 400 FF7

Iasue3

July1993

DBS Ro@axnmin~ hstructions

CPGA/ 3.0.

WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 /4.0

I

S-7 TOLL RESTRICTION

PROGRAM SETTINGS

CENTRAL OFFICE LINE

TOLL

RESTRICTION

(0fxi?fview)

There are 7 types of toll-restriction that can be used to curtail dialing of certain types

of calls on a central office line. Toll restriction is effective on a line by hne basis per

extension, for the DBS day and night operation modes. The following is a brief

description of each type. -.

Type 0: Full restriction of outbound dialing and inbound calls on a central of&e line

Calls can be answered on a type 0 line when the line is assigned to ring on the restricted

extension..

Tppe 1: Full restriction of outbound dialing on a central off&x line. Inbound ringing

central office lines to all telephones can be answered and/or transferred by a type 1

toll restricted telephone.

me 2: Partial restriction of outbound dialing on a central office line. 3 digit dialing

of 211-911 numbers is restricted according to the program option [FM], l#, (4-l 1).

Outbound dialing of system speed dial numbers is restricted according to the program

option [FFl]. 2#, l#, 4#. Up to fif@ 7 digit numbers that are preset in program option : .,’

[FF7], 6#. are restricted (depending on the setting in [FF7]. l#;. -12#).:Operator. calls

are restricted. International calls are restricted. Toil free dialing is allowed. Inter-digit

timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound ringing central office lines to all telephones can be

answered and/or transferred by a type 2 toll restricted telephone.

me 3: Full restriction (in default condition) of all access to any area or office code.

Options to allow outbound dialing to selected area codes [FF7], 2#, 3#, and selected

of&e codes [FF7], 3#, 3# to ease full restriction. 3 digit dialing of2 1 l-9 11 numbers

is restricted according to the program option [FF7], l#, (4- 11). Outbound dialing of

system speed dial numbers is restricted according to the program option [FFl], 2#,

l#, 4#. Outbound dialing of up to fifty preset 7 digit numbers in program option [FM],

6#, is restricted (depending on the setting in (FM], l#, 13#). Four specially selected

area codes [FF7]. 4#, (l -4)# will restrict the first 6 digits, by tying each of these special

area codes to a special ofhce code table [FF7], 5#, (l-4)#, 000-999# of restrictions.

International calls are restricted according to program option [FF7]. l#, l#. Operator calls

are restricted. Toll fkee dialing is allowed. Inter-digit timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound

ringing central ofEke lines to all telephones can be answered and/or transferred by a type

3 toll restricted telephone.

me 4: No restriction (in default condition) of all office code dialing.

Full

restriction

(in default condition) of all area code dialing. Options to allow outbound dialing to

selected area codes [FIV], 2#, 4#. and selected of&e codes

[FM],

3#, 4# to alter default

149

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 FF7 DBS PrognmminqInat~~tio~~

Isaue3Jdy1993 CPGA3.0, WC-B / 2.0/.3.0 / 4.0

restrictions. 3 digit diaIing of 2 1 l-9 11 numbers is restricted according to the program

option [FF7], l#, (4- 11). Outbound dialing of system speed dial numbers is restricted

according to the program option [FFlJ, 2#, l#, 4#. Outbound dialing of up to fifty

preset 7 digit numbers in program option [FM]. 6#, is restricted (depending on the

setting in [FF7], l#, 14#). Four specialIy selected area codes (FF7], 4#, (l-4)# will

restrict the first 6 digits. by tying each of these special area codes to a special of&e

code table [FF7], 5#. (1-4)#, 000-999# ofrestrictions. International caI.Is are restricted

according to program option [FM], 1#. l#. Operator caIIs are restricted. Inter-digit

timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound ringing centraI office lines to aI.I telephones can be

answered and/or transferred by a type 4 toII restricted telephone.

t’ .

Type 5: No restriction (in default condition) of aII area code diaIing. No restriction (in

defauh condition) of alI office code diahng. Options to restrict outbound dialing to

selected area codes (FF7],2#, 5#, and selected office codes [FF7], 3#, 5# to alter default

restrictions. 3 digit dialing of 2 1 l-9 11 numbers is restricted according to the program

option [FF7], l#, (4- 11). Outbound dialing of system speed dial numbers is restricted

according to the program option [FFl], 2#, l#. 4#. Outbound diaIing of up to fifty

preset 7 digit numbers in program option [FM], 6#, is restricted (depending on the

setting in [FF7], l#, 15#). Four specially selected area codes [FM], 4#, (l-4)# wiII

restrict the tirst 6 digits, by tying each of these special area codes to a special of&e

code table [FF7], 5#, (1-4)#, 000-999# of restrictions. International calls are restricted

according to program option [FM], 1 #, l#. Operator caUs are restricted. Inter-digit

timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound ringing central office Iines to alI telephones can be

answered and/or transferred by a type 5 toll restricted telephone. c

Type 6: No restriction (in default condition) of dialing to any area or of&e code.

Options to restrict outbound diaIing to selected area codes [FM], 2#, 6##; and selected

ofIke codes [FM], 3#, 6#. 3 digit diaI.ing of 2 11-911 numbers is restricted according

to the program option [FM], l#, (4-l 1). Outbound diaI.ing of system speed dial

numbers is restricted according to the program option [FFl], 2#, l#, 4#. Outbound

dialing of up to Wty preset 7 digit numbers in program option [FF7], 6#, is restricted

(depending on the setting in [FM], l#, 16#). Four speciaIIy selected area codes (FIV),

4#, (1-4)# wiII restrict the first 6 digits, by tying each of these special area codes to a

special office code table [FM], 5#. (1-4)#, OOO-999# of restrictions. International caI.Is

are restricted according to program option [FM], l#, l#. Operator calls are restricted.

ToII free dialing is allowed. Inter-digit timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound ringing

cent& office lines to a.II telephones can be answered and/or transferred by a type 6

toII restricted telephone.

Type 7: No restrictions to outbound dialing on ah central office Iines in the defaulted

configuratlon.

For ToII Restriction types 3 through 6 operator calIs are allowed in default if FM-

l#- l# is set to l#. The Of&e code tables are used to restrict aII 0 plus diaIi.ng,

the next two digits wiII also be anahzed.

i

150

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Pro@ammhqf hdructiona

CPGA/ 3.O,CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 3tction4oom7

Inllt-3JutylQQ3

The dialing of international calls can be

allowed or denied on all central office

lines set with a toll restriction classes of

3-6.

To

restrict dialing of international calls

for central office lines set with a toll

restriction classes of 3 through 6, for

example, enter:

To enable dialing of international calls

for central office lines set with a toll

restriction classes of 3 through 6. for

example, enter:

This progmm option is tied to the System

installation of&e code address [FFl], 2#,

l#, 18#.

When a new outbound call is being

placed on a central of&e line (with class

of service 3 through 6). immediately

after a call has been received on that

line, this option enables toll rest&ion,

To restrict the use of the flash key and

additional digits dialed, to make an

outbound call on a line set for a toll

restriction class of 3 through 6, enter:

(FF71,1#,26,0# _

To allow the use of a flash key to make

a new outbound call on a line set for a

toll restriction class. of 3 through 6,

enter:

jFF7l.l#.2#. l#

If international calls are

allowed,

011

should be allowed in types 3 through 6

offlce code tables.

151

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 FF7

lrsue3July1993

DBS Ro@amming Instxuctio~

CFCA3.0,CPGB / 2.0 /S.O / 4.0

The m-urn number of digits that

can be dialed on central offke lines set

with a toll restriction class of 3-6 can be

limited to 15 to 29 digits, or can be

unlimited.

Special three digit numbers (2

1

l-9 11)

can be restricted from being dialed on

central ofke lines set for toll restriction

class types 2-6. ; I

I l# I

15 Digits I 9# I 23 Digits

~s#:D~tglts 1 14# 1 28 Digits I

7#

21Dlgits :‘ 151 ., 29 D&its

86 22.Digits ” JJo L&&

I I

211

Is.1

I”

1 la 911

I

To allow 411 to be dialed on a central

ofilce line having a toll restriction class

of 2 through 6, for example, enter:

JFml. 18.7#.0#

To restrict 911 fkom being dialed on a

central o&e line having a toll restriction

class of 2 through 6, for example, enter:

2 1 l-9 11 are allowed in default.

152

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS FVo@mmh. Jndructions section 400 FF7

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Insue 3 July 1983

( \

Seven digit toll restriction allows or

denies the dialing of a certain 7 digit

number when a toll restriction type 2

through 6 is set. Reference is made to

[FF7], 6#. That address is for special 7

digit numbers. If there are any entries

set in [FFV];-6#, these entries will be

reviewed before the call continues to be

processed.

To disable the 7 digit table for type 2 toll

restriction, enter:

~,1#12#,0#

To enable 7 digit toll restriction for

type 3, enter: ” :’

pF7l.l# 13#.1#

(FFTj. l#, (12-16)# the 12-16 refers to types 2

through 6 toll restriction.

7 digit toll restriction when enabled will

look at the last seven digits dialed, area

codes which are allowed may be denied

access to specific telephone

numbers such as WX 555- 12 12.

Areacode dialing restrictions on central

oflice lines set for toll restriction types

3-6

are set in this program option.

Telephone users that access a central

ofllce line set to one of these classes of

service, will be allowed or denied access

to a specific area code; -according to the

setting in this option.

To allow dialing to area code 404 on a

central office line set with a toll restriction

class of service of 3, for example, enter:

lr(le7l,2#,3#,404#,0#

To allow dialing to area code 406 on a

centralo~celinesetwitha~~restriction

class of service of 4, for example, enter:

To restrict dialing to area code 212 on a

central of&e line set with a toll restriction

class of service of 5. for example, enter:

Iee7],2#,5#,212#,1#

To restrict dialing to area code 506 on a

central of&e line set with a toll restriction

class of service of 6, for example, enter:

[FF71,2#,6#,508#,1#

153

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

&?ction 400 FF7

I.asut3Jtdy1993

To reset area code toll restricllons for

central office lines set as classes 3 and

4 to the default initialized value. Dress

jFF71,2#.

I3 or 4)#. KKIO-999)#. l#. ION/

OFFl.

To reset area code toll restrictions for

central of&e lines set as classes 5 and

6 to the default initialized val e. press

JFF71.2#. (5 or 61#. 1000-9991#k. ION/

OFFI.

This address is tied to the system

installation area code address. (FFl],

2#,

l#, 18#.

DBS~IMXUCtiOM

CPC-A

3.0.

CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Oflke code dialing restrictions on central

oflice lines set for toll restriction types 3-

6aresetinthisprogramoption.‘Ikkphone

LlsasthatacJcEss

acentmlofEcehnesetto

oneoftheseclassesofsewi~willbeabwed

or denied accesstoaspecffko&ecode,

accordingtotheseUinginthisoption.

To allow dialing to o&e code 663 on a

centralofkeline setwithatollrestriction

class of sewice of 3. for example. enter:

Iee7],3%,3#,663#,0# ;

f

To restrict dialing to of&e axle 346 on a

centraloBkeline setwithatollrestriction

class of sewice of 4, for example. enter:

Iee7],3#,4#,346#, l#

To restrict dialing to o&e code 261 on a

1 central of&e line set with a toll restriction

class of sewice of 5, for example, enter:

154

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DB3Pro@ammingInstructio~

CPGA/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

To restrict dialing to of&e code 588 on a

central of&e line set with a toll restriction

class of service of 6, for example, enter:

.-.

m, 3#, 6#,

588%. l#

To reset ofike code toll restrictions for

central of&e lines set as classes 3 to the

default initialized value. press IFF71.

3#. 3M. @OO-999)#. l#. ION/OFFL

To reset of&e code toll restrictions for

central ofhce lines s t as classes 4. 5

and 6 to the defaulteinitialized values

press lFF71. 3#. (4. 5 or 61#. fOOO-

9991#.0#. ION/OFFl.

ThisaddressistiedtolheSystcminstallation

area code address pl], 2#, l#, 18#.

Four area codes can be tied to four special

oflice code tables to allow or restrict a

broad range of o&e codes on central

of&e lines set with tollAriction classes

of service 3 through 6’ Typically, area

codes such as 900 are selected as spe-

cial area codes.

For example, to select area code 900 as

the first “special area code” enter:

m,41y,

1#,900#

To select area code 808 as the second

“special area code”, enter:

plq. 4#, 26,808#

To select area code 408 as the third

“special area code” enter:

pFq, 4#, 3#, 408W

To select area code 600 as the fourth

“special area code” enter:

[FF71,4#, 4#,600#

To reset anv of the four special area

codes to the default initialized value,

p ess IFF7). 4#. tl-4M. lCONF1. ION/

OkF, .

lb8

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

&ction 400 FF7

Iuuc3July1833 DBs~gmnmingInstmctions

CFGA3.0, CPGB / 2.0/.3.0 / 4.0

Four special of&e code tables are tied

to four special area codes to allow or

restrict a broad range of office codes for

each special area code, on central office

lines set with toll restriction classes of

service 3-6.

Typically, office codes such as 976.555

or other *pay for call” line sexvices are

selected as special o&e codes.

To select of&e code 976 as an oflice code

to be restricted with the first “special area

code”, on a central of&x line set for toll

resMction class 3 through 6, for example,

enter:

.5#.

lIy.9768. l#

To select oflIce code 555 as an allowed

office code to work with the second

“special area code”, on a central office

line set for toll restriction class 3 through

6, for example, enter:

[FF71,5#, 2#, 555#, O#

To select of&e code 976 as an office

code to be restricted with the third

“special area code”. on a central office

line set for toll restriction class 3 through

6, for example. enter:

Iee7], SW, 3W, 9761y,

l#

To select of&e code 444 as an of&e code

tobe allowedwiththefourth”specialarea

code”, on a central ofWe line set for toll

restriction class 3 through 6, for example,

enter t-

(FF71,5#, 4#, 4448, on

To reset mecial office code 1 & 2 toll

restrictions for central oflke lines set as

classes 3-6 to, the default initialized

value. Dress lFF71. 5#. I1 or 2M. fOOO-

999M. l#. lON/OFFl.

To reset soecial office cod 3 & 4 toll

restrictions for central officz lines set as

classes 3-6 to the default initialized

value. Dress lFF71. 5#. (3 or 4)#. KM30-

999M. O#. ION/OFFl.

Special office code tables 1 and 2 are

restricted as default values, special

ofike code tables 3 and 4 are allowed as

default vaules.

Default values can be changed globally

in FM 9#, 13- 16#.

156

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Pro@ammh~ h~truction8

CPGA/ 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 section 400 FF7

Issue3JuIy1803

Up to 50 preset 7 digit numbers can be

restricted from being dialed behind all

area codes on central of&e lines set for

toll restriction types 2 through 6. The

identifkation of these numbers are set

in this program option. [FM], l#, (12-

16)#, determines whether the seven digit

number that is dialed is reviewed by

this address.

Toassign5551212asthef%tof50preset

numberstoberestxictedfiombeingdtaled

onacentral office line set for toll restriction

class 2

(assuming [FF7], l#, 12# is set

witi l#), for example. enter:

[FF7),6#,1#,5551212# -

To assign 976- 12 12 as the second of 50

preset nuxnbers to be restricted from

being dialed on a central office line set

for toll restriction class 3 (assuming

[FF7), l#, 13# is setwith l#). forexample,

enter:

m,6#, 2W.97612128

To reset anv of the 50 nreset restricted

7 digit numbers to the default initialized

value. Dress lFF71.6#. (l-50)#. ICONFl,

JON/OFFl.

There are 7 types of toll restriction that

can be used to curtail dialing of certain

types of calls on a central office line.

when the DBS is in the day setting. Toll

restriction is effective on a line by line

basis, per extension. See the overview

at the beginning of this programming

section for a review of each type of toll

restriction.

To set toll restriction on extension port

60

(when the DBS is in the day setting)

for central office line 10 to type 3. for .

example, enter: :; :

To set toll restriction on extension port

22

(when the DBS is in the day setting)

for central office line 5 to type 7, for

example, enter: _

Iep71,7#,22#,5#,7#

To reset central office toll restriction on

am line on anv extension (when the

DBS is in the dav setting). to the default

initialized value. Dress iFF71. 7#. fl-

144)#. (l-64)#. 7#, lON/OFFk

157

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 FF7

Issue3July1993 DB3Frogrammin~~~~ons

CPGA3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

This option provides the ability to take

a single toll restriction class of service

and apply it to all lines that appear on

a specific extension, when the DBS is in

the day setting. There are 7 types of toll

restriction that can be used to curtail

dialing of certain types of calls on a

central office line. Seetheovemiewatthe

nofsection3-7forareviewofeach

type of toll mstriction.

To set all lines that appear on extension

port 14, when the DBS is in the day

setting, to central of&e toll restrictfon

class 4, for example, enter:

IIfIF71,7#, 14#,65#,4#

To reset the toll restriction on anv

extension when the DBS is in the dav

setting. to the default initialized value,

press lFF41.7#. (l-1441#. 65#. 7#. ION/

OFFl.

There are 7 types of toll restricUon that

can be used to mrtail dialing of certain

types of calls on a central office lihe,

when the DBS is in the night setting.

Toll restriction is effective on a line by

line basis, per extension. See the overview

at the beginning of section 3-7 for a review

of each type of toll restriction.

To set toll resUicUon on extension port

50,

central of&e line 11 (when the DBS

is in the night setting) to type 3, for

example, enter:

m7l,8#,50#,11#,3# /-

To set toll restriction on extension port

6,

central of&e line 15 (when the DBS

is in the night setting) to type 7, for

example, enter:

IFF7),8U,6#,15#,7#

To reset central of&e toll restriction on

anvline on anvextensionwhen the DBS

is in the night setting. to the default

initialized value. Dress lFF71. 8#. (l-

144M. IL-64M. 7#. ION/OFFl.

The program option outlined above

has an address specifically for CPC-B

software versions. To perform the same

task with WC-A software, the address is:

[FM], 7#, (l-72)#. 33#, (0-7)#.

158

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBSPro@ammh&jInstructio~

CFCA/

3.0,

CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 /4.0

section 400 FF7

Issue3July1993

This option provides the ability to take

a single toll restriction class of service

and apply it to all lines that appear on

a specific extension, when the DBS is in

the night setting. There are 7 types of toll

restriction that. can be -used to curtail

diali.ngofcertaintypesofcallsonacentral

office line. See the overview at the

beginning of section

3-7

for a review of

each type of toll restriction.

To set aJl lines that appear on extension

port

31,

when the DBS is in the night

setting, to central oflice toll restxiction

c \ class 5. for example, enter:

IFF7],8#,31#,65#,5#

ToresetthetollrestHctiononanve~tension

whentheDBSisintheniQhtsetUng.tothe

default initialized value.

DIFSS f’FF41.8#. (I-

144]#. 65#. 7#. ION/OFFl.

The program option outlined above

has an address specifically for CPC-B

software versions. To perform the

same task with CPC-A software, the

address is: [FF7], 8#. (l-72)++. 33#. (O-

7)#.

To allow or restrict all area codes of each

area code table of each toll restriction

class of service to the same setting, this

program option must be used.

To allow dialing to all area codes in the

table that controls central office line toll

restriction class 3, enter:

[Irp'/l,9#,16,0#

To restrict dialing to all area codes in

the table that controls central office line

toll restriction class 3, enter:

Iee7],9#,1#,1#

To allow dialing to all area codes in the

table that controls central office line toll

restriction class 4, enter:

To restrict dialing to all area codes in

the table that controls central ofhce line

toll restriction class 4, enter:

To allow dialing to all area codes in the

table that controls central office line toll

restriction class 5, enter:

159

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF7

laaue3July1993 DB!3Progfaxmhg~~tio1~

CPGA3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 /.3.0 / 4.0

f

To restrict dialing to all area codes in

the table that controls central office line

toll restriction class 5, enter:

To allow dialing to all area codes in the

table that controls central office line toll

restriction class 6, enter:

To allow or restrict all o&e codes of each

of&e code table of each toll restriction

class of sewice to the same setting, this

program option must be used.

To allow dialing to all of&e codes in the

table that controls central of&e line toll

restriction class 3, enter:

[p’esrl, 9#, 5#, O#

To r&&& dialing to all area codes in

the table that controls central ofike line

toll restriction class 6. enter:

IFe7].9#,4#,

l#

_ . , .

Toresetthe~ohalareacodetollrekicUons

forcentraloEkeIinessetasclasses3and4

to the defkult inWaked value. press iFF’?‘l

.

9#. (1 or 21#. l#. ION/OFFS.

To reset the piobal area code toll restrictions

forcentralofflixhwssetas&sses5and6

to the defkult initiahzed value.

DRSS m .

9#. 13

or 41#. O#. ION/OFFI.

ThisprogmmoptionistiedtotheSystem

inst.&Won area code address, (FFl]. 2#. l#,

18#.

To restrict dialing to all of&e codes in

the table that controls central office line

toll restriction class 3. enter:

Ir(le71,9#,5#,1#

To allow dialing to all of&e codes in the

table that controls central 0Bice line toll

restriction class 4, enter:

To restrict dialing to all of&e codes in

the table that controls central office line

toll restriction class 4, enter:

(pIIr7.91y.66, l#

To allow dialing to all office codes in the

table that controls central o&e line toll

restriction class 5, enter:

f

FIT 9#,(1-4)# the l-4 represents types 3-6.

160

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Pro@.ammhg Insbuctio~

CPGA/ 9.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 section 400 FF7

Issue3July19fl3

To restrict dialing to all office codes in

the table that controls central office line

toll restriction class 5, enter:

[FF71,9#,7#, 1Q

To allow dialing to all office codes in the

table that controls central office line toll

restriction class 6, enter:

Toalloworrestrictallareaandofhcecodes

of each toll restriction class of service to

the same setting, this program option

must be used.

To allow dialing to all area and office

codes in the tables that control central

office line toll restriction class 3, enter:

[FF71,9#,8#,0#

To restrict dialing to all o&e codes in

the table that controls central office line

toll restriction class 6, enter:

To reset the global office code toll

restrictions for central office lines set

as tvne 3 to the default initialized

value. Dress IFF71. 9#. (5 or 6M. I#,

]ON/OFFl.

To

reset the global office code toll

restrictions for central office lines set

as classes 4. 5 and 6 to the default

initialized value. Dress IFF71.9#. 17 or

$I#. O#. fON/OFFl.

This pro@m option is tied to the System

instakUonareacodeaildress, FF1],2#, l#.

18#.

To restrict dialing to all area and office

codes in the tables that control central

of&e line toll restriction class 3, enter: --. ; :‘

rF-e71,9#*9#* l#

To allow dialing to all area and office

codes in the tables that controls central

office line toll restriction class 4. enter:

wF7l,S#, lO#,O#

To restrict dialing to all area and office

codes in the tables that control central

office line toll restriction class 4, enter:

~,9#,10#, 1w

To allow dialing to all area and oEice

codes in the tables that control central

of&e line toll restriction class 5, enter:

161

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 FP7

Issue3July1993 DB3 Ro@am&q I.ustructio~

CPGA 3.0, CF’GB / 2.0 /.B.O / 4.0

To restrict dialing to all area and of&e

codes in the tables that control central

of&e line toll restriction class 5, enter:

To allow dialing to all area and office

codes in the tables that control central

office line toll restriction class 6. enter:

leP7],9#,12#, ow

To restrict dialing to all area and of&e

codes in the tables that control central

office line toll restriction class 6. enter:

Fourspedalof3cecodetablesthataretied

to four special area codes can be globally

set to allow or restrict all of&e codes for

each special area code, on central of&e

lines set with toll restriction classes of

service 3-6.

To restrict all special office codes for the

first “special area code” , enter:

[FF71,9#,13#, l#

To allow all special office codes for the

second “special area code” , enter:

pw7],9#,12#,1#

To

reset the alobal area and of&e code

toll restrictions for central ofIke lines

set as classes 3 to the default initialized

value. Dress IFF71. 9#. 9#. l#. ION/

OFFl. Tide 4 can not be returned to

default values usin@ this Drogram.

To reset the mobal area and office code

toll restrictions for central office lines

set as classes 5 and 6 to the default

initialized value. Dress lFF7l. 9#. (11 or

12)#. O#. ION/OFFi.

‘Ihis program option is tied to the System

installation area code program option,

[FFl], 2#, l#, 18#.

To restrict all special of&e codes for the

third “special area code” , enter:

rFF7L 9#,15#,1#

To allow all special office codes for the

fourth “special area code” , enter:

To reset all of&e codes tied to swxial ama

codes 1 & 2 for central of&e lines set as

classes 3-6 to the default i.nitialized value,

press lFF71.9#. (13or 141#. l#. lON/OFFl.

To reset all of&e codes tied to special area

codes 3 & 4 for central of&e lines set as

classes 3-6 to the default initialized value,

press IFIV1.9#. (15or 16)#. O#. lON/OFFl.

F’F7 9#. (9-12) represents types 3-6.

162

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Pro@=amming lnatructtonr

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

FF7 9#, (13- 16) represents special

office code tables 1-4.

Default values for special office code tables

Special office code table 1 All Denied

Special oflice code table 2 AU Denied

Special office code table 3 All Allowed

Special office code table 4 AllAllowed

section 400 FF7

Imue3July1999

163

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Sect.ion 400 FFS

bsue3

July 1093

DBS Rogmmmin~ Instruction

WC-A

/ 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 /.3.0 / 4.0

LEAST COST ROUTING

t-d

Least cost routing is designed to route calls on central o&e lines that are supplied

by speciffc carriers. By identifying a certain group of these lines along with a specific

cost to place outbound calls on them during certain time periods of the day. a cost

savings will accrue. Additionally, non dialed digits can be added or deleted from the

prefI.x of the dialed string by the DBS.

Call processing flow

To determine how to route a specific number. this DBS program group uses 10 tables,

each containing 1000 numbers. All tables are set up in the same manner. The tables

are defined as Area Code, Office Code, 4 Special Area Code, and 4 Special Office Code

tables. Each block in the table has an “z& block connected to it. This xx area is used

to store the route table number (l- 15) that it’s pre& is to use. The pre& is a defined

3 digit area or o&e code, or 3 digit special office or area code numbers. An example

of an LCR table is shown below.

LCR Table

The Special Area and Special OfRce code tables are designed for 6 digit LCR dialing

analysis. The Office code table is used for all 7 digit dialing. One plus 7 digit dialing

xx 007 xx

TF

xx 017 xx

etc.

<

etc.

008 xx

+

108 xx

#

lxx 001 xx

xx 011 xx

lxx 021 xx

004

014

024

etc.

964

974

984

994

005 xx 006

015 ZM 016

025 xx 026

etc. etc. etc.

965 xx 966

975 xx 976

985 xx 986

995 xx 996

xx

etc.

xx

zuc

xx

etc.

xx

012

022

etc.

020

etc.

0281 xx

~ etc. etc. etc.

=tt

etc. etc. etc.

etc.

I

etc.

etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.

I I etc. etc.

I etc.

etc.

xx

960

962 .xx 19671 xx ‘968) xx 969 xx 19611 xx

xx I9711 xx

xx 19771 xx

,978( xx

xx 1981) xx xx 19871 xx 19881 xx 989

xx 1991) xx xx 1997) xx 19981 xx

searches the Area code table, or the Special office code tables, when the DBS program

address [FFl], 2#, l#, 18#. is configured with a “1”. When this program address is

improperly set, the LCR may search incorrect tables.

164

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming

Instructions

Section400 FFS

WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue 3 July 1993

After a specific number to be dialed has been identified in one of the tables above, the

process proceeds to one of the 15 time priority route tables. If no time priority route

table has been assigned to a specific 3 digit number or segment thereof, the call will

exit

LCR

routing, and be placed on a pooled group “9” central office line. If all central

office lines have been removed from the “9” pooled group the call will stop being

processed, and the caller will receive a busy tone.

The 15 time priority route tables are used to determine which

LCR w groups a.rtz

selected, and the priority on which those trunk groups are used. The “lookback”

capability of the DBS provides for multiple searches of the highest priority line groups

before lower priority groups are searched. The highest priority line group is initially

chosen to route the call. If the line is available, the LCR add and-,.LCR delete tables

associated with the central oflice line group are reviewed for additions or deletions to

the dialed digit string. If no lines of the defined group are available. a warning tone is

sent to the caller, a 2 second wait ensues. and the group is searched again. If a line

is still unavailable, the second line group is accessed. This process continues until all

8 line groups in the priority are searched for an available line. In the event that all

prioritized line groups are busy, caller can dial the digit 2. This procedure will enable

a callback and a reservation of the first line in the group. When the DBS recalls the

extension, the caller accesses a line, and the DBS will automatically redial the previously

dialed number.

Time Priority Route Guide Table (0-Z 5)

With

older versions of software (WC-A, olderthan3.2 1, WC-B, older than 2.11). when LCR

is used behind Centrex, special precautions are needed in the O&e Code table. -To+. ,:,.

eliminate the need to dial a “9” before such numbers as 411. 555,91.1,800. and 0, there

weekend 44# 1 45# 1 46W 1 47# 48#

are Oflice Code Table numbers that MUSTlVOTbe assigned to a time priority mute guide

table. These numbers are 94 1,955,980, and 99 1. If OfEke Codes such as 94 1.955.99 1,

and 980 are found in the locale that the DEE is installed in, it is recommended that LCR

should not be used in combination with Centrex, or behind FBX applications. Further

clari&ation of LCR operation maybe found inTechnote 5 (November 1991). and Appnote

165

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFS

Issue 3 July 1993

When an outbound central o&e line is

accessed to make a call, in a DBS set with

Least Cost Routing, the DBS searches one

of 15 preprogrammed routing tables for

the least expensive central oflIce line,

based on time of day and cost of the hne.

Toll restriction settings for the line are

checked, and the number is then

outpulsed.

To add 203 to route. using time priority

table 1, for example, enter:

FFS], I#, I#, 2031, l#

To add 5 16 to route, using lime priority

table 2, for example. enter:

[ee8], lW, 2W, 5166, l#

To remove 409 from time priority table

three, for example, enter:

p7F8],

lW, 31y.4091, O#

DBS Pro@ammhq Instruction

WC-A / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

To remove 609 from time priority table

four, for example, enter:

Df’F8],

l#, 4%. 609#, 08

To reset the LCRArea Code tables to the

default initialized value. Dress IFF78L

l#. (l-15)#. (OOO-999)#. O#. ION/OFFl.

The time priority route guide table option

found at address: [FFS], 5#. (l-15)#, (l-

4$3)#,

(l-8)#.

must be set.

Once a line has been accessed through

LCR, the [FLASH] operation will not

work.

All area code numbers must be pointed

td a specifh time priority table and

enabled in order for LCR to

automatically route the call.

When executing changes in this address,

a “1” entry signifies addition to the table,

and a “0” signifies the o&e code is not

part of the table.

I

166

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBSRo~ammingIns~ctions

CFC-A / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section4OOFF8

Issue 3July1993

When an outbound central office line is

accessed to make a call, in a DES set with

Least Cost Routing, the DBS searches one

of 15 time priority routing tables for the

least expensive central of&e line, based

on time of day and cost of the line. Toll

restrictionseUingsfortheknearechecked,

and the number is then outpulsed.

To use the fifth time priority route table

for a call made to office code 222, for

example, enter:

fFFS], 2#, 5#, 222#, 1W

! j

To use the sixth time route table for a call

made to of&e code 546, for example.

enter:

cples], 2W, 66, 5461, l#

To remove office code 999 from routing

through the seventh time priority table,

for example, enter:

lFF8]* 2w, 7#, 999n, ow

To remove of&e code 447 from routing

through the eighth time priority table,

for example, enter:

[eesl, 2#, 8#, 447#,

‘o#

To reset the LCR Office Code tables to

the default initialized value. Dress IFF8L

2#. (l-151#.

OXKb999)#. O#. lON/OFFI.

The time priority route guide table option . . .

found at address: [FF8], 5#, (l-15)#,

(l-48)#, (l-8)#. must be set.

Once a line has been accessed through

LCR the [FLASH] operation will not

work.

All office code numbers must be

pointed to a specific time priority .

table and enabled in order for

LCR

to

automatically route the call.

When executing changes in this address.

a ” 1” entry signifies addition to the table,

and a “0” sigr&es the o&e code is not

part of the table.

167

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FF8

Issue 3 Juiy 1993 DBS Programming Instruction

CPGA / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Four special area codes, designated as

1

through 4

in the address above, can be

specially chosen for LCR routing. and tied

to four special LCR of&e code tables to

allow a broad range of numbers to be

dialed by the least costly route.

This operation keys off the first six

digits dialed. where the first three digits

represent an area code, and the second

three digits represent an of&e code.

To

select area code 407 as the first

“special LCR area code”, to be used for

LCR

dialing for example, enter:

[ees], 3#, I#, 407#

To select area code 609 as the second

“special LCR area code” to be used for

LCR dialing for example, enter:

[IrIF8]. 3#, 2#, 609#

To select area code 404 as the third

“special LCR area code” to be used for

LCR dialing for example. enter:

FF8]* 3#, 3#, 4048

To select area code 508 as the fourth

“special LCR area code” to be used for

LCR dialing for example, enter:

PF8], 3W, 4#, 508U

To reset the snecial LCR area code tables

to the default initialized value. Dress

]FFSl. 3#. (l-4)#. (CONFl#. (ON/OFFl.

‘The the priority route guide table option

found at address: [FF8], 5#, (l-15)#, (l-

48)#, (l-8)#. must be set.

Once a line has been accessed through

LCR, the [FLASH] operation will not

work.

Four special office code tables,

designated as 1 through 4 in the

address above. can be tied to four

special LCR area codes to allow up to ’

1000 office codes per special LCR area

code to be dialed by the least cost

routing.

This operation keys off the first six

digits dialed, where the first three digits

represent an area code, and the second

three digits represent an office code.

To set special office code entry 1, time

table 13 for office code 776 to be dialed on

the least expensive route, for example,

enter:

lep8], 4#, l#, 13#, 7768, l#

168

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Ro@ammiq Inst~ctions

cpc-A

/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF8

lsstie 3 July 1993

To set special o&e code entry 2, time

table 5 for office code 392 to be dialed on

the least expensive route, for example,

enter:

~F8],4#,2#y,5#,392#, l#

To set special ofke code entry 3, time

table 15 for of&e code 248 to be dialed on

the least expensive route, for example,

enter:

pF8],4#, 3s. lS#, 248#, l#

i '

To reset the snecial LCR office code

tables to the default initialized value,

press lFF81. 4#. (l-4M. (l-15)#, fOOO-

999)#. O#. ION/OFFI.

When executing changes in this address,

a “1” entry si@es addition to the table,

and a “0” signifies the o&e code is not

part of the table.

Since central of&e line costs can vary

by time of day, when least cost routing

is being used outbound calls will be

automatically placed on difkrent central

office line groups depending on the time of

day. This option provides for this.

For example, to use time route table

1, priority 1, LCR line group 1 for

outbound calls placed by the least

cost routing method, enter:

pF8],5#, l#, l#, l#

For ewmple, to use ‘time route table 2,

priority 9, LCR line group 6 for outbound

calls placed by the least cost routing

method, enter:

W8L 5#,2#,9#, 6#

For example, to use time route table 15,

priority 17, LCRline group 4foroutbound

calls placed by the least cost routing

method, enter:

FF8], 5#, 15#, 17#,4#

169

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFS

Issue 3 July 1993 DBS Ro@-ammin~ Instmctio~

WC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

To reset anv CO line

DOLID

Dosition in

anv time Drioritv route table to the

default initialized value. Dress IFF8L

5#. (l-15)#. (l-48)#. fCONF1. ION/OFFl.

The 15 time priority route tables are each

divided into 6 preset time periods, with 8

’ priority positions in each time period for

LCRhegroupassignme.nts.‘Ihesixpmset

timepcriodsareasfollows:

1. 7:00 am to 7:59 am, positions l-8

2. 8:00

am to 4:59pm positions 9-16

3. 5:00

pm to 7:59 pm, positions 17-24

4.8:OO

pm to 11:59 am, positions 25-32

5.12:OO

art-t to 6:59 am, positions 33-40

6.

WEEKEND, positions 41-48

See feature options [FFl], 2#, l#. 3#,

(System

setting for LCR), and [FF8], 6#,

&CR Trunk group table.)

See Time Priority Route Guide Tables

(1- 15), for priority numbers 1 through

48

on page 133.

/‘.

‘Iheu.seofI.CRrequhspnxietermhed I.CR

line @mp to be pri01MM awordhgto the

cost of line(s). ‘Ihe.xx are 8 gmups, and each

group has 8 positions for central ofIke lines.

Once the central oflice line priorities have

bWle&lblish~these~Rgmups~

inserted in the time priority muk g&de

tables, so that predetermined ER @oups

willbeutilizeddurhgeachpresetthneperiod

for outbound calling.

To set up LCR group 1, position 1 with

central office line 16. for example, enter:

[eF8],6#, I#, I#, 16#

To set up LCR group 2, position 1 with

central o&e line 3, for example, enter:

lFF8], 6#, 2#, lW, 36

To set up LCR group 3, position 2 with

central office line 6, fdr example, enter:

lFF81, 6#, 3#,2#,6#

To set up L.CR group 4, position 5 with

central of&e line 64, for example, enter:

[ee81,

6W.4#, 5#,64#

To set up LCR group 5, position 6 with

central of&e line 12, for example, enter:

F'FSI, 6#,5#, 6W, 12W

170

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Inst~ctions

WC-A

/ 3.0,

CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

Section4OOFF8

Issue 3 July 1993

To set up LCR group 6, position 5 with

central of&e line 10, for example, enter:

[IfIFs]. 6W, 6W. SW, 109

To set up LCR.group 7, position 1 with

central of&e line 33, for example, enter:

[FFS], 6#,7#. 1#,33#

To set up ICR group 8, position 8 with

central of&e line 60, for example, enter:

pF8],6#, 8#,8#,60#

To reset a nosition within an ICR central

office line

Q'~OUD

to the default initialized

setting. mess lFF81. 6#. (l-8)#. (l-W+,

]CONFl. ION/OFFl.

See feature options [FFl], 2#, l#, 3#.

(System setting for LCR), and (FF8], 6#,

(LCR Trunk group table.)

Trunks are selected in the order they

are stored in the LCR trunk groups. To

lower the possibility of call glare

remember to place the trunks in reverse

order.

The first digits in the dialed string that

match the digits stored in the delete

table are automatically deleted before

dialing the telephone number.

If LCR trunk group 1 is accessed, and

the dial string is 1-212-666-1212 and

l-2 12 should be deleted prior to dialing

for example, enter:

[eesl, 7W, I#, 12124

If LCR using trunk group 2 is designed

to eliminate the first digit 1 in all area

codes for example. enter:

[FFs1,7#,2#, 16

If LCR trunk group 3 is used to route

calls to a specific carrier and to prevent

connection to another carrier such as

10288 for example, enter:

[FFS), 7W.3W.102888

If LCR trunk group 4 is used behind

centrex or a PBX and a digit 9 is

automatically added (dial add table)

you can eliminate incorrectly dialing

the digit 9 twice by deleting the 9 each

time it is dialed for example, enter:

[IrIrs], 7w, 4#, 9#

171

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Secti0n400FF8

Issue 3

Juiy 1993

If LCR trunk group 5 is a direct Tl

access line to another facility in a differ-

ent area code such as 7 14, and the digit

string 714 should not be dialed for

example, enter:

[eesl,7#, 5#, 714W

To reset the LCR delete tables to the :,

default initialized value, Dress lFF8L

7#. (l-8)#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl. .:

^

,.

Digit Delete Tables are matched to the

LCR trunk groups. Each time one of

these groups are accessed the dial

delete table is checked.

DBS Rogrammb~ lnst~~tions

WC-A

/ 3.0.

CPGB /

2.0 / 3.0 /4.0

Digits in the dialed stringthat are needed

to be outpulsed after a central of&e line

has been seized (such as access codes),

are automatically added before the dialed

telephone number is outpulsed on the

central of&e line. This option allows for

the addition of digits.

If LCR line group 1 is to be accessed.

and the digit string 10288 is to be added

before the dialed number is outpulsed

for example. enter:

@W8],8#, l#, 10288#

If LCR trunk group 2 is to be accessed,

and you want to add the digit 1 before all

long distance numbers dialed for

example, enter:

lees], SW, 2#, l#

If LCR trunk group 3 is to be accessed,

and the digit 9 is to be added before the

dialed number is outpulsed for example,

enter:

P'FS], 8#, 3#, 9#

If LCR trunk group 4 is to be accessed,

and the digit string 8 is to be added

before the dialed number is outpulsed

for example. enter:

[FF81, SW, 4U, SW , I

172

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

To reset the LCR add tables to the

default initialized value. Dress rFF8L

8#. (l-8)#. lCONF1. ION/OFFl.

.‘.

If digits are being added and deleted

from the same CO line group. the DBS

will delete digits first, then add digits.

5 ,

Section 400 FFS

Issue 3 July 1993

173

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

section 400 FFQ

Issue 3 July 1993

,

3-9 COPY PROGRAM

SETTINGS

DBS Ro@ammiq Instructione

WC-A 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

/

To copy all the attributes of one central

office line to another, this option is

used. Copying must be done on aline by

line basis. The first line number of this

address is the source line being copied,

the second line number is the target

destination.

To copy the attributes of central office

line port 1 to that of central office line

port 5, for example, enter:

To copy the attributes of central office

line port

7

to that of central office line

port 3, for example. enter:

To copy aJl the attributes of one extension

to another, this option is used. Copying

must be done on an extension by

extension basis. The first extension

port number of this address is the

source extension being copied, the

second extension port number is the

target destination.

To copythe attributes oftiension port 10

to that of extension port 5. for example,

enter:

IFF9J,2#,10#,5##

To copy the attributes ofmension port70

to that of extension port 3, for example,

enter:

p9],1#.7#,3## pF9]* 2#,70#,3##

There is no default initialized value for

this ontion.

Using this address to copy central office

line attributes results in the copying of

all attributes for the line except the

private line attribute.

lke second # a&r the second central oflIce

lineentxyisapartoftheproglamsequence,

which confhns the copy action.

There is no default initialized value for

this ODtion.

Using this address to copy extension

attributes results in the copying of all

attributes including toll restriction

for an extension except the extension

number, telephone type, station

lock-out code, and EM 24 port

number (BLF port setting).

The second # after the second extension

entry is a part of the program sequence.

which confIrms the copy action.

f

174

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instruction

WC-A / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0

To copy all the attnbtrtes of one extensions

LED FF keys to another, this option is

used. Copying must be done on an

extension by extension basis. The first

extension port number of this address

is the FF key source extension being

copied, the second extension port number

istheFFkeytargetextensionportnumber.

To copy the LED FF key attributes of

extension port 2 to that of extension

port 5, for example, enter:

[pF9]*3#,2#,5##

To copy the LED FF key attributes of

extension port 6 to that of extension

port 10, for-example, enter:

Dres],3#,6#, lO##

There is no default initialized value for

this ontion.

The options to the FF key copypro@am

arethatoNLytheLEDFFkeypn@xmMg

canbecopied.NonLEDFFkeysettingswill

not be copied. The second # after the

second extension entry is a part of the

program sequence, which conGms the

copy action.

section 400 FF9

Issue 3 July 1992

When copying the FF keys of a phone to

another that is in the default condition,

the originally assigned keys must first be

cleared. This is done in address [FFS],

(l-144)#, (l-24)#.

A quick way to accomplish copying the

same FF key settings (that are diBerent

than the default settings) is to go to the

FF5 addressindicated above, and clear all

keys. Then copy the cleared keys to all

other extensions with address [FW], 3#.-

Return to the (FF5], (l-144)#, (1-24)#

address and create the key configuration

desired. Finally, return to [FF9], 3#, and

copy those features to all extensions.

175

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section 400 FFlO

Issue 3 July 1993

3- 10 SYSTEM AND PERSONAL

SPEED DIAL, SETTINGS I

The storage of up to 90 speed dial

numbers for use by designated DBS

extension users are set in this feature

option.

To set the telephone number (203)

555-1212, in system speed dial bin

number 00, for example. enter:

EFlO], lW, OOW, 2035551212%

To set the telephone number (800)

555-1212, in system speed dial bin

number 64, for example, enter:

WFlO], l#, 64#,8005551212#

To set the telephone number (203)

555-1212, in system speed dial bin

number 00. for example, enter:

EFlO], I#, OO#, 20355512121

To set the telephone number (404)

555- 1212. in system speed dial bin

number 44, for example, enter:

[FFlO], lW, 44#, 4045551212#

To reset a svstem speed dial bin to

the default initialized value. Dress,

JFFlOl. I#. (OO-891#. fCONF1. ION/

OFF1 .

DBS Programming Instructions

CPC-A / 3.0, CPCB / 2.0 /3.0 /4.0

systemspeeddialnumberswiIldisplayon

largediSp~~OrleSiIl*~tiCalOIdff.

Abkrckof~speeddialnumbemcanbe

restricted from general use. To aeate this

partition, seeffzatuteoption FFl], 2#, l#, 4#.

To restrict the display of system speed dial

numbers, see [FFl], 2#, l#, 5#. To&large

displaytelephonestodisplay5orlOsystem

speed dial numbem, see ml], 2#, 19#. To

storeanassociatednameforasystemspeed

dialnumber see lFl%), 2#. (00-89)#. IfaDSS

console is available fw m it is

possible to assign a central office line

group as part of a system speed dial

number. To make use of this capability,

insertaC asthefirstcharacterofthespeed

dialbin,followedby1-6todesignatetheline

group number. A 9 can also be used to

access the pooled line capahilty. The C is

required for an SLT to use SSD. A

P will

insert a pause, complete the entry with

the COMPLETE number as it would be

dialed if manuaJly done. The following

keys perform the indicated functions for

the programming of speed dial numbers:

[COW, on the phone clears entered data

1X-1, on the DSS backspaces

iBS], on the DSS backspaces

[->I, on theDSS forward spaces

P, pauses

EXAMPLE:

C 1 P555 12 12 will access line group 1,

then pause, then dial 555-1212.

176

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Programming Instructiona

WC-A / 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 /3.0 /4.0 Section 400 FFlO

Issue 3 July 1993

The storage ofup to 10 personal speed dial

numbers for use by each DBS extension

user are set in this feature option.

To set the telephone number (203)

555- 12 12 for extension port 20, in

personal speed dial bin number 90,

for example, enter:

FFlO], 2#, 2OW. 90#,2035551212#

To set the telephone number (800)

555-1212, for extension port 140, in

personal speed dial bin number 95,

for example, enter:

F‘FlO], 2#, 140#,95#. 8005551212W

To reset a oersonal sneed dial bin to

the default initialized value. Dress,

JFFlOl. 2%. (l-144lW. I90-991#. ICONFL

JON/OFFl.

Personal speed dial numbers will display

on large display telephones in alphabetiti

order.

CPC-B software version 2.00 requires

the use of a large display telephone on

port 1. in order for the personal speed

dial keys to function. WC-B soflsvare

newer than version 2.05, allows personal

speed dial key operation with the use of

any model telephone. See Technotes 10

& 12(March 1992)forcompletetionnation.

Apersonalspeeddialnumbercanonlybe

usedbylheMensionportitisseton.Toset

large display telephones to display 5 or

10 personal speed dial numbers, see

[FF3], (l-144)#, 17#.

Tostoreanassociatednameforapersonal

speed dial number, see (FFG), 3#, (l-144)#,

(9&99)#.

IfaDSSconsolefsavaiWleforp

it is possible to assign a central o&e line

group as part of a personaI speed dial

number. To make use of this capability,

insert a C as the first character of the __ .

speed dial bin, foIlowed by l-6 to designate

thelinegroupnumber.A9canalsobeused

toaccessthepooledlinecapabil~. TheC is-

required for an SLT to use SSD. A

P will

fns&apause.completetheentrywiththe

COMPLEIEnumberasitwouldbedialedif

manually done. The followfng keys perform

theindicatedfforthep~ .

ofspeeddialnumbersz

EXAMPIES:

ClP5551212will accesshnegroup81,then

pause, then dial 555-1212.

C9P120155512i2, willaccess pooled

line group 9, then pause. then dial 1

(201) 555-1212.

177

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Preface

CPC-B - VERSIONS 1.0 and 2.0

There are now two versions of DBS CPC-B.

CPC-B, Version 2.0 (DBS III) has many new or

improved features. Included in this publication are

new programming addresses as well as addresses

for CPC-B, Version

1 .O

(Enhanced DBS).

See DBS Progr atnming Insi~uction.s, Section 400,

for

other programming addresses:

Page 1

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Issue 1 September 1991

Addendum to the DBS Programming Instructions

Section 400B

CPC-B Versions 1 .O and 2.0

Contents

Preface 1 CF’C-B V2.0 - Data Tables 9

CPC-B Vl .O - Data Tables Vl .O 2 FF 1 Key - System Programming V2.0 13

FF 1 Key - System Programming Vl

.O

3 FF 2 Key - Trunk Programming V2.0 18

FF 2 Key - Trunk Programming Vl

.O

6 FF 3 Key - Extension Programming V2.0 21

FF4 Key - Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups Vl .O 7 FF 4 Key - Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0 23

FF 5 Key - Flexible Feature Key Assignment V1.0 8 FF 5 Key - Flexible Feature Key Assignment V2.0 28

FF 6 Kev - Name Assinnment V2.0 31

Index

.

32

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

CPC-B

WI .o

DATA TABLES

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Initial Settings - Data Tables V1.0

‘i

/ Initial Settings - Data Tables, Version

1.0

,i’ ’

3 1

AddreSS

Feature Default Page

FF I KEY - System Programming 3

FFl-2#- 3

l-2#-l#-22#-(0 or l-15)# Attendant overflow 8 calls 3

l-2#-l#-23#-(0 or l)# Delayed-ring capability Disable 3

l-2#-2#-lO#-(0 or l)# RAl baud rate switch 1200 baud 4

FFl-3X- 5

l-3#-20#-(0 or l-8)# Outbound ground detection timer 4 seconds 5

l-3#-21#-(0 or l-8)# incoming ground detection timer 4 seconds 5

FF 2 KEY - Trunk Programming 6

FF2- 6

2-(Ol-64)#-21#-(0 or l)# Loop-start/ground-start switch Loop-start 6

FF 4 KEY - Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups 7

FF4- 7

4-5#-(OOl-145)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or l)# Daytime delayed-ring tables No ring 7

4-6#-(OOl-145)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or l)# Nighttfme delayed-ring tables No rFng 7

FF 6 Key - Flexible Feature Key Asignment 8

FFS- 8

5-(145-148)#-(Ol-72)#-CONF-Code# DSS/72/BLF consoles 8

Page 2

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 1 KEY

SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

“- :._“: VI ‘0

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 1 Key

System Programming V1.0

COMMON SYSTEM SETTINGS

i

\

ATTENDANT OVERFLOW

FFl-2#-l#-22#-(0 or l-15)#

0#: No stacked calls

l#: 1 call

2#: 2 calls

3#: 3 calls

4#: 4 calls

5#: 5 calls

6#: 6 calls

7#: 7 calls

j3#: 8 calls

9#: 9 calls

lO#: 10 calls

ll#: 11 calls

12#: 12 calls

13#: 13 calls

14#: 14 calls

15#: 15 calls

-

Determines the maxImum number of incoming calls

that can be stacked

to

the frost attendant. The

overflow calls are transferred to other stations set

in the delayed-ring tables. 9

NOTE: Attendant overflow is available only in CPC-B. Version 1 .O.

Version 2.0 does not have this feature.

DELAYED-RING CAPABILITY

FFl-2f-l&239-(0 or l)#

g#: Disable

l#: Enable

If there is no answer at an extension set to ring in

the extension-ring tables, the call can also ring at

an extension set in the extension delayed-ring tables

if the system is set up for it. This setting enables the

system to program delayed-ring tables. See

the

section on Delayed-Ring Tables under FF 4

Keu

Rina Assianment and Hunt Gtourq elsewhere in

this manual.

Page 3

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 1 Key System Programming V1.0

COMMON SYSTEM SETTINGS

RAIBAUDRATESWlTCH

FFl-2#-2X-10%-(0 or l)#

The baud rate that serves the system’s remote

administration capability can be switched to

O#: 300 Baud

(RN-A or

RAI-B) either 300 or 1200 baud when the RAI B card

l#: 1200 Baud IRAI-Bl is installed .

The settings for Data Length and Stop-Bit Length

are the sane for both TTY and FM. However, the

No Parity Check setting is always fixed on the RAI

regardless of the TIY settings.

Page 4

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF

1

Key

System Programming V1.0

DETECTION TIMERS

OUTBOUND GROUND DETECTION TIMER

FFl-3620#-(0 or l-8)#

0#: No detection

l#: 1 second

2#: 2 seconds

3#: 3 seconds

4#: 4 secon&

5#: 5 seconds

6#: 6 seconds

7#: 7 seconds

8#: 8 seconds

The system sends a ground signal to .the ground-start

trunk and wafts for a return ground signal from the

telephone company’s central office.

The returning ground signal activates the detection

timer and the system starts the outgoing process.

If a return ground signal is not detected. the system

regards the trunk as unavailable and sends a busy

tone to the caller.

To activate the Detection Timer. set the loop-start/

ground-start switch at ground start.

Install loop-start/ground-start trunk card VB4353 1.

INCOMING GROUND DETIXTION TIMER

FFl-3#-21#-(0 or l-8)#

O#: No detection

l#: 1 second

2#: 2 seconds

3#: 3 seconds

4#: 4 seconds

5#: 5 seconds

6#: 6 seconds

7#: 7 seconds

8#: 8 seconds

The time between detection of a ground signal on

a ground-start trunk coming from the central office

during the idle state and the start of a call process

can be programmed.

At the moment the ground signal is detected. the

line LED on the key set will turn red indicating that

the trunk is in use, even though the call has not

yet been processed.

To activate the Detection Timer. set the loop-start/

ground-start switch at ground-start.

Install loop-start/ground/start tnmk card VD-43531.

Page 5

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF

2

KEY

TRUNK PROGRAMMING

VI .o

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 2 Key Trunk Programming V1.0

SWITCHES

LOOP-START/GROUND-START SWITCH

FF2-(Ol-64)#-21%-(0 or l)%

Trunk-by-trunk switching for either the loop-start

or ground-start circuit allows a flexible trunk setup

between the two trunks.

O#: Loowstart trunk

l#: Ground-start trunk When the ground-start trunk is enabled, check the

parameters for the Outbound Ground Detection

Timer and the Inbound Ground Detection Timer.

Install loop-start/ground-start trunk card V-B-4353 1.

Page 6

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 4 KEY

RING ASSIGNMENT

il ) AND

HUNT GROUPS

VI .o

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V1.0

DELAYED-RING TABLES

DAYTIME DEWIYED-RXNG TABLE!3

FF4-5#-(OOl-145)#-(01-64)#-(0 or l)#

0#: No rim sim&

l#: Ring signal

Assigned extensions will ring at this table when

there is no answer at the extensions assigned to

the Daytime CO-Line Ring Tables.

Port 145 Is for Universal Night Answer KJNAI

NIGHTTIME DELAYED-RING TABLES

FF4-6#-(OOl-145)#-(01-54)#-(0 or 1)#

0#: No rim2 simal

l#: Ring signal

Assigned extensions will ring at this table when

there is no answer at the extensions assigned to

the Nighttime CO-Line Ring Tables.

Port 145 is for Universal Night Answer (UNAI

Page 7

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 5 KEY

FLEXIBLE FEATURE KEY

PROGRAMMING

VI .o

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 5 Key Flexible Feature Assignment V1.1)

DSS/72/BLF CONSOLES

FF 5 KEY ASSIGNMENT’ FOR DSS/72/BLF CONSOIZS

FF5-(14%148)#-(01-24) or (Ol-72)#-CONF- Code#

CONF: Clears d&

Code#: See

Section 700.

DBS Proammmfnc~ Insfructio~ .

under “FF 5 Key Mode” for codes.

Dedicated trunk lines (01-64) or pooled

trunk lines (81-86.89)

can only be

stored on the first 24 FF keys (0 l-24). A

other codes can be stored in any of the

72

FF keys (01-72).

145: DSS 1 for First Attendant

146: DSS 2 for First Attendant

147: DSS 1 for Second Attendant

148: DSS 2 for Second Attendant

Page 8

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

CPC-B

v2.0

DATA TABLES

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Initial Settings - Data Tables V2.0

\

Initial Settings - Data Tables, Version 2.0

Address Feature

Default Page

FF I KEY - System

Programming 13

FFl-2#-l#- 13

1-2#- l#-24#-CONF-( 101-699/l l-69+0 _-

Second attendant 101 13

l-2#-l#-25#-CONF-(101-699/l l-69#)

Third attendant CONF 13

l-2#- l#-26#-CONF-( 101-699/l l-69#)

Fourth attendant CONF 13

l-2#-l#-27#-CONF-(lOl-699/11-69#)

Attendant transfer extension number CONF 14

l-2#- l#-28#-(0 or l)# Attendant override switch Enable 14

l-2#- l#-29#-(0 or l)# AIM key LED Lights 15

l-2+ l#-30#-(0 or l)# Extension delayed-ring capability Noring 15

FFl-3#- 16

l-3#-22#-(0 or l-12)# Att. intercom hold-recall timer 20 seconcjs 16

l-3#-23#-(0 or l-12)# Ext. intercom hold-recall timer 140 seconds 16

l-3#-24#-(0 or l-12)# Att. intercom transfer-recall timer 20 seconds 17

l-3#-25#-(0 or l-12)# Ext. intercom transfer-recall timer 140 seconds 17

Page 9

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Initial Settings - Data Tables V2.0

Initial Settings - Data Tables, Version 2.0

Address Feature

FF 2 KEY - Trunk

Programming

Default Page

18

FF2-(01-64)- 18

2-(Ol-64)#-21#-(O-2)# Loop-start/ground-start/did loop-start 18

2-(Ol-64)#-22#-(0 or l)# DID - immediate or wink start Wink 19

2-(Ol-64)#-23#-(0-15)# Wink-start timer 200 milliseconds 19

2-(Ol-64)#-24%(0 or l-15)# Dial time out for digits 18 seconds 20

2-(Ol-64)#-2%(O-15)# DID interdigit dial time out 80 milliseconds 20

FF 3 KEY -

Extension Programming 21

FF3-(001-144)X- 21

3-(OOl-144)#-2#-(0 or l-19)# Telephone types 21

3-(OOl-144)#-34#-(0 or l)# Extension directory display Displays 5 extensions 21

3-(OOl-144)#-35#-@OOO-9999)# DID dial outside tel. number 0000 22

3-(OOl-144)#-36#-(0-2)# Ringback tone with busy signal RE3T with busy signal 22

Page 10

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Initial Settings - Data Tables V2.0

,’

( !

Initial Settings - Data Tables, Version 2.0

Address Feature Default Page

FF 4 KEY - Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups 23

FF4-16 23

4-l#-(151-158)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or l)# Hunt-group daytlme CO-line

ring tables No W 23

FF4-2#-

23

4-2#-(151-158)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or W Hunt-group nighttime CO-line No ring 23

ring tables

FF4-3#-

24

4-3#-(l-8)#-l#-(0 or 101-699/l l-69)# Hunt-group pilot ext. number No assignment 24

4-3#-( l-8)#-2#-(0-2)# Hunt-group search niethods Terminal 24

4-3#-(l-8)#-3#-(0 or lOO-699/ lo-69)# Transfer extension number No assignment 25

4-3#-( l-8)#-4#-(2-32)# Transfer timer 2 seconds 25

4-3#-( l-8)#-(5-12)#-(0 or lOO-699/ lo-69)#

Hunt-group extension (l-8) No assignment 25

FF4-5#- 26

4-5#-(151-158)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or l)# Hunt-group daytime delayed Noring

ring tables 26

FF4-6X-

4-6#-(151-158)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or 1)s Hunt-group nighttime delayed No ring

ring tables

FF4-7#-

4-7#-(OOl-144)#-(OOl-144)#-(0 or l)# Extension-ring tables Norfng

FF4-8#-

4-8#-(OOl-144)#-(OOl-144)#-(0 or l)# Extension delayed-ring tables Noring

27

Page 11

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Initial Settings - Data Tables V2.0

Initial Settings - Data Tables, Version 2.0

Address

Feature

FF 6 KEY - Flexible Feature Key Assignment

Default Page

28

FF5-

Extensions

5-(CKIl-144)#-(Ol-24)#-CONF-(PROG lo-69/1OO-699#) or (81-86, 89#)

EL/ML keys CONF

5-(OOl-144)#-(Ol-24)#-CONF-(PROG PROG xmzxx#) or (xxxxxx#)

hy key/Pre-programmed codes CONF

DSS/BLF Console

5-( 145- 148)#-(Ol-24)#-CONF-(PROG lo-69/ lOO-699#) or (8 l-86, 89#)

EL/ML keys CONF

5-( 145- 148)#-(01-72)#-CONF-(PROG PROG xxxxxx#) or (xxxxm#)

Any key/Pre-programmed codes CONF

Attendant Console

5-(149-152)#-(Ol-32)#-CONF-(PROG lo-69/100-699#) or (81-86. 89#)

EL/ML keys CONF

5-(149-152)#-(Ol-32)#-CONF-(PROG PROG ===#I (xxxxxx#)

Any key/Pre-programmed codes CONF

28

29

30

FF 6 KEY - Name Assignment 31

FF6-51 31

6-5%(Ol-64)#-CONF-(XSXXX#) CO-trunk-line name assignment CONF 31

FF6-6t

6-6#-( l-8)#-CONF-(w#) Hunt-group pilot name assign. CONF 31

Page

12

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

i \

FF 1 Key System Programming V2.0

MULTI-LINE KEY FEATURES

Attendants

When all the multi-line keys on the first attendant’s

telephone are busy, a call will transfer in sequence

to the second, third and fourth attendant.

If

all four attendants are busy, the call will transfer

to a preset destination which must be a real exten-

sion number, such as a single-line telephone, an-

swering machine or other single-line device. The

transfer-destination extension cannot be a pilot

number.

101: Second atte ndant

SECOND ATTENDANT EXTENSION NUMBER

10 l-699/ l l-69#: Extension number

FFl-2#-l#-24%CONF-(101-699/11-69X)

COW No third attendant

THIRD ATTENDANT EXTENSION NUMBER

lOl-699/ 1 l-69#: Extension number

FFl-2#-l#-25#-CONF-(lOl-699/11-69#)

CONF: No fourth attendant

FOURTH ATTENTUSNT EXTENSION NUMBEF

lOl-699/ 1 l-69#: Extension number

FFl-2X-l#-26#-CONF-(lOl-699/11-69%)

Page 13

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 1 Key System Programming V2.0

MULTI-LINE KEY FEATURES

Attendants

ATTENDANT TRANSFER EXTENSION NUMBER

FFl-2#-l#-27X-CONF-( 101-699/ 1 l-69#)

CONE No extension number

10 l-699/ 1 l-69#: Transfer extension number

If the attendants are busy, the system

will transfer the call to the attendant

transfer extension number.

NOTE: The transfer extension should be a reaI

extension. It cannot be a piIot extension number.

ATTENDANT’ OVERRIDE SWITCH

FFl-2X-1X-28U

O#: Disable

l#: Enable

0 or l)#

If the attendant tries to override a call

once the system is set for Attendant

Oven-ide Disable, a busy tone will

sound.

f

Page 14

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 1 Key System Programming V2.0

i \

COMMON SYSTEM SETTINGS

ALMKEYLED

FFl-2X-1X-29#-(0 OX 1)X

O#: Does not light

l#: Li@hts

The Alarm (ALM) key on the Attendant

Console will either light or not light

with this setting.

EXTENSION (BUSY LAMP FIELD) DELAYED-RING CAPABILITY

FFl-2#-l#-30#-(0 or l)#

When there is no answer at the

extensions set in the extension

ring tables, calls are distributed

NQ O#:

l#: Yes

to other extensions set in the

extension delayed-ring tables.

See the section on Delayed-

Ring Tables under FF 4 K&y

.

ma Assianment an4

Hunt

GIVUDS

elsewhere

in

this manual.

Page 15

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 1 Kev Svstem Programming V2.0

MULTI-LINE KEY FEATURES

0#: No intercom-HOLD recall

l#: 20 seconds

2#: 40 seconds

Attendant

3#: 60 seconds

4#: 80 seconds

5#: 100 seconds

6#: 120 seconds

7#: 140 seconds

8#: 160 seconds

9#: 180 seconds

lO#: 200 seconds

1 l#: 220 seconds

12#: 240 seconds

INTERCOM HOLD-RECALL TIMER

FFl-3X-22+(0

or

1-12)X

0#: No intercom-HOLD recall

l#: 20 seconds

2#: 40 seconds

Extensions

3#: 60 seconds

4#: 80 seconds

5#: 100 seconds

6#: 120 seconds

7#: 140 seco rids

8#: 160 seconds

9#: 180 seconds

lO#: 200 seconds

1 l#: 220 seconds

12#: 240 seconds

INTERCOM HOLD-RECALL TIMER

FFl-3#-23#-(0 or l-12)#

Intercom Recall Timers

Intercom-Recall

Timers are

a new

feature for the

DBS

system

Intercom HOLD-Recall Timers

If a held intercom call does not respond

after a preset time, a recall signal will

sound. The time for the begining of the

signal is programmable.

The Attendant and the Extensions are

each set separately.

Page 16

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

: ,

FF 1 KEY

SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

v2.0

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 1 Key System Programming V2.0

t’ ‘\

i \

MULTI-LINE KEY FEATURES

Intercom Recall

Timers

Intercom Transfer-Recall Timers

If a transferred intercom call does not

respond after a preset time, a recall

signal will sound. The time for the

begining of the signal is programmable.

The Attendant and the Extensions are

each set separately.

O#: No intercom-transfer recall

Attendant

J#: 20 seconds

2#: 40 seconds

3#: 60 seconds

4#: 80 seconds

5#: 100 seconds

6#: 120 seconds

7#: 140 seconds

8#: 160 seconds

9#: 180 seconds

lO#: 200 seconds

1 l#: 220 seconds

12#: 240 seconds

INTERCOM TRANSFER-RECALL TIMER

FFl-3X-24X-(0 or l-12)#

O#: No intercom-transfer recall

l#: 20 seconds

Extensions

2#: 40 seconds

3#: 60 seconds

4#: 80 seconds

5#: 100 seconds

6#: 120 seconds

7#: 140 secon&

8#: 160 seconds

9#: 180 seconds

lO#: 200 seconds

1 l#: 220 seconds

12#: 240 seconds

INTERCOM

TRANSFER-RECALL TIMER

FFl-3#-25#-(0 or l-l2)#

Page 17

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF

2

KEY

TRUNK PROGRAMMING

v2.0

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 2 Trunk Prograryming V2.0

TRUNK CARDS

LOOP-START/GROUND-START/DIRECT-IN-DIAL TRUNK CARDS

FF2-(Ol-f34)#-21X-(O-2)#

Ok L.ooD-start trunk

l#: Ground-start trunk

2% DID trunk

There are three types of trunks: Loop-start.

Ground-start and Direct-in-Dial (DID).

When installing a DID trunk. check the

parameters for Immediate or Wink start.

Also check the parameters for the Wink-Start

Timer, Dial Time Out for Digits and the DID

Interdigit Dial Time Out.

See also following pages.

Page 18

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 2 Key Trunk Programming V2.0

DIRECT-IN-DIAL (DID)

DID - IMMEDIATE OR WINK START

1

FF2-(Ol-64)#-22%(0 or l)%

Q#: Wink start

l#: Immediate start

Immediate Start -

After comxcting with a distant

switching system. the

DBS

system will wait 65

milliseconds before accepting the digits of a dialed

number.

WinIs

Start

- The DBS system waits for a

momentary signal hink~ before accepting the digits

of a dialed number.

WIN-K-START

TIMER

0#:

140 milliseconds

l#: 160 msec

2#: 180 msec 1

3#: 200 msec:

4#: 220 msec Maximum amount of time the system waits before

5#: 240 msec accepting the digits of a dialed number.

6#: 260 msec

7#: 280 msec

8#: 300 msec

9#: 200 msec

lO#: 200 msec

1 l#: 200 msec

12#: 200 msec

13#: 200 msec

14#: 200 msec

15#: 200 msec

Page 19

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 2 Kev Trunk Programming V2.0

DIRECT-IN-DIAL (DID)

DIAL TIME OUT FOR DIGITS

FF2-(Ol-64)%-24#-(0

or l-15)%

O#: No time out

l#: 15 seconds

2#: 16 seconds

3#: 17

seconds

4% 18 seconds

5#: 19 seconds

6#: 20 seconds

7#: 21 seconds

8#: 22 seconds

9#: 18 seconds

lO#: 18 seconds

ll#: 18 seconds

12#: 18 seconds

13#: 18 seconds

14#: 18 seconds

15#: 18 seconds

Maximum amount of time before a time-out

signal. indicating an incomplete dialed

number. is sent from the telephone

company’s central office.

DID INTERDIGIT DIAL TIME OUT

FF2-(01-64)#-25t-(O-15)W

0#: 30 milliseconds

l#: 40 msec

2#: 50 msec

3#: 60 msec

4#: 70 msec

5#: 80 mseg

6#: 90 msec

7#: 100 msec

8#: 110 msec

9#: 120 msec

O#: 130 msec

l#: 140msec

2#: 150 msec

3#: 160 msec

4#: 160 msec

5#: 160 msec

Sets the amount of time for dialing each

digit before a time-out signal is sent from

the telephone company’s central office

indicating an incomplete dialed number.

Page 20

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 3 KEY

EXTENSION

PROGRAMMING

v2.0

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 3 Kev Extension Programming V2.0

EXTENSION PROGIMMMING

TELEPHONE TYPES

FF3-(001-144)X-2%-(0 or l-19)%

Ok No assignment

l#: Analog telephone

2#: Digital telephone (FF 6 key)

3#: Digital telephone (FF 12 key)

4#: Digital telephone (FF 24 key)

5#: Reserved

6#: Reserved

7#: EM/24 W-43310

8#: OPX (pulse)

9#: OPX (tone)

lO#: Voice mail &EC)

1 l#: DSSl - Extension lOO/ 10

12#: DSS2 - Extension lOO/lO

13#: DSS3 - Extension 10 l/ 11

14#: DSS4 - Extension 101/l 1

15#: Voice mail (OPXI

CPGB, Version 2.0

.

Stores telephones in the system.

16#: First attendant console

17#: Second attendant console

18#: Third attendant console

19#: Fourth attendant console

EXTENSION DIRECTORY DISPLAY

FF3-(OOl-144)#-34#-(0 or l)#

O#: DisDlavs 5 extensions Extension directory display on

l#: Displays 10 extensions a large-screen display telephone.

Page 21

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 3 Key Extension Programming V2.0

DIRECT-IN-DIAL (DID) i -*.

\

DID DIAL

OUTSIDE

TELEPHONE NUMBER

FF3-(OOl-144)#-35#-(0000-9999)#

A signal is sent from the DID CO-trunk

QOOO#: Default line to the DBS system and converted to

0000-9999#: Outside telephone number a DBS extension number. The parameters

represent the last four digits of the DID

outside telephone number.

RINGBACK TONE WITH BUSY SIGNAL

FF3-(OOl-144)#-36#-(0-2)X

Q#: Rirwback tone with busv siQnd

l#: Busy signal

2#: Ringback tone

Sets ringback tone on a busy Multi-Line

key. A caller ringing in on a busy multi-line

key will hear the tone set by this address.

This tone can also be set to a Voice-Mail port.

Page 22

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 4

KEY

RING ASSIGNMENT-

AND

HUNT GROUPS

v2.0

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and

Hunt Groups

V2.0

( )

RING ASSIGNMENT AND HUNT GROUPS

In the DBS system, you can have up to eight hunt groups

with a maximum of eight extensions plus a pilot extension

number in each group.

The pilot extension number is not a real extension, but a

receiver of incoming ring signals. Once the ring signal

reaches the hunt group through the pilot number, the signal

then rings

at

the frost free extension in the group according

to

the hunt-group search method. Seefollowing page.

INCOMING CO-LINE RING SIGNAL

TO A HUNT GROUP

CO-line ring signals are set in Day Ring. Night Ring, Day

Delayed-Ring and Night Delayed-Ring tables. You can set a

ring signal for each hunt-group pilot number (15 1- 158) and

each CO Iine (01-64).

HUNT-GROUP RING TABLES

DAYTIME CO-LINE RING TABLE3

FF4-l%-(151-158)#-(01-64)#-(0 or 1)#

Q#: No ring simd

l#: Ring signal Sets the hunt-group pilot numbers for daytime ring.

NIGHTTIME CO-LINE RING TABLES

FFQ-P%-(El-1581%(01-64)#-(0 or 1)X

Q#: No rim signal

l#: Ring signal Sets the hunt-group pilot numbers for nighttime ring.

Page 23

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 4

Key

Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0

HUNT-GROUP PROGRAMMING

PILOT EXTENSION NUMBER FOR A HUNT GROUP

FF4-3#-(1-8)#-l#-(0 or lOl-699/11-69)#

O#: No Assi~men~

101-699/l l-69#: Extension number Pilot extension number in a hunt group.

HUNT-GROUP SEARCH METHODS

FF4-3X-(l-8)#-2#-(O-2)1

There are three types of hunt groups:

Q#: Terminal

1 #: Distributed

2#: Longest Idle

Terminal

Begins its search with the pilot number

and then moves through the eight

extension numbers, in sequence. before

transferring after a set time to the pilot

number of the next hunt group.

Distributed

Distributes calls through the pilot

number based on which extension in the

group received a call in the last search.

The next extension in sequence receives

the new call.

Longest Idle

Searches through the pilot number for

an extension in the group which has

Page

24

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0

HUNT-GROUP PROGWiMMING

I ._

_ ..: : .

D#: No assirmment

lOO-699/ lo-69#: Extension number

TRANSFER EXTENSION NUMBER

FF4-3#-( l-8)#-3#-(0 or lOO-699/10-69)#

Once a ring signal ends its search in a

hunt group, it can be transferred to a

pilot number in another hunt group,

an extension. the attendant. an

answering machine or another

destination.

TRANSFER TIMER

FF4-3#-( l-8)%-4#-(2-32)#

2#: 2

seconds

3-32#: 3-32

seconds

Sets the maximum amount of time

before a call is transferred to another

hunt group.

HUNT-GROUP EXTENSION (l-8)

FF4-3#-(l-8)+(5-12)%-(0 or lOO-699/10-69)#

0#: No assignment

lOO-699/ lo-69#: JZxtension number Assigns an extension number to one of

the eight places in a hunt group.

J

Page 25

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0

DELAYED-RING TABLES

HUNT-GROUP DAYTIME DELAYED-RING TABLES

FF4-5%-(151-158)#-(01-64)#-(0 or l)#

Q#: No rine sienal Sets the hunt-group pilot numbers (151- 158)

l#: Ring signal in the daytime delayed-ring tables.

Page 26

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0

DELAYED-RING TABLES

HUNT-GROUP NIGHTTIME DELAYED-RING TABLES

FF4-6#-(151-158)#-(01-64)#-(0

or

1)R

Q#: No rinP .sjg& Sets the hunt-group pilot numbers ( 15 1 - 158)

l#: Ring signal in the nighttime delayed-ring tables.

EXTENSION-RING TABLES

FF4-7#-(OOl-144)#-(001-144)X-(0 or l)#

Q#: No ring signal

l#: Ring signal

This sets the ring on an extension-line key.

The first set of port numbers (OOl-

144)

represent your telephone. The second set of

port numbers (OOl- 144) belong to’the target

telephone.

EXTENSION DELAYED-RING TABLES

FFQ-8#-(OOl-144)X-(OOl-144)#-(0 or l)#

Q#: No ring signal

l#: Ring signal

If the set extensions on the extension-ring table

do not answer, a call will also ring on extensions

set in the extension delayed-ring table.

The first set of port numbers (00 1- 144) represent

your telephone. The second set of port numbers

KKll-144) belong to the target telephone.

Page 27

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 5 KEY

FLEXIBLE FEATURE KEY

PROGRAMMING

v2.0

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 5 Key Flexible Feature Assignment V2.0

MORE FLEXIBILITY FOR FF KEYS

FF KEY FEATURE ASSIGNMENT FOR EXTENSIONS

EXTENSION LINE (EL) AND MULTI-LINE (ML) KEYS

FF5-(OOl-144)#-(Ol-24)#-CONF-

(PROG lo-69/100-699#) or (81-86, 89X)

CONF: Clears data Programs Extension-Line (EL) and Multi-Line (ML)

PROG lo-69/ lOO-699#: EL keys keys. Store the Multi-Line key as 81-86.89. There

Sl-86.89#: ML keys can be a maximum of 12 ML keys on the Atten-

damtelephone. On other telephones. there can be up

to 3 ML keys assigned to any of the 24 FF keys (Ol-

24).

See Section

700B.

Addendum

to the DBS ODerating

lr&uction~ under “Line Key Fea,tures”for an ewpla-

nation ofEL and ML keys.

ANY XEY OR PRE-PROGRAMME D CODES

FF5-(OOl-144)#-(01-24)#-CONF-

(PROG PROG xxxxxx#)

or (xxxxxx#)

(PROG PROG

-#) will program the Any Key

feature. You can program

any digits up to a

maximum

of six. Use this feature to store, for

example, code 5 for OHVA. There can be a maxfmum of

24

FF keys (01-24).

CONF: Clears d&

PROG PROG xxxxxx#: Note: The LCD screen will only display up to four digits.

Any key, maximum of six digit (=xxxx#) is for setting pre-programmed codes.

xxxxxx#: Pre-programmed codes

See Section 700. DBS Owemtbw lnsbuctions. under “~

the FF Keys” for a chart of these codes. See also Section

700B. Addendum to the DBS Ormatina Instructions under

“More Flexibility for FF Keys” for instructions

on how to

store CF codes plus an

extension to an FF key.

NOTE: You

cannot

use the programming mode through

the telephone to assign the

FLASH

or CONF

features to an FF key.

See Section 700B. Addendum to the DBS

Operatim lns~ctiorq under “More

Flexibility for FF Keys” for instiffons on

how to assign these features to FF keys.

Page

28

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 5 Ker Flexible Feature Assignment

V2.0

MORE FLEXIBILITY FOR FF KEYS

FF KEY ASSIGNMENT FOR DSS/72/BLF CONSOLES

145: DSS 1 for First Attendant 147: DSS 1 for Second Attendant

146: DSS 2 for First Attendant 148: DSS 2 for Second Attendant

DSS/72/BLF AND POOLED-TRUNK-LINE KEYS

FFS-(145-148)X-(01-24) or (Oi-72)#-CONF-

(PROG lo-69/100-699#) or (81-86, 89#1

CONE Clears data

PROG lo-69/1OO-699#:

DSS/72/BLF keys

81-86, 89#: MC0 keys

Pmgrams DSS/72/BLF and Pooled-Trunk-Line (MCO)

keys. Store the MC0 key as 8 l-86,89 on the first 24

FF keys (0 l-24). All of the 72 FF keys can be used for

DSS/72/BLF keys.

See Section 700B. Addendum to the DBS ODeratinq

Instructions under “Line Key Features” for an eupla-

natim ofEL and ML keys.

ANY KEY OR PREPROG RAMMED CODES

FF5-(145148)#-(01-72)#-CONF-

(PROG PROG XXXXXX#) or (xxxxxx%I

CONF: Clears daQ

PROG PROG xxxxxx#:

(PROG PROG

xxxxxx#) will program the

Any Key

feature. You can program

any digits up to a

maximum ofsix. Use this feature to store, for

example, code 5 for OHVA. There are 72 FF keys (0 1-72).

..

Any key, m-urn of six digits

Note:

The LCD screen will only display up to four digits.

KXXXXX#: Pre-programmed codes (rxrxxr%) is for setting pre-programmed codes.

See Section 700. DBS ODemtina lnsb-uct&~~. under “Storing

the EF Keys”for a chart of these codes. See also Section

7OOB. Addendum to the DBS ODeratina Instructions mder

“‘More Flexibility for FF Keys” for insb-uctions on how to

store CF codes plus an extension to an FF key.

NOTE: You

cannot use the programming mode through

the telephone to assign the

FLASH

or CONF

features to an FF key.

See Section 700B. Addendum to the DBS

ODeratina InstructionS under ‘More

lQxibility for FF Keys” for instructions on

how to assign these features to FF keys.

.

Page 29

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 5 Kev Flexible

Feature Assignment V2.0

MORE FLEXIBILITY FOR FF KEYS

FF

KEY ASSIGNMENT FOR ATTENDANT CONSOLES

Use

with Optional Attendant Feature Package (VB-43330)

(See Attendant

Console User Guide. Section 760 for FF Key Layout.)

DSS/72/BLF

AND POOLED-TRUNK-LINE KEYS

FF5-(149-152)#-(01-08) or (Ol-32)X-CONF-

(PROG 10-69/100-699%) or (81-86. 89#)

CONF: Clears dau

PROG lo-69/100-699#:

DSS/72/BLF keys

81-86,89#: MC0 keys

Pmgrams DSS/72/BLF and Pooled-Trunk-Line (MC01

keys on the Attendant console. Store the MC0 keys

as 8 l-86.89 on the first eight FF keys (0 l-08) only.

ANY KEY OR PRE-PROG XUIMMED CODES

FF5-(149-152)X-(Ol-32)#-CONF-

(PROG PROG xxxxxx#) or (-#)

CONF: Clears data

PROG PROG m#:

(PROG PROG

xnxxx#) will program the Any

Key

feature. You can program any digits up to a

maximum ofsix. Use this feature to store, for

example. code 5 for

OIWA. There are 32 F’F

keys (0 l-32).

Any key, maximum of six digits

Note:

The LCD screen will only display up to four digits.

xxxxxx#: Pre-programmed codes (xrxxxxX) is for setting pre-programed codes.

See !3ecm 700.

DBS OKETU&W Instn&ions. URder “Storing

the FF Keys” for a chart of these codes. See also Section

700B. Addendum to the DBS Oweratina Instructions under

“More Flex-&i@ for FF Keys” for instructions on how to

store CF codes plus an extension to an FF key.

NOTE You cannot use the programming mode through

the telephone to assign the

FLASH

or CONF

features to an FF key.

See Section 700B. Addendum to the DBS

Qperatina lnsbuctions under “More

FZexibUity for FF Keys”for instructions on

how to assign these features b FF keys.

Page 30

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

i I

FF 6 KEY

NAME ASSIGNMENT

v2.0

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 6 Key Name Assignment V2.0

NAME ASSIGNMENT

CO-TRUNK-LINE NAME ASSIGNMENT

FF6-5W-(01-64)#-CONF-(xxxxxx#)

You can set CO-trunk-line name assignment

COW; Clears data in the programming mode during remote

maintenance or you can set it with PCAS.

xxxxxx#I: Name or message assignment Programming through a telephone set requires

- up to six characters a 72-port Direct Selection Station (DSS/72).

Note:

The DSS/72 must be set to Telephone

Types 11 for extension 100 or 13 for extension

101.

See under F’F 3 Keu Extension Proaramminq,

V2.0 elsewhere in this manual.

HUNT-GROUP PILOT NAME ASSIGNMENT

FF6-6X-(l-8)#-CON-F-(naanaaxrmx#)

CONl? Clears data

m#: Name assignment Assigns a name of up to 10 characters to

- up to 10 characters a Hunt-Group Pilot Extension number.

I

Page 31

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

\

Index

A

ALMkeyLED 9.15

Any key 12.28.29.30

Attendrqrt console FF key assignment/Any

key/Pre-programmed codes 12.29.30

Attendant console DSS/72/BLF keys 12.29.

30

Attendant consoles 12.29.30

Attendant intercom hold-recall timer 9. 16

Attendant intercom transfer-recall timer 9.

17

Attendant overflow 2.3

Attendant override switch 9. 14

Attendant transfer extension number 9. 14

Attendants 9. 13, 14

B

BLF 8, 12, 29, 30

Busy signaI 10.22

C

CO-trunk-line name assignment

Common system setttngs. V1.0

Common system settings, V2.0

CONF 28.29.30 (See NOTE)

CPC-B - Version 1.0 2-8

WC-B - Version 2.0 9-31

D

Data tables. Vl.0 2

Data tables. V2.0 9- 12

12.31

3.4

9, 15

Daytime delayed-ring tables.

V1.0

2. 7

Delayed-ring capability 2.3

Delayed-ring tables, V1.0 7

Delayed-ring tables. V2.0 10.26. 27

Detection timers, V1.0 5

Dial time out for digits 10.20

DID dial outside telephone number 10. 22

DID interdigit dial time out 10. 20

DID. immediate or wink start 10, 19

DID trunk cards 10. 18

Direct-in-dial (DID) - extensions 22

Direct-in-dial (DID) - trunks 10. 18, 19. 20

Direct Station Select console, V1.0 2. 8

Direct Station Select console. V2.0 12. 29.

30

Distributed. hunt groups 24

DSS/72/BLF consoles, V1.0 2. 8

DSS/72/BLF consoles, V2.0 12. 29. 30

E

EL (extension Iine) keys 12.28

Extension delayed-ring tables 11. 27

Extension delayed-ring capability 9, 15

Extension directory display 10. 21

Extension FF key assignment/Any key/Pre-

programmed codes 12.28

Extension FF key assignment/EL/ML keys

12.28

&tension intercom hold-recall timer 9, 16

Extension intercom transfer-recall timer 9.

17

Extension line (EL) keys 12.28

Extension programming, V2.0 10. 21.22

Extension ring tables 11, 27

F, G

FF 1 Key - System Programming. V1.0 2, 3.

4. 5

FF 1 Key - System Frograrnm irlg. v2.0 9. 13.

14. 15. 16. 17

FF 2 Key - Trunk Programming. W-0 2.6

FF 2 Key - Trunk Programming. V2.0 10.

18

Page 32

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF 3 Key - Extension Programming, V2.0 10.

21.22

FF 4 Key - Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups,

v1.0 2, 7

FF 4 Key - Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups,

V2.0 10. 23, 24. 25, 26, 27

FF 5 Key - Flexible Feature Key Assignment

V1.0 2. 8

FF 5 Key - Flexible Feature Key Assignment

V2.0 12, 28. 29. 30

FF 6 Key - Name Assignment 12.31

FIASH 28.29.30 (See NOTE)

Fourth attendant extension number 9. 13

H

Hunt-group Daytime CO-line ring tables 11,

23

Hunt-group daytime delayed-ring tables 11,

26

Hunt-group extensions 11.25

Hunt-group nighttime CO-line ring tables 11,

23

Hunt-group nighttime delayed-ring tables 11,

27

Hunt-group-pilot extension number 11, 24

Hunt-group-pilot name assignment 12. 31

Hunt-group programming 11, 24. 25

Hunt-group ring tables 11. 23

Hunt-group search methods 11.24

I. J, K

Incoming CO-line ring signal to a hunt group

23

Incoming ground detection timer, V1.0 2. 5

Initial settings - data tables, V1.0 2

Initial settings - data tables. V2.0 9. 10. 11.

12

Intercom HOLD-recall timers 9. 16

Intercom recall timers 9. 16. 17

Intercom transfer-recall timers 9. 17

L

Longest idle. hunt groups 24

Loop-start/ground-start switch. V1.0 2, 6

Loop-start/ground-start/direct-in-dial. V2.0

10. 18

M

MLkeys 12.28

More flexibility for FF keys 12. 28.29. 30

Multi-line (ML) key features 13. 14. 16. 17

N

Name assignment 12.31

Nighttime delayed-ring tables. V1.0 2. 7

0

(

Outbound ground detection timer. V1.0 2. 5

p* 9

Pilot extension number for a hunt group 11.

24

Preface 1

Pre-programm ed codes 12. 28. 29.30

Pooled-Trunk-Line keys 12. 29. 30

R

RAI baud rate switch, V1.0 2. 4

Ring assignment and hunt groups, V1.0 2, 7

Ring assignment and hunt groups, V2.0 11.

23. 24. 25. 26.27

Ringback tone 22

Ringback tone with busy signal 10.22

Ring tables. V1.0 2. 7

Ring tables. V2.0 11. 23. 24, 25. 26.27

Page 33

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

S

Second attendant extension number 9. 13

Switches 2. 6

System programming. V1.0 2. 3. 4

System programming. V2.0 9. 13. 14. 15,

16. 17

v.

T

Telephone types 10.21

Terminal. hunt groups 24

Third attendant extension number 9. 13

Transfer extension number 11.25

Transfer timer 11.25

Trunk cards 10. 18

Tnmk programming, V1.0 2. 6

Trunk programming, V2.0 10.18

U

UNA7

Universal night answer 7

V

Voice mail 21, 22

Wink-start timer 10. 19

Page 34

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

m

Panasonic

Issue 3 -

July 1993

DBS Programming

Forms and Tables

Section 450

CPC-B Versions 1.0,2.0,3.1, and 4.0

CPC-A Versions 3.0,3.1, and 3.2

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he new DBS Ffogramming Forins‘ and

Tabks, section 450, has fewer pages, yet

contains more information on how to make

programming easier by using the newly-designed

forms to record programmed data. How-to instruc-

tions precede each FF Key chapter.

While some forms overlap in information, every form

charts a specific kind of programming. The instruc-

tions make clear who will use each form.

This manual is for software versions:

CPC-B 1.0, 2.0, 3.1.4.0

and

CPGA3.0, 3.1, 3.2

All of the forms in this manual are intended to be

photocopied. Saue your origin& and use them as

copy masters.

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he FFl Key is for system-wide program-

ming. There are seven submodes (l# to 7#)

for this key.

Time and Date, Recall and Pause timers, and DISA

(Direct Inward System Access) are a few of the nearly

100 features available for programmin g on the FFl

Key.

Features programmed on this key affect the entire

system. In contrast, the other nine FF keys affect only

one extension or trunk, and are programmed on an

extension-by-extension or trunk-by-trunk basis. The

exception to these keys is System Speed Dial. in the

FFlO Key which also affects the entire system.

The programming forms and tables for the FFl Key

apply to each DBS system (single or double cabinet).

The data options for most features are 0 and 1, but

some features have more than these two programming

options. For example, the options for the Paging fea-

ture range from 00 to 07. Other features offer up to 15

options, such as the Automatic Pause Timer and

Unsupervised Conference Talk-Time (trunk-to-trunk

conferencing).

Save Your Original Foims!!!

5 /

Y

8

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

8

t

i

n

Q

8

( I

/

2

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

EFIKey-Sgskem

Account Address

SMDR timer/starting time display 1: Starting from 16 sec.

One-touch dialin

-9#-(0 or l)# 0: DisaWe

Key-bank (automatic) HOLD (DSS BLF) 1: Enable

-lO#-(0 or 11% 0: Exclusive hold

Non-appearance CO line hold 1: System ho/d

-1 l#-(0 or l)# 0: Intercom dial tone

SLT FLASH control 1: Retrieves he/d CO line

-12#-(0 or I)## 0: 2 digits (10 to 69)

Sets number of extension digits 1: 3 digiis (100 to 699)

-14#-(Oar 1)X 0: Tone

Attendant intercom 1: Voice

-15#-(0 or 1)X 0: Tone

Extension intercom 1: Voice

s

Y

6

.t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

P

ST

s

3

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

l?FlKey-System

DBF Account Name Cutover Date sheet of

Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

-16#-(0 or l)#

Solash (alert) tone on a voice call

-17#-(0 or 11% See FF3-99, lO#

Splash (alert) tone on a busy override

-1w(0 or 11%

Area code or 1 + area code

-19#-(0 or I)#

SSD name display - large display

-21X40 or 1)C

Voice mail tone

-22#-(0 or 1 to lS)#

Attendant overflow

-23#-(0 or l)#

Delayed-ring capability

-248~(101 to 69/l 1 to 699)# (WC-B Vs. 20)

Second attendant

-2514101 to 69/l 1 to 699)# (UC-B Vs. 2.0)

Third attendant

-26#-(101 to 69/l 1 to 699)# (CPC-8 Vs. 2.0)

Fourth attendant

-27#-(101 to 69/l 1 to 699)t (WC-B Vs. 20)

Attendant transfer extension

-28140 or 1M (CPC-8 vs. 2.0)

Attendant override switch

-29WO or l)i (CPC-B Vs. 2.0)

Alarm LED mode

-3O#-(0 or 1)R (WC-B Vs. 2.0)

BLF (extension) delaved ring

-31#40 to 6M

Analog port transfer ring interval

1: 10 names

calls (CPC-B Vs. 1.0)

1: 3.0 Set ON / 1 .O Set OFF

2: 2.0 Set ON / 2.0 Set Off

3: 1 .O Set ON / 2.0 Set OFF

4:

1 .O Set ON / 3.0 Set O#

i.. I

1

S

t

8

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

Q

8

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FFIKey-System

Address / Feature Program Options

-32#-(0 to 1)W (CPC-B Vs. 4.0 or higher)

DID/DNIS emulation

0: Disuble

1: Enable

-32X-(0 or l)# (CPC-B Vs. 3.0 or higher)

Multiole DID --

0: Disable

1: Enable

-33%-(0 or 1 )# 0: No limit

Paging duration 1: 60 seconds

-34%-(0 or 1 )# 0: ISecON/3SecOFF -

-I#-(0 or l)#

SMDR lTY parity check

-2#-(0 or I)#

SMDR lTY parity type

-3#-(0 or 1)R

SMDR baud rate

-4#-(0 or 1)X ..

SMDR stop-bit length .

-W-(0 or 1)X

SMDR data length

-6#-(0 or l)# See FF3-14R

SMDR print mode 1

-7#-(0 or l)#

SMDR print mode 2

-8X-(0 or I)#

SMDR print mode 3

-9#-(0 or l)#

Dump data mode (Xon/XoffI

-lO#-(0 or I)#

RAI baud rate switch (

0: No parity check

1: Purify check (CPC-A Vs. 3.0 and above)

0: Odd

1: Even

1: 300 bps

2: 1200 bp - WC-A V 2.0

3: 4800 bps

4: %lXl bps - WC-A V 3.0, CPC-B V 1.0,2-O

1: l.Obits

2: 1.5 bits

3: 2.0 bits

1: 5.0 bits (less than 90 ports)

2: 6.0 bits (less than 90 ports)

3: 7.0 bits

4: 8.0 bits

0: Outgoing calls only

1: lncofning und outgoing

0: Long-distance calls only

1: Ail outgoing calls

O:lWCklfUonly

1: Titles and llY data

0: No control

I: Control

0: 300 bauds (RAI-A, RAI-B)

s

Y

S

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

B

8

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FFlKey-System

me

Account Address

Cutover Date

Account Phone (Main

Address / Feature

-I#-(Up to 3 dlglts)#

PBX access code 1

-2X-(Up to 3 dlgits)#

PBX access code 2

-3X-(Up to 3 digits)#

PBX access code 3

-4X-(Up to 3 dlgltsM

PBX access code 4

-5HUp to 3 dlgtts)P

PBX access code 5

-6#-(Up to 3 dlglts)#

PBX access code 6

-7#-(Up to 3 dlgits)t

PBX access code 7

-8WUp to 3 dlglts)#

PBX access code 8

-9%~(1 to 3)#

See FF2-13#

Automatic pause after dialing 1

-low to 3)X See FF2-13t

Automatic pause after dialing 2

-1 l#-(1 to 3)# See FF2-131

Automatic pause after dialing 3

-12#-(1 to 3)# See FFZ- 13#

Automatic pause after dialing 4

-13w to 3)# See FF2-131

Automatic pause after dialing 5

1: Pause - 1st digit

2:

Pause - 2nd digit

3: Pause - 3rd diait

No entry at default

1: Pause - 1st digit

2:

Pause - 2nd digit

3:

Pause - 3rd diait

No entry at deiautt

1: Pause - 1st digit

2:

Pause - 2nd digit

3: Pause - 3rd digit

No

enfry at default

1: Pause - 1st digit

2:

Pause - 2nd digit

2

Y

8.

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

Q

8

/-

6

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

PFlKey-System

Account Address

Address / Feature

-14#-(1 to 316 See FF2-13#

Automatic pause after dialing 6

-W-(1 to 3)# See FF2-13#

Automatic pause after dialing 7

-l#-(1 to 3)# See FF2-13#

Automatic pause after dialing 8

-17#-(1 to 3)# See FF2-13#

Automatic pause after dialing 9

-18#-(1 to 3M See FF2-13#

Automatic pause after dialing 0

-l#-(0 or l)# See FF4- 1#, 2#

Universal Nigtif‘ Answer (UNA) ring pattern

-2#-(0 or l)#

External Page Interface (EPI) page group OC

-3#-(0 or l)#

External Page Interface (EPI) page group 01

-4#-(0 or l)#

External Page Interface (EPI) page group 0:

-5#-(0 or l)#

External Page Interface (EPI) page group 0:

-6#-(0 or l)#

External Page Interface (EPI) page group 01

-7#-(0 or l)#

Program Options

No entry at defauff

1: Pause - 1st digit

2: Pause - 2nd digit

1: Pause - 1 st digit

2: Pause - 2nd digit

No entry of defuu/f

1: Pause - 1 st digit

2: Pause - 2nd digit

1: Pause - 1 st digit

2: Pause - 2nd digit

1: Pause - 1st digit

2: Pause - 2nd digit

0:3secson/l secot7

1: Continuous

0: No fP/ reluy

1: EPI relay

0: No ffl reluy

1: EPI relay

0: No

EPI rely

1: EPI relay

0: No EPI rew

S

Y

S

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

Q

S

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FFIKey-system

Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

I I

Address / Feature

8x-(0 or I)#

ixternal Page interface (EPI) page group 06

lxternal Page Interface (EPI) page group 07

(l-8)+( l -20)#-(0 or 1)X

:lass of Service settina

(l-100)X-l#-(0001~9999)X

‘erified Forced Account Codes

(1-l OO)#-2#-(0-7)s

‘erified Forced Account Code toll restrictior

(0000 to 2359)#

Uomatic switch to night mode (HHMM)

(0 or 1 to 12)#

rttendant HOLD-recall timer

1: EPI relay (Not in use)

0: No EPI relay

1: EPI relay (Not in use>

0: Restricted

1: Not restricted

l “*: No uccount

cooo1-9999w

codes me

0:TRSTypeO

1: TPSType 1

2:

m.S Type 2

3:

TRS Type 3

4: lRS Type 4

5: TRS Type 5

6:

TRS Type 6

No infry af defautf

OWO to 2359: Automatic

0: No recall

I: 20

seconds

2:

40 seconds

3:

60 seconds

4:

80 seconds

5: 100 seconds

6: 120 seconds

7:

140 seconds

8:

160 seconds

9:

180 seconds

10: 200 seconds

11: 220 seconds

12: 240 seconds

Y

s

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

RF1

Key - System

Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

-(O or 1 to 12)X

Extension HOLD-recall timer

-(O or 1 to 12)#

Attendant transfer-recall timer

0: No recall

1: 20 seconds

2: 40 seconds

3: 60 seconds

4: 80 seconds

5: 100 seconds

6: 120 seconds

7:

14Oseconds

8: 160 seconds

9: 180 seconds

10: 200 seconds

11: 220 seconds

0: No recall

I: 20

seconds

2: 40 seconds

3: 60 seconds

4: 80 seconds

5: 100 seconds

6: 120 seconds

7: 140 seconds

8: 160 seconds

9: 180 seconds

10: 200 seconds

11: 220 seconds

12: 240 seconds

S

Y

8

t

e

In

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

Q

8

9

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

I?FlKey-Systam

Address / Feature

-(O or 1

to

121%

Extension transfer-recall timer

Attendant Hunt Group recall timer

0: No recall

1: 20 seconds

2: 40 seconds

3: 60 seconds

4: 80 seconds

5: 100 seconds

6: 120 seconds

7:

14oseconds

8: 160 seconds

9: 180 seconds

10: 200 seconds

11: 220 seconds

12: 240 seconds

0: No recall

1: 20 seconds

2: 40 seconds

3: 60 seconds

4: 80 seconds

5: 100 seconds

6: 120 seconds

7: 140 seconds

8: 160 seconds

9: 180 seconds

10: 200 seconds

11: 220 seconds

9.

F

Y

8

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

10

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FEY

Key - System

f-‘ Bs Account Name Cutover Date Sheet of

\ ccount Address Account Phone (Main List)

Address /’ Feature

Extension Hunt Group recall timer

Attendant park HOLD recall timer

1: 20 seconds

2: 40 seconds

3: 60 seconds

4: 80 seconds

5: 100 seconds

6: 120 seconds

7: 14Oseconds

8: 160 seconds

9: 180 seconds

10: 200 seconds

11: 220 seconds

0: No recall

1: 20 seconds

2: 40 seconds

3: 60 seconds

4: 80 seconds

5: 100 seconds

6: 120 seconds

7: 140 seconds

8: 160 seconds

9: 180 seconds

10: 200 seconds

11: 220 seconds

S

Y

8

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

Q

s

1:

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FFY

Key - Sgstem

BS Account Name

ccount Address

Cutover Date Sheet of

Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

&tension park-HOLD recall tlmer

(0 or 1 to 12)#

Wendant reversion timer

0: No recall

1: 20 seconds

2: 40 seconds

3: 60 seconds

4: 80 seconds

5: 100 seconds

6: 120 seconds

7: 140 seconds

8: 160 seconds

9: 180 seconds

10: 200 seconds

11: 220 seconds

0: No recall

1: 20 seconds

2: 40 seconds

3: 60 seconds

4: 80 seconds

5: 100 seconds

6: 120 seconds

7: 140 seconds

8: 160 seconds

9: 180 seconds

10: 200 seconds

11: 220 seconds

u

/r.

8

t

e

In

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

Il

Q

8

12

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

l?Fl

Key - System

unt Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

(Oor 1 to 1511 See FF2-16#, FF3-131

Insupervised conference talk-time

*(O or 1

to

1SM

4utomatic pause timer

1: 5 minutes

2: l0m//wfes

3:

15 minutes

4: 20 minutes

5: 25

minutes

6: 30 minutes

7: 35 minutes

8: 40 minutes

9: 45 minutes

10: 50 minutes

11: 55 minutes

12: 60 minutes

13: 65 minutes

14: 70 minutes

0: No pause

1: 0.5 second

2:

1 .O second

3:

1.5 seconds

4: 2.0

seconds

5: 2.5 seconds

6: 3.0

seconds

7: 3.5 seconds

8: 4.0

seconds

9: 4.5

seconds

10: 5.0 seconds

11: 5.0 seconds

12: 5.0 seconds

13: 5.0 seconds

14: 5.0 seconds

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

sr

a

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FFlKey-@stem

Name

Account Address

Cutover Date Sheet of

Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

-(O or 1 to 1OM

CO line FLASH timer

see 18#

-(O or 1 to 6)#

SLT onhook FLASH timer

-(O to 3M

incoming ring timer

0: No FLASH

1: 0.2 second

2: 0.3 second

3: 0.4 second

4: 0.5 second

5: 0.6 second

6: 0.7 second

7: 0.8 second

8: 0.9 second

9: 1.0 secorld

FLASH (0

Disconnect

(D) I

0: 200-500 ms (I? Over 500 IT-IS CD)

1:

2OW50 ms (0 Over 750 ms 0

2: 200-1CXlO ms (0 Over 1 Ooo ms (D)

3: 2O@l200 ms (0 Over 1200 ms (0)

4: ZW-15W

ms 0 Over 15W ms (0

5: Over 200 ms CD>

6: 30-W rns CR Over 500 ms (D)

0: 4 seconds

1:8seconds

S/

Y

s

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

f

14

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FFYKey-System

Account Address

Address /

Feature

-(O 01 1 to 15)#

ncoming ring delay timer

-(O to lS)#

Dial pause timer

O: Synchronizes to incoming ring cycle

1: Expand to 50 ms

2: Expand to 100 ms

3: Expand to 150 ms

4: Expand to 200 ms

5: Expand to 250 ms

6: Expand to 300 ms

7:

Expand to 350 ms

8: Expand to 400 ms

9: Expand to 450 ms

IO: Expand to 500 ms

I 1: Expand to 550 ms

12: Expand to 600 ms

13: Expand to 650 ms

14: Expand to 700 ms

0: 1.2 seconds

1: 1.2 seconds

2: 2.0

seconds

3: 3.0

seconds

4: 4.0

seconds

5: 5.0 seconds

6: 6.0

seconds

7: 7.0

seconds

8: 8.0

seconds

9: 9.0

seconds

10: 10 seconds

11: 11 seconds

12: 12 seconds

13: 13 seconds

14: 14 seconds

P

S

Y

8

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

xl

Q

8

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

lTF1 Key - System

BS Account Name Cutover Date

ccount Address Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

-(O or 1 to lO)#

PBX-FLASH timer

-(O to 15)#

Call Forward-No Answer timer

0: No FLASH

1: 0.2 second

2: 0.3 second

3: 0.4 second

4: 0.5 second

5: 0.6 second

6: 0.7 second

7: 0.8 second

8: 0.9 second

9: 1 .O second

10: 1.1 seconds

0: Call forward after 4 seconds

1: Call forward after 8 seconds

2: Cd forward affer 12 seconds

3: Call forward after 16 seconds

4: Call forward after 20 seconds

5: Call forward after 24 seconds

6: Call forward after 28 seconds 1

7: Call forward after 32 seconds

8: Call forward after 36 seconds

9: Call forward after 40 seconds

10: Call forward after 44 seconds

11: Call forward after 48 seconds

12: Call forward after 52 seconds

13: Call forward after 56 seconds

14: Call forward after 60 seconds

j

t

s

8

t

e

m

w

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

Q

8

16

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

i’- ’

FFlKey-Systxm

dBS Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date Sheet of

Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

-(O or 1 to 8)#

Outbound ground detection timer

-(O or 1 to 818

Incoming ground detection timer

-(O or 1 to 1216

Attendant intercom HOLD-recall timer

(UC-B Vs. 2.0)

1: 1 second

2: 2

seconds

3: 3

seconds

4: 4

seconds

5: 5 seconds

6: 6 seconds

7: 7

seconds

0: No detection

1: 1 second

2: 2

seconds

3: 3

seconds

#:#seconds

5: 5 seconds

6: 6 seconds

7: 7

seconds

0: No intercom HOLD recall

I: 20 seconds

2: 40

seconds

3: 60

seconds

4:

80 seconds

5:

100 seconds

6:

120 seconds

7:

140 seconds

8:

160 seconds

9: 180

seconds

10: 200 seconds

11: 220 seconds

S

Y

8

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

Q

8

1

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

RF1

Key - System

Account Addre

Address / Feature

-(O or 1 to 12)#

Extension intercom HOLD recall timer

WC-B Vs. 2.0)

-(O or 1 to 12)#

Attendant intercom transfer recall timer

WC-8 Vs. 2.0)

Program Options

0: No intercom HOLD recall

1: 20 seconds

2: 40

seconds

3: 60

seconds

4: 80

seconds

5: 100 seconds

6:

120 seconds

7:

14oseconds

8:

160 seconds

9:

180 seconds

10: 200

seconds

11: 220 seconds

12: 240 seconds

0: No intercom transfer recall

1: 20 seconds

2: 40

seconds

3:

60 seconds

4: 80

seconds

5: 100 seconds

6:

120 seconds

7:

140 seconds

8:

160 seconds

9:

180 seconds

10: 200 seconds

11: 220 seconds

12: 240 seconds

Y

8

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

11

Q

8

18

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

RF1

Key - Sgstem

D’BS Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date Sheet of

--

Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

-(O or 1 to 12)#

Extension intercom transfer recall timer

(CPC-6 vs. 2.0)

CO delayed ringing timer

WC-B Vs. 3.0 or higher)

Program Options

0: No intercom transfer recall

1: 20

seconds

2:

40 seconds

3:

60 seconds

4: 80 seconds

5: 100 seconds

6: 120 seconds

7: 140 seconds

8:

160 seconds

9: 180 seconds

10: 200

seconds

11: 220 seconds

12: 240 seconds I I

0: CO delay ringing after 4 seconds

1: CO delay ringing after 8 seconds

2:

CO delay ringing ufier 12 seconds

3: CO delay ringing after 16 seconds

4: CO delay ringing after 20 seconds

5: CO delay ringing after 24 seconds

6: CO delay ringing after 28 seconds

7: CO delay ringing after 32 seconds

8: CO delay ringing after 36 seconds

9: CO delay ringing after 40 seconds

10: CO delay ringing after 44 seconds

11: CO delay ringing after 48 seconds

12: CO delay ringing after 52 seconds

13: CO delay ringing after 56 seconds

14: CO delay ringing after 60 seconds

S

Y

8

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

!3

8

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FFIKey-System

DBS Account Name Cutover Date Sheet of

Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

EXT. delayed ringing timer

(WC-6 Vs. 3.0 or higher)

Hunt Group no answer

(CPC-B Vs. 3.0 or higher)

-(HHMMM

(WC-B Vs. 4.0 or higher)

0: EXT. delay ringing after 4 seconds

1: EXT. delay ringing after 8 seconds

2: EXT. deby thgbhg crlyer 12 seconds

3: EXT. delay ringing after 16 seconds

4: EXT. delay ringing after 20 seconds

5: EXT. delay ringing after 24 seconds

6: EXT. delay ringing after 28 seconds

7: EXT. delay ringing after 32 seconds

8: EXT. delay ringing after 36 seconds

9: EXT. delay ringing after 40 seconds

10: EXT. delay ringing after 44 seconds

11: EXT. delay ringing after 48 seconds

12: EXT. delay ringing after 52 seconds

13: EXT. delay ringing after 56 seconds

14: EXT. delay ringing after: 60 seconds

0: H. Group no answer after 4 seconds

1: H. Group no answer after 8 seconds

2: If. Grout no mswer offer 12 seconds

3: H. Group no answer after 16 seconds

4: H. Group no answer after 20 seconds

5: H. Group no answer after 24 seconds

6: H. Group no answer after 28 seconds

7: H. Group no answer after 32 seconds

8: H. Group no answer after 36 seconds

9: H. Group no answer after 40 seconds

10: H. Group no answer after 44 seconds

11: H. Group no answer after 48 seconds

12: H. Group no answer after 52 seconds

13: H. Group no answer after 56 seconds

14: H. Group no answer atier 60seconds

15: H. GrouD no answer after 64 seconds

HH: Hours (00 to 23)

MM: Minutes (00 to 23)

P

Y

8

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

Q

8

c

2c

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FFl Key -

System

DBS Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date Sheet of

Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

-(4 digts)# Ako used with DISA

Remote maintenance I

-(4 diglts)# See FF2-ill. 191, 20#

-(4 d@tsM See FFZ-11X, 19#, 20#

-(4 digtk)#

-(O Of 1)Y (CPC-B Vs. 3.0 or hlghed

DID reset

-(O to 111 (CPC-B Vs. 4.0 01 hlgher)

DID/l1 reset (6)

-(O of l)# (WC-B Vs. 3.0 of higher)

Confirmation of DID reset

-(O or I)# (WC-B Vs. 4.0 or higher)

-(O to 9999)#-(10 to 69 or 100 to 699I1

DID Number Set

-1X-1X-(0 to W

System size

(CPC-B Vs. 4.0 OT higherl

1111: Default

9999: Dekutt l-l

0: No (do not reset DID numbers)

10 to 69

loo to 699 #

0: D6S 40

1: DBS 72

2: DBS 96

3: DBS 40 + DES 40

(Tl must be in slave cabinet.)

4: Df3S 72 + DBS 40 fll not supported)

5: DE3S 72 + DBS 72

01 must be In slave cabinet.)

6: DES 96 + DES 40

7: DEE 96 + DBS 72

S

Y

s

t

e

m

W

i

d

e'

S

e

t

i

n

Q

8

2

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

EFIKey-system

Account Address Sheet of

Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

-l#-2#-(1 to 3)Y

Synchronization setting for the first sync

some

- l #-3#-(0 to 3)#

Synchronization setting for the second sync

sauce

-l#-#-Cl to 3hv

Synchronization setting for the third sync

some

-2#-l#-(0 to 2sM

Neiwuk Resync timer

-2#-2#-(IJ to 12)#

Diiconnect timer

-m-3#-(0 to 15)#

Guard timer

-2#-4#-(0 to lS)#

Release acknowiedge timer (RLS ACK Timer)

-2#-!i#-(0 to 8)Y

Duipdse

delaq timer

-2#45#-(0 to 1511

tink timeout timer OJVink Timeout)

~2#-7#-(oto

15)#

ncoming detection timer

-2#-W-(0 to 8)x

Ynswer supervision timer (Answer Super4

.2#-9#-(0

to

1 5)#

mmediate Glue timer (Imm-Glare Timer)

*2#- 1 or-<0 to 15)#

&ink Glare timer M-Glare Timer)

1: Tl of the

master cabinet

2:

Tl of the slave cabinet

o:NCYE

1: Tl of the master cabinet

2: Tl of the slave ccbinet

3:

Free Run (Internal clocking)

OrNOne

1: Tl of the master cabinet

2:Tl oftheslavecabinet

3:

Free Run (lntemd docking)

Oto25hous

= No Entries

Oto8

(3)-6mMs t-i

oto 15

(3)=6clMs

?

L

Y

8

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

Q

s

(

22

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FFl

Key - Sgstem

r \-

Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

Program options

-3X-(1 to 8)X-(1 to 8)#-(0 to 3OM

Digital pad settings (Digital Pad Set)

-8#-4W 1

1

CklJitTvr>es

K-TEL

SLT

DATA

PmbgCOTrk

Tl Master

Tl slave

OPllONl”

OlllON2”

DPVW

CoNF~C)#

Tone 1 &lFRl)#

Tone2&lFM)#

#CrcuitType3&912cxe

rae4vedtifuiureuse.

YJse~~la7d2to

CX&lUliCjUePADlevels

tocicuikthutrequke

speddvdmew

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

lo

11

‘12

Figure 1 shows the numbers used to identify each

circuit type.

Figure 2 shows the defautt values for the

most common Tl connections.

figure 3 lists the adjustments provided by each

pad number.

I

F/awe 2: Default wd vaiues I

From To Sefflng Value

Tl%l K-TEL 16

-2

dB

Tl f2 .K-TEL 16

-2

dB

Tl Xl SLT 16

-2

dB

Tl f2 SLT 16

-2

dB

K-TEL Tl Rl 16

-2

dB

K-TEL Tl 62

16 -2

dB

SLT Tl 81 16

-2

dB

SLT Tl #2 16

-2

dB

I

F&we 3: Ptd Nos.

I

Pad No. 1 Level ]

i +28 dB 1

29

30

-28 dB

-30 dB

P

S

Y

.s

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

23

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

IF1

Key - System

Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

-4#-l#-l#-(0 to I)# (Master cablnet)

-5#-l#-l#-(0 to l)# Glave cabhot)

Trunk class

-4#-l#-2X-(0 to 24)# (Master cabhot)

-M-l#-2#-(0 to 24)# Glave cablnetl

Number of channels used

-4#-l#-3#-(0 to l)# @laster cabinet)

-s#-1x-3#-(0 to 1)# (Slave cabinet)

Frame format

-4#-1#-4#-(0 to l)# (Master cabinet)

-5#-1#-4#-(0 to l)li Wave cablnet)

Clear chawwl

-4#-l#-sr-co to l#

-St-l#-5#-(0 to 1M (Master cabinet)

(slave cabhot)

Failure mode

-4+1#-6+(0 to l)# (Master cabinet)

-5X-it-M-(0 to I)# Gtave cabinet)

Remote loopback (R-Loooback)

-4+1#-7#-(0 to l)#

-5#-l#-71(0 to I)#

Yellow akxm send

-4#-2#-l#-(0 to 15)#

-5#-2#-W-(0 to iS)#

(Master cabhot)

(Slave cabinet)

(Master cablnet)

tslave CabInetI

Red alarm detection (Red Aim Det)

-4#-2#-2#-(0

to

lS)# Nader cablnen

-SI-2#-21-(0 to isjr kitave cabtnell

Yellow detection (YeI Aim Det)

-4#-2#-3#-(0 to 15)# (Master cablneb

-St-263#-(0 to lS)# Mave cabinet)

Yellow alam recovq (YeI Aim Ret)

-4#-2#-4#-(0 to 1511 (Master cabhot)

-s#-2##-(0 to 1511 fslave cabinen

3her darms detection (Other Alm Det)

-4#-2#-5#-(0 to lS)# (Mastor CabInen

-5#-2#-5#-(0 to 1511 Grave cabtnen

Other alarms recovery (Other Aim Ret)

-4#-3#-ll-(0 to 9ooo)# (Master cabinet)

-St-Jli-l#-(0 to 9ooo)# &v* CaMnet) -

Frame loss counter (Frame Count)

-4#-31-2#-(0 to 9ooo)# (Master cabinet)

-4+3#-2#-(0 to 9alo)# (Skve cabinet)

Slip counter (Slip Count)

-&l-3&3+(0 to I)# (Master cabinet)

-4+3#-31140 to 1H Slave cabirmt)

Red alarm counter (Red Aim Count)

0: Analog only

1: Tl and analog trunks

0 to 24

co,

0: SF (Super Frame)

1: ESF @Mended Super Frame)

0: AM (Alternate Mark lnverslon)

1:

B8ZS (Binary 8-zeros suppression)

0: Mode 1

1: Mode 2

0: No (No system response to loop&ac&.)

1: Yes (System responds to loopback.)

aoff

1: on

0 to 5

(2)

0 to 15

n

Y

8

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

SJ

8

c

j

24

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

RF1

Key - System

DBS Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date Sheet-of

Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Feature

-4#-3#-4#-(0to 9oooM

(Master cabinet)

-5#-3#-4#-(oto5QOO)u

(slave cabinet)

Loss

sianal counter (Sla Loss Count)

-4#-3#-5+(0to 5xmo)#

(Master cabinet)

-5#-3#-5#-(0t09000)x

(Slave cabinet)

Svnc loss counter (Svnc Loss Count)

-4#-3#-#-(0t05aOO)x

(Master cabinet)

-S#-3#-#-(0

to 9000)# (slave cabinet)

Yellow alarm counter (Yet Alm Count)

-4x-4#-l#-(0 to 1)X (Master cabinet)

-5#-4#-1X-(0 to I)# (5lave cabinet)

Yellow alarm relay (Ye1 Alm Relay)

-4X-4X-2+(0

to 1)#

(Master cabinet)

-W-4%-2+(0

to l)# (5lave cabinet)

Red alarm relay (Red Aim Relay)

-4%-4#-3%-(Oto

1)R (Master cabinet)

-5#-4#-3n-(oto

I)# (slave cabinet)

Loss relay

-4#-4#-4%-(0t0

1)X (Master cabinet)

-5#-4#-4n-(oto l)#

(5Jave cabinet)

Frame loss

relav (Frm Loss Relav)

-4#-4#-5n-(oto

I)#

-5#-4#-5#-(0t0

I)#

A6 relay

-4#-4#-6#-(Oto

I)#

-5#-4#-6#-(Oto

l)#

(Master cabinet)

(slave cabinet)

(Master cabinet)

(Slave cabinet)

Alarm relay reset

Trunk Type

0 to 9000/24h

&limed

1: Manual

1: Ground Start 1

2: Ground Start 2

3:

E&M

S

Y

8

t

e

In

W

i

d

e

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

l?FlKey-Sptem

DBS Account Name Cutover Date Sheet of

Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

DID/DNIS table (DID/DNIS) 1: DID

2: DNIS

-6#(1 to 64)#-3#-(0 to 211

Outgoing type

0: lmmedute Staff

1: Wink stati

2: Dial Tone start

-6#(1 to 64)#-4#-(0 to 1 I#

Incoming type

0: lmmedlote Sfat/rlngdown

1: Wink start

-6#(1 to 64)#-H-(0 to 2)#

Trunk mode

-6#(1

to

&I)#-61140 to I>#

Robbing bit setting (Robbing bit set)

0: Bothwoy

1: Outgoing only

0: Off (ABCD signal not used)

1: On CABCD s/gnu/ used)

-6#(l to 64)#-7#-(0 to l)#

Incoming dialing method (Incoming Dial)

0: Dial pulse (1 OPPS)

1: DtMF

-6#(1 to 64)#-8#-(0 to l)#

Dial tone transmission (DT Send)

0: off

1: On

-6#(1 to 64)#-9#-(0 to l)# I 0: off I

Busy tone transmission (BT Send) 1: On

-6#(1 to 64)#-lO#-(0 to 1)Y

Dial tone generation (DT Receive)

0: off

1: On

-6#(1 to 64)#-ll#-(0 to

1M

Ringback transmission (RBT Send)

0: on

1: On

oto 15

-7#(o to 99%9#-2#-(0 to 2)# oto 15

Other alarms detection (Other Aim Det) (1) (1 - 250 ms) I

I

-&/(I to &a)#-(10 to 69 or 100 to 699M

Y

8

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

f

26

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FFl

Key -

System

S

Y

8

t

e

m

W

i

d

e

S

e

t

i

n

Q

8

2

r

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he FF2 Key is for programming trunk lines

and acts as an interface between the CO

or DID trunk lines and the DBS system.

There are two programming forms for the FF2 Key:

The Trunk Port list is for assigned names

and TelCo circuit numbers.

The Trunk Features list is for recording any

of the 25 features that can be programmed

on each trunk port.

Notes:

(1) The Pooled Tmk Group Access settings in the FF2

Key (Trunks’ programming) are different from the

Trunk Group settings in the FF8 Key (LCR program-

ming):

(a) Trunk lines set in the FF2 Key are accessed by

the user with access codes (9, 8 1 to 86).

(b) Trunk lines set in the FF8 Key are automatically

selected by the system.

Save Your Original Forms!!!

c

d

F

2

K

e

Y

28

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF2Key-TrunkRwts FF2Key-TrunkRwts

Account Address Account Addre Account Phone (Main List)

T

r

U

n

k

P

0

r

t

L

i

8

t

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

#?F2Key-TmnkPb~

Trunk Ports I ~‘.y”.-.. ..“...D.

(Circuit Number)

U

n

L

i

S

t

f

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FlCZKey-TmnkRrts

DBS Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date Sheet of

Account Phone (Main List)

r

Adctre~~ I Feature

I

Progrcml optkms

I I

Trunk Ports (01-W

I I I I I I I I I

0: No pooled trunk access

Pooled trunk access, Group 84

-(l to 6A)#-W-(0 or 111

Pooled trunk access, Group 85

-(l to 64#-9#-(0 or l)#

Pooled trunk access, Group 86

-(l to 64)Clow1 or a0

Trunk llne type

-(l to 64)#-1 l#-(0 of l)#

Enables DISA

1: Group 84

0: No pooled trunk access

l:GfoupE!s

0: No poded trunk access

1: Group 86

1: CO line

2: PBX he

Private line port number

MF signal sending time

omlng ring signal 1:3secsON/l secOFF

2: 2 sea ON/2 sea OFF

3: 1 set ON/l set OFF

4: 1 secON/2secsOFF

5: 1 secON/3secsOFF

6: 5 set ON/.5 set OFF

7: .5 set ON/.5 set OFF

.5 see ONl2.5 sea OFF

8: .5 set ON/X5 sea OFF

P

T

r

U

n

k

S

e

t

i

n

Q

s

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF2Key-IVunkPorts

Account Address

Cutover Date sheet of

Account Phone (Main List)

r

Addross / Fwh~ro I Program OptIons I I I

Trunk Ports (01-64)

I I

I I I I I

Trunk disconnect timer

-(l to 64)#-19f-(HHMMM

7: SO ms

8: 4OOms

9: 45orns

10: 5ooms

11: 55oms

12: 6ooms

13:65orn.s

ld: 7txms

15: 750 ms

No entry d defaun

1: Ground-start trunk

(CPC-B Va 2.0)

r

T

r

U

n

k

P

0

r

t

S

e

t

i

n

Q

s

c

32

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF2Key-TrunkPorts

DBS Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date Sheet of

Account Phone (Main List)

(CPC-B Va 2.0)

3.0 FF3-351

1: 15seconds

2 16seconds

3: 17smnds

4 I8socalds

5 19seconds

6:2oseconds

7: 21 seconds

8:22seconds

lo: 18 seconds

11: 18 seconds

12: 18seconds

13: 18seconds

(CPC-8 Va 2-a)

!30. FF3-351

Tl port clas - trunk

(CPC-B Vs. 4.0 or high.0

r

T

r

u

n

k

P

0

r

t

S

e

t

i

n

!Y

a

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he FF3 Key is for programming exten-

sions. The 36 feature available for this

key represent 36 submodes (l# to 36#).

Telephone Types, submode 2#, default automatically to data

settings 1 through 7 or can be set in programming mode using

data 8 through 19.

The number ofbuttons or keys on the telephone determine how

many FF keys are available for programming. DBS telephone

models come in 16-, 22-, and 34-button sets.

There are several programming forms avaiZable for extension

programming:

The Extension Ports form summarizes the

programming on all extension ports and is for

use by the installer/programmer.

Theforms expU.ned

below are located at the backof this mama2

inunediately following the RF1 0 Key

information:

The Extension Summary form is for recording

features programmed on a single extension port.

The salesperson or programmer and the system

administrator will use this form to design a

program for an extension port. Refer to the

Extension General hformztim and the Extension

Programning boxes on this form. Use a separate

form for each extension port. Photocopy the

original form and use only the copies.

The Summary Key Plan or the Key Plan are for

the Customer. Use either form as appropriate.

To copy extension

featuresjhm one extension port to

another

extension port, use

the FF9 Key.

Save Your Original Forms!!!

F

3

K

e

Y

i

\

34

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

EF3Key-mns

DBS Account Name Cutover Date

J Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

Addross / F.&MO

-(l to 144)#-11(100 to 699/10 to 69)#

Extension numbers

-(l to 144)#-2#-(0 of 1 to 19)#

Telephone types

(CPC-6 Vs. 20 of hlghor)

-(l to 144)#-3#-(001 to 144)X

EM/24 console station-port number

-(I to 144)X-/#-(0 or 1)X

Forced LCR restriction

-(l to 144)~~W-(0 Of 1M

Forced verified account code

-(l to 144)~~66(4 digits)##

Station lockout code

-(l to 144)#-7(1-(0 or l)#

CO line off hook slgnal

-(l to lM)W-#-(0 or I)#

Call waiting

-(l to 144)#-Pi-(0 or 1)X

Busy override

-(l to 144)#-W-(0 or l)#(Seo FFl-2#-I#-174

Busy overridden

-(l to 144)#-116(0 of l)#

Prime line preference

-(l to 144)#-12#-(0 01 l)#

Ringlng line preference

-(I to 144)C13#-(0 o( l)O(FF2-lH,FF-3#-11I

Unsupervised conference - Extension-wide

-(l to 144)#-14#-(0 or l)#(FFl-21.-21-61)

SMDR printout of Incomlna cdts

Program options

140 to 6W/10 to 69: Extonslons

0: No assignment

1: Analog telephone

2: Dlgital telephone (6 FF Ilnes)

3: Dlgltal telephone (12 FF Ilnes)

4: Dlgttal telephone (24 FF lines)

5: Reserved

6: DSLT (Vs. 3.0 or higher)

7: EM/24 VB-43310

8: OPX (pulse)

9: OPX (tone)

10: Voice mall (AEC)

11: DSSl - Extension lO/lCKl

12: DSS2 - Extension lo/100

13: DSS3 - Extension ll/lOl

14: DSS4 - Extension ll/iOl

15: Voice mall (OPX)

16: First attendant console

17: Second altendant console

18: Third attendant console

19: Fourth aftendant console

EM/ar nd connoclod

1 to 144~ Stored extensions on EM/24

Q No LCR restrict/cm for oubld~ cd/s

1: Forced LCR

0: Disabk

1: Enable

No dry d delmli

ooa3 to 9999: Statlon lockout code

I:Exhns&nPortstand2

0: Eafonsbn Potts 2 to W

0: No call wattlng

I: Cd wattha

0: Dbab&

1: Enable

0: Rejects

I: Accepts

0: Dbabh

1: Enable

0: Dkable

I: En&k

0: Dkabh

1: Enable

0: Dkable

I: EndJk

Extonskn Pats (1 to 144)

-

L

-

c

R

E

X

t

0

n

a

i

0

n

P

0

r

t

8

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF3Key-Extensions

Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

-(I to lU)#-15f-(0 of 1 to 4)(1

CO line off-hook slgnol volume

-(l to lU)I-W-(0 Q 1H

CO llne off hook

slgml

pattern

-(l to lU)#-171-(0 OI I)#

PSD names (5 or 10 norms) - large display

-(l to lU)*-lM-(O u l)#

Sets extenslms ICI page groups 00

-(l to lU)r-lPI-(O u l)#

sets extensions to page groups 01

-(l to lU)C20#-(0 of l)#

sets extensions to poQe groups 02

-(l to 144)#-21I-(0 u l)#

Sets extensl0ns to page groups 03

-(l to lu)(r-22+(0 of l)#

%tS 0xtensionS t0 PClge QRXPS 04

-(l to lu)r-zsr-(o u l)#

sets extensions to p&Je groups 05

-(l to lU)II-w-co u 11*

sets extensions to WQe Qrwps 06

-(l to lU)I-2940 of l)r

Sets adnskms t0 PaQ0 Qt0’JPs 07

-(l to lU)#-26+(0 u 1 to 24H

idle dkpkxy - large-dkpluy telephone

-(l to 144)&27#-(0 Q 1 to 24)#

ID1 off hook dkpW - kq?AkP~

-(l to lU)I-28+(0 u 1 to 24H

ID1 colt status display - kXQe-dkpkYY

-(l to lU)M9e-(0 u 1 to 24)#

CO line call dkplay during diillng

-(l to lu)r-sor-(o u 1 to 24)l

CO line call d&pkry after diing

-(l to lU)r-31r-(0 u 1 to 24)1

Page call dkplay - brge-dkplcw

-(l to lU)(I-32#-(0 Q 1 to 24)#

Cal waltlng dkplay - kxJe-dkplov

-(l to lu)r-3s(0 u 1 to 24)#

Intercom busy tone dkpkzy - large-dkpluy

-(l to lU)#-34C(O u I)# (CPC-B va. 2.0)

Extension directory display - large dkpm

-(l to 1u)~-35.-(0 oI 1 to 6)# (CPC-I) VI 3.0 0

hlghor)

Extension clcss of service setting

1: Mlnlrnum volume

2 Lowu me&ml wkme

3: l-igher medium volume

I I

Doea not wing to page Qarp 00

1: Page grq 00

0: 9o.a not Mong to pqp Qc4@ 01

1: Page group 01

0: o0.a not -9 to m qoLp 02

1: Page grocp 04

0: D0.a no/ Mong to pqp Qolp 05

1: Page grq 05

0: 0o.a not behmg

to

page gu#J 04

1: page Qroql 06

0: 0o.a not -9 to pqa qarp 07

1 to 24: See programming Mawal

ograrwnlng Mcnud

0: No ctnngo

1 to 24: See Rogrammlng Manual

0: No dratgo

1 to 24: See Programming Mcnwl

1 to 8: Set to IndMdwl extension

c

h

E

X

t

e

n

8

i

0

n

P

0

r

t

a

c.

i

36

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FlQ Key - JZxtensions

DES Account Name

kcount Address

Cutover Oate sheet of

Account Phone (Main List)

Address / Foaturo

-(I to 14&#-36#-(0

to 2H (WC-B Vs. 3.0)

RIngback tone wtth busy signal

-(l to lU)#-37#-(1 to 3 or 7 to 13H

Tl port class station

(CF’C-B Vs. 4.0 or hQh.0 . . c

-(l to 144)#-3W-(0 or l# (WC-B Vs. 3.0 or

hlghor)

SLT hook flash

-(l to 144H-39#-(0 to 9H (WC-B Vs. 3.0 or

hlghorl

Extension ring pattern MTEL)

-(l to ~MH-39#-(0 to PM (CPC-B Vs. 3.0 or

hlghor)

Extension ring pattern (.SlT/OPW

-(I to IM)#-UU-(0 or 111 (CPC-B Vs. 3.0 or

hlghor)

DSLT handset vdume level

-(l to 144)#-41#-(0001

to 9999H (WC-B Vs.

3.0 w hlghor)

Auto set relocaiion codes

-(l to 144~~42#-(0

to 3)# (CPC-B Vs. 3.0 or

hlghor)

Permanent call forward

-(l to 144)#-UI-(NN(N))#

(WC-B Vs. 3.0 01

higher)

Permanent call forward extension

-(I to IM)#-UI-(O or l)# (CFC-B

Vs. 4.0

or

hlahor)

MljMCil separailon

0: Rtngback ton. wltt~

busy s/gnat

1: Busy sQnal

2: Wngback tone

1: KTEL

2:

SLT

3: DATA

7: OPT1

8: OPT2

9: DTMF

lo: CONF (SCC)

11:

MFRl

12: MFRZ

0: BrokUs hobd

1: lnltiie conference call

0: 0-d on trunk dng

1: 3 set ON/l set OFF

2: 2 set ON/2 set OFF

3:

1 set ON/l set OFF

4:

1 set ON/2 set OFF

5: 1 set ON/3 set OFF

6:

0.5 set ON/OS set OFF

7: 0.5 set ON/OS set OFF

0.5 set ON12.5 sac OFF

8: 0.5 set ON/3.5

set OFF

9:

1 set ON/7 set OFF

0:

DO&WICWI~

on SlT t- rtng

@hrrt h proonrm sdng

1: 3 set ON/l set OFF

2: 2 set ON/2 ssc OFF

3:

1 set ON/2 set OFF

4: 1 set ON/3 set OFF

5:

1 set ON/5 set OFF

6:

1 set ON/7 set OFF

7: 0.5 set ONf3.5

set OFF

8: 0.5 set ON/J.5

set OFF

9: 0.5 set ON/3.5

set OFF

0: Nonmaf

1: Louder (+6dB Gain)

“=: No relocallon codas sot

0: Nof lowurdod

1: Busy/No answer

2: eusy

3: No answer

NN(N): Call forward exMnsion number

0: MC0 keys

1: ML kevs

Extmston Ports (1 to 144)

-

Q

E

X

t

e

n

0

i

0

n

3

';

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he FF4 Key is for setting ring assign-

ments to each trunk.

The attendant position (port 1) defaults to ring (data 1). All

other extension ports default to no r-kg (data 0).

Ring settings are assigned for day, night, day-delayed, night-

delayed, extension, and extension-delayed ring.

To assign a ring to Recall timers or to set Call Forward -

No Answer, refer to the FFl Key forms on pages 8, 9, 10,

11, 12, and 17.

There are four programming forms for recording ring-

assignment information:

The Hunt Group Tables form and the Call Coverage Group

Extension Tables form are surnmary sheets for the installer/

programmer and are helpful cross-references for the

Customer since the same information is also on the Extension

Summary form and Key Plan.

The forms explained below cue located at the buck of this

manual immedia.teZy foUowing the FFIO Key information:

The Extension Summary form is for the salesperson and

system administrator. Refer to the Ringing Assignment box

on this form.

Note: See the DBS Programming Guicfance

Manual

Section 400, for the

five (5) ring-assignment addresses.

See the

Addendwn

to

the DBS

Progranuning lnsb-uctions. Section

400B, for the eleven (11) Hunt Group addresses.

Save Your Original Forms!!!

I

F

4

K

e

Y

i

38

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

liYF4 Key - Ring Assignment

DBS Account Name

Accbunt Address

Cutover Date sheet of

Account Phone (Main List)

cl

Day FF4-1 X-(1 to 145)%-(1 to &I)#-(0 or l>U See FFl -2X-4+ 1 #

0 Night FF4-2X-(1 to 14!Wo to &I)#-(0 or 1)P See FFl-2#-4R-lt

0 Day-Delayed FF4-5+(1 to 14%&o to &W-(0 or 1Y

c1 Night-Delayed FF4-W(1 to 14!5)#< 1 to 64)%<0 or 1 I#

cl Extension FF4-7#-(1 to 144)#< 1 to 144)%-tO or 1 )B

c

cl Extension-Delayed FF4-#<1 to 14&W to L&W-CO or l>a

tl

A

3

i

n

Q

A

8

s

i

Q

n

m

e

11

t

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FIT4

Key - Ring Assignment

Adcount Address

-

Hunt Group 1

Yot Name

lot ExVPofl

me

qF Extension

Hunt Group 3

Pilot Name

Pilot Ext./Port

Type

TRF Extension

Pilot

Name

Pilot ExVPOrt

Type

TRF Extension

TRF Timer

Pilot Name

Pilot ExVPort

Type

TRF Extension

TRF Timer

?F Timer

tiension 1

xtension 2

xtension 3

Extension 1

Extension 2

Extension 3

Cdbneinn

d

TRF Timer

Extension 1

Extension 2

Extension 3

Extension 1

Extension 2

Extension 3

Extension 4

Extension 5

xtension 4

xtension 5

xtension 6

xtension 7

lay Delayed Ring-

-ensIon 0

Day Delayed Ring-

Night Delayed Ring-

Day Delayed Ring-

‘ilot Name

TRF Timer

Extension 1

Extension 2

H

U

n

t

T

a

b

i

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF4 Key - Ring Assignment

DBS Account Name Cutover Date

\ Account Addre

i

Covering Extension l-

Covering Extension 2-

Cdl Coverage Group 5

Covering ExtensiOn l-

Covering Extension 2-

Extension 3

Extension 4

Extension 5

Extension b

Extension 7

Extension 8

cdlCoverogeGfoup2

Covering Extension l-

Coveting Exiension 2-

Extension 3

Extension 4

Extension 5

Extension 6

Extension 7

Extension 8

Extension Tab14

CdlCoverogeGroup3

Covering Extension 1 -

COVWiIlQ

k-tension 2-

Extension 3

Extension 4

Extension 5

Extension 6

Extension 7

Extension 8

cdl coverage Group 6

COV&lQ Extension

l-

covefinQ Extension

2-

Extension 3

Extension 4

Extension 5

Extension 6

Extension 7

Extension 8

Cdl Coverage Group 7

Covering Extension l-

CovefinQ Extension

2-

Extension

3

Extension

4

, Extension 5

Wetion 6

&tendon 7

Extension 8

Cdl Coverage Gfoup 9

Covering Ex.tension l-

Covering Extension 2-

Extension 3

Extension 4

Extension 5

Extension 6

Extension 7

Extension 8

cdl coverage Group 10

Covering Extension l-

Covering Extension 2-

Extension 3

Extension 4

Extension 5

Extension 6

Extension

7

Extension 8

Cdl Coverage Group 1:

Covering Exfension I-

Covering Extension 2-

Extension 3

Extension 4

Extension 5

Extension 6

Extension 7

Extension 8

CdlCoverogeGfoupl4

Covering Extension I-

Covering Extension 2-

Extension 3

Extension 4

Extension 5

Extension 6

Extension 7

Extension 8

Cdl Coverage Group 11

Covering Extension l-

Covering Ex-tension 2-

Extension 3

Extension 4

Extension 5

Extetion 6

Edension 7

Extension 8

Cdl Coverage Group 15

Covering Extension l-

Covering E&nsbn 2-

Extension 3

Extendon 4

Extension 5

Extension 6

Extension 7

Cdl Coverage Group 4

Covering Extension l-

Covering &tension 2-

Extension

3

Extension 4

Extension5

Extension 6

Edetion 7

Extension 8

Cdl Coverage Group 8

Covering Extension l-

Covf3finQ Extension

2-

Extension 3

Extension 4

Extension 5

Extension 6

Extension 7

Extension 8

Cdl Coverage Group 12

Coveimg Extension l-

Covering Extension 2-

Extension 3

Extension 4

Extension 5

Extension 6

Extension 7

Extension 8

Cdl Coverage Group 16

Covering Exkmsion 1 __

Covering Extension 2-

Extension 3

Extension 4

Extension 5

Extension 6

Extension 7

Extension 8

a

A

C

a

1

C

0

V

e

r

a

Q

e

G

r

0

U

P

s

4

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he FF5 Key is for setting pre-programmed

feature codes to extension ports. Remooe any

CO line or pooled trunk information with the

CONF key before programming the FE5 features.

In addition to the

16-, 22-,

and 34-button telephones, you

can also prograxn FF5 features on the AFP (Attendant

Feature Package) Console, the DSS/72, and the EM/24.

7here are

four

prtgrm forms for 8F5 Key features.

AU of these forms are

for

the instakr/pmgrummer:

TheExtensionKe~formonpage43andthe

sample form on page 44 are for recording

Personal Speed Dial and Flexible Feature

information for a single extension. Use one

for-r-n for each extension port. Photocopy the

original form and use only the copies.

The AFP (Attendant Feature Package)

Console F’F Keys form on page 45 is for

recording AFP progmmming. The shaded ar-

eas on the form represent fIxed AFP console

keys. The AFP is available only on CPC-B

Version 2.0.

The DSS/72 FF Keys form on page 46 is for

recordi.ngallattendantconsoleprogrammmg,

including the AFP.

The EM/24 FF Keys form on page 47 is for

recording trunks or extensions assigned to

specific extension ports.

Save Your Original Forms!!!

i

E

F

5

K

e

Y

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

I??5 Key - Fkible’Featums

I

FF Keys

1

Flexible Feature Key Assignment

Penonal Speed Dial (PSD)

FFl O-2#-( 1 to 144)#-(90 to

W#-(

16 digits)#

P!sD

CODES

90

Name / Number

L J

93

94

95

96

97

98

99 I

Mullt-llne Key Assignment

B

E

X

t

e

n

8

i

0

n

1 ML5 (85) 1

1 ML9 (9) I

I

FFS-( 1 to lM)#-( 1 to 24WCONF-(Up to 6 digits)ll

Feature Feature Feature Feature Feature Feature

Code Code Code Code Code Code

19 20 21 22 . 23 24

13 .14- 15 16 17, 18

7 - 8 . 9

10 11

12

1 2 3 4 5 6- 1

1 c

16 Key Telephone (VW221 0,42211,42213) = FF Keys 1 to 6

22 Key Telephone (VB-43220,43221,43223,43225) = FF Keys 1 to 12

(For Feature Codes and Tl

34 Key Telephone (VB-43230,43231,432X3) = FF Keys 1 to 24

Alarm Key Assignment, See FF-

Key Code Chart on Page 74)

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Account Name Cutover Date Sheet of

Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

FF Keys

1

Flexible Feature Key Assignment

FFS-(1 to 144)#-(1 to W&CONF-(Up’ to 6 Qgits#

FFlO-2141 to 144)+(90 to 99)#-(16 d@ts)#

Name / Number I

90 ,opmtm a

91 solis

3m

92 sauk 4m

93 ap-*t-m 73

94

95 BCCW. c91-w1-555-f234

Personal Speed Dii (PSD)

MutMne Key Assignment

FF5-(1 to 144)#-(1 to 24WCONF-(81 to 86,89M

K

1

E

x

t

e

P

S

i

0

n

Name

/

Number

ML1 (81) faZ3

ML2 (82) 4,s

ML3(83) 6 7

ML4(84) 8

ML5(85) I4

ML6 (86) 15 th$gh 22

ML9 (9) 4 thmvBlr u, 23

T-

L

Feature Feature Feature Feature Feature .. Feature

Code Code Code Code Code Code

19 20 21 .22 23 124

13 14 15 . 1 16 17 . I 18.

D&s 210 !D.ssm

7 8 9

GP*-h ,. XllTage

11,

BPf

. ,12

-Rhk

Pa0 I1220 70 RIO

~~

‘3

ML1 !ML9 ML9 lXSl20 lxs 130 !D.s.s 140

1 - 2 3

89

4 m 5 6 .

81 89 !Pl30 m40

16KeyTelephone(\16-42210,42211,a2213)=ff Keys 1 to6

(For F&turn Codes and 11

22 Key Tete~hone (V&43220,43221,43223,43225) = FF Keys 1 to 12

Alarm Key Assignment, See FF - ..

34 Key Telephone (\/B-43230,43231,43233) = FF Keys 1 to 24

Key Code Chart on Page 74)

44

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF5 Key - FkxibZe Featzms

DBS Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date Sheet-of

Account Phone (Main List)

This Table for

1 st Attendant Console 2nd Attendcmt Console 3rd Attendant Console 4th Attendant Console

\ r

FFS-(149 k 1s2wm to SwcoNF- m wS/7ldlFkyr

u

F&(149 k Ia-(01 to 32WCONF- [PIK)CPPOCUD hvkw

Riitsii

/Key1 Feahin 1 Kev i -Feature

Feah~ro Feature 1

Kevl Feature I Kev I Feature I Kevl Feature I Kev I Feature

E

A

F

P

c

0

P

s

0

1

e

F

K

e

Y

s

* Indicate External Page

Zone with an asterisk. - Fixed Feclture EZKI - D&un for 3 dii (or 2 digits)

4-

c

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FE5 Key - FZexibZe Features

Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

DSS/72 FF Key Assignments

lettside

Key Fealure Key Feature Key Feature Key Feature

65 PAGE0 66 PAGE1

67 pAGE2

68 PAGE.3

57 pAGia3

58 PARK1

59 p-

60 PAM3

1stDSSConsotefor f-J

1st Attendant

2nd DSS Consot. for 0

1 St Attendant

1st DSS Ccnsole for 0

mdAblu!ant

2nd DSS Console for 0

2nd Attefldant

Ext. ,

p~No. Key Feature Key Feature Key Feature Key Feature

69

PAGU

70 p- 71p- 72-

61 p-

PAW5 PNM PNW

B

D

S

/

7

2

F

K

e

Y/

8

* Indicate External Page Zone with an asterisk.

46

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

E‘FS Key - Flexible Features

DBS Account Name

Account Addre

Cutover Date

EM/24 FF Key Assignments

You need both the FF3 key crnd the FF5 key to program the EM/24 Cons/e.

47

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he FF6 Key, in combination with the

DSS/72, can create messages for ab-

sence message codes 5 to 9, and can

assign names to extensions, system speed dial,

personal speed dial, trunk lines, and hunt group

pilot extensions.

When there are several DSS units, use only the unit

positioned nearest the telephone for programming.

Use the Name Assignment formwith the Speed Dial

I&t, Key Plan, and Summary Key Plaq. All these

forms are for the installer / programmer.

13

1

F

6

K

e

Y

(

Save Your Original Forms!!! .-

1 1

48

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FEY3 Key - Nane Assignment

Account Addre Account Phon

(CON0 Clear Data Use the DSS to enter Names

13

1

N

a

m

e

A

8

s

i

Q

n

Use Keypad to enter Numbers

EXWlSbN-

FM-IX-(1 to lM)R-(10 chamcters~

Use with Key Plan or Summary Key Plan

SSDNcme&sQment

FF 6-28400 to 89)#-( 16 &xactersM

A name can be stored in each System Speed Dial

code (00 to 89).

Use with Speed Dial list

PSD Name iesignment

FF6-3#-(1 to 144)#-(90 to 99)#-(16 charoctws)#

A name can be stored in Personal Speed Dial

codes (90 to 99) for each extension port (001 to

144).

Use with Speed Dial list

Sp: Space

Bs: Backspace

C: Movetoieft

-: Move to right

-M==w

FF 6-M-(5 to 9)#-(15 chamctefsb

m

e

xl

t

8

Store Absence Messages in message codes (5 to 9).

Each message can be a maximum of 15 characters.

Messages (0 to 4) cannot be changed.

0: In Meeting 5:

1: At Lunch 6:

2: Out of Office 7:

3: Vacation 8:

4: Another Offrice 9

Ttunk Ncme Asigmmt (CPC-8, V2.0)

FF6-SR-(1 to 64)#-(6 chcmcters)#

A trunk name can be a maximum of 6 characters.

Hunt Group f’ilot Name Ass&merit (CPC-B, V.2.0)‘

FF6-#-( 1 to 8)#-( 10 charcicters)#

A pilot name can be a maxtmum of 10 characters.

Cd WcMng Text Reply (cpc-E, m.o or higher)

FF6-7#-(1 to 5)#-(15 chcm&rsM

The answer can be a matimum of 15 characters.

4

(

_

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he FF7 Key is for programming toll

restricted Area and Office codes. The sub-

modes are (l# to 9#).

7hereareseuenfoms iheinstaller/prqgrammer canusetorecord these

ades:

The TRS System Settings form is for submode l#. ‘This

programming affects the entire toll restrict system.

TheTRS&eaCodes/OfficeCodesformisforsubmodesZ#

and 3#. It establishes restrictions for Classes of Restriction

3 to 6.

The TRS Special Area Code

Tables

form is for submodes 4#

and 5#. It is for Classes of Restriction 3 to 6. Each of the four

tablescanacceptonethousand(1,000)officecodeoramacode

entries.

The

7-Digit

Call

Restrict

form is for submode 6#. Use this

optional table to restrict up to tMy 7-digit numbers for Classes

of Restriction 2 to 6.

The TRS

Day

/ Night Assignments form is for submodes 7#

and 8#. In most cases, the “all-trunk” setting is used for each

extension, but excepfioIls can be made wherever needed.

Enter trunk number and COR (0 to 7). Photocopy the original

form and use a separate page for day and night.

The TRS

Block

Mode form is for submode 9#. Record default

changes (deny, allow) for each CORkom 3 to 6 throughout the

toll restrict system.

7hefol7nexpzuinedbebwislocatedattibackofthismanual

. .

zmm&at@foUowing the IF1 0 Key information:

The Extension

Summary form is for assigning toll reslric-

tions to each extension. Use one form for each extension port.

Photocopy the original form and use only the copies. Refer to

the TdRes~nbox on this form.

Save Your Original Forms!!!

PI

F

7

K

e

Y

c

50

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FlVKey-TRS

’ 3% Account Name Cutover Date Sheet of

Account Phone (Main List) I

n

Settings 1

International calls

ofWe code tab/8

0: Disable

-l#-2# Incoming calls I: m&8

Not f8Shkted

-l#-3% Maximum digits dialed 1 to 15: 15th to 29th digit

0: Allow

-I#-AX 211 dial restriction 1: Deny

0: Allow

-l#-5# 311 dial restriction 1: Deny

0: A/low

-l#-6# 411 dial

restriCtiOn

1: Deny

0: Allow

-l#-7# 511 dial restriction 1: Deny

0: Allow

-111-M 611 dial restriction 1: Deny

0: Allow

-l#-9# 7 11 dial restriction 1: Deny

0: Allow

-l#-low 811 dial restriction 1: Deny

0: A/law

-I#-1 l# 911 dial restriction 1: Deny

See FF7-M

0: Allow

-111-121

74g1i

resirkt table COR Tvpe 2

1: R8ddCt

See FF7-M

0: Allow

-l#-13#

7-ciigit

restrict table COR Tvpe 2

?: i?8SfdCt

see FF7-6#

0: Allow

-11-141

restrId table COR TYW 2 I: Resfrkf

T

R

S

Y

s

t

e

m

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Cutover Date

Account Phone (Main List)

- - -

I- - -

- - ---- - .::~::::::::::

.\...:..:.-

1:

bi

::.:.:.z::::::

- - -

- ~

- ___ ~ - - ~

- - - - -

- - -

. . . . . . . . ..y. 7.. .:.A:.:.:.‘:..:.: .:: ,.:. ,. .:: ,. . . . . .

A

r

e

f

52

Class of Restriction (COR)

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FYVKey-ZftZS

( ‘:

PBS Account Name Cutover Date Sheet of

1 Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

---

(3 to 6)l ::i$!:.

- - -- - - - - - F

:F&

COR ---m----

(3to6) I - - - - - - - -

-- ------

--------

-- - - - - - -

- - - __ - -

COR l------------

(3 to 64 - ___ ___ ___ -

- - - - - - -

- - - - -

d Special Office Codes (000 to 999)

T

R

S

A

r

e

a

/

0

f

i

C

e

.. 3 ...... “. :

. .: ..:;. ..

Class of Restriction (COR)

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Account Name Cutover Date sheet of

Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

FF7-6#-(1

F7-l#-(12to 16)#-(Oar l)#

l Noentriesatddautt

D

i

Q

i

t

c

C

a

1

R

e

s

t

r

i

C

t

i

0

n

S

54

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Account Address

Cutover Date sheet of

Account Phone (Main Ust)

0

DAY

FF7-7#-( 1 to 144)#-( 1 to &I)# or (65)#-(0 to 7)#

0 NIGHT FF7-8#-( 1 to lb!)+( 1 to 64)# or (&)#-(0 to 7)#

42

R

43

s

44

D

a

Y

I I

49 I

I

N

I I I

53 1 t

I

26

77

-- I I

65

1 I I I

c

5-

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DES Account Name Cutover Date Sheet of

Account Address Account Phone (Main List)

FF7-9#-(1 to 16)#-(0 or l)#

-9#- 1%

-9#-2%

-9#-3w

Area Code - COR 3

Area Code - COR 4

Area Code COR 5 -

0: Allow

1: Deny

0: Allow

1: Deny

0: Allow

1: Deny

Office Code - COR 3

Office Code - COR 5

Office Code - COR 6

B

1

0

c-

k

M

0

d

e

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he FF8 Key controls economy trunk lines for

designated calling areas. The submodes are

(l# to 8#).

The following forms are for the iizstaUer/pr

The LCR Area Codes/Office Codes form for

submodes l# and 2# establishes area code

tables and office code tables.

The LCR Of!fice Codes for Special AreaCodes

form is for submodes 3# and 4#. Ifthe customer

requires special area codes, set them in

tables

1 to 4.

‘l3eLCRTimePriorityTabksformforsubmode

5#

sets up time priority tables for the trunk

groups.

The Ix=R Trunk Groups form for submode 6#

separates trunks into groups.

The LCR Delete/Ad$ Tables form

is for

submodes 7# (delete) and 8# (add).

TheDeleteTablerecordsupto 16digitsstripped

Tom an outgoing dialed number. Example:

delete an area code or l+ area code.

The Add Table records up to 16 digits added to

an outgoing dialed number. ICw-@e: adds a

carrier’s (MCI, Sprint, etc.) account number or

equal access number (1 m).

Save Your Original Forms!!!

K

e

Y

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Account Name Cutover Date Sheet of

FFS-l#-(1 to 15)#-(000 to 999)#-(0 or l)#

L

3 I 1

- - - - - - - - - ___

- - - -- -----

1

- ~ - - - -----

~ ~ - - - - - - - -

I - - - - - - - ~ - -

I I

I I I

I - - - - - - - - - ~

I I

- - - ~ - - - - - -

- - - ~ - - - -.- -

- - - - - - - - - -

- - - ~- -----

I I

- - - I

- - - - - - - I

- ~ - -- -----

~ - - - - - - - ___

- - - - - - - - - -

___ - - - - - - - - ___

c

Time Prlorlty

Table

(1 to 15)

1

J

I I I

___ - - ___ - - - - - -

I I

1 !

A

I: f

e

a

/

0

f

.i

C

e

58

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DES Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date sheet of

Account Phone (Main List)

Time Priority Table

Special Area Codes FF8-3#-(1 to 4)#-(000 to 999)#

- - - - - - -

- - - -

fiecial

Area Code

Table 4)~ (1 to

- - - - -

:: :. .: . . . y.: :.:.:.: :.-.

- - - - - -

- - - - -

- - - - - -

dOffice Code Entries (000 to 999)1

S

P

e

C-

i

a

1

A

t

e

a

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

BlBKey-LCR

DES Account Nam

Account Address unt Phone (Main List)

6C

7:00

am - 8:OO am

:.:.>..

.+:.:

. . . . . . .

j;::::

. . . . :

lK--2#~3#~4# 5# 6# 7# s# $$f

P -

(Tnmk Groups) @

..:::

.:::.:::

:...-.

i......

ii....

i......

:.:.“.

. . . . ..i

. . . . . . .

:(.:.:.

.:...>

:.,_:.:.

. . . . . . .

..:.>:..

-.. . .

9#

--ax--- ll# 12# 14# 13# -15#-

16# .#

(Tmnk Groups) ;$$!

. . . ..A

:::.

::j:::::

.::,x..

. . . . . .

.._....

. . . . . . . .

.._..A

..:. . .

_...

. . . ..A.

. . . . . .,.

. . . . . .

17#

.---18#-1~-~#- - ~-

21# 22# 23# 24# 2

::...

;,.,,._

. . . . .

. . .._ -..

.:.:.:.:

(Trunk

Groups)

Q

i..:.

. . . . . .

..:i.

. . . . . . .

. . .

:

:.

.:..

>..,i

. . . . :.

:.:.,.:

::

:

:._j..

. . . . .

25# 26# 27!# 28# 29# 30# 31# a# g

(Td Group) i$

. ...:;

: ::

:.>:.

.._...

. . . .

::..

::

:.::.:

. . ..l

. . . . .

A....

::.

..:

. . . . .

.:.:>

.;

:

. ..A

. . . . .

:::

:.:.:

3=L-~%~~#.-.-~# 38# 39# 40# .:.

:..

;;:I

. . ...\

..::

,::..:.

(TN& Groups) “;::

f'-

Aa

e

P

I:

i

0

r

i

t

Y

l#

42#

43# 4.M 45# @# :

-47#48#- .:;.:

II

. . .

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FZV?Key-LCR

DBS Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date Sheet of

--

Account

Phone (Main List)

1#--2# 3# 4#

5#

6# 7# 8#

I

(Order within Each Trunk Group)

1#---2#-3# 4#

5#

6# 7# 8#

(OKbf withm Each Trunk Group)

1#-.-2# 3# 4# 5# 6# 7# 8#

(oldet withm Each Trunk Group)

1#p2# 3# 4# 5# 6# 7# 8#

@rder wilhm Each Trunk Group)

1#-2# 3# 4# 5# 6# 8#

7# ’

--

(older within Each Trunk Group)

1#-2#.-3# 4# 5# 6# 7# 8#

(Order within Each Trunk Group)

1#-2# 3# 458 5# 6# 7# 8#

(Order within Each Trunk Group)

1#-e-2# 3# 4# 5# 6# 7# 8#

(kf9f within Each Trunk Group)

L

C

R

T

r

U

n

k

G

r

0

U

P

s

61

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

RZ%Key-LB?

DBS Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date

lLCR Delete/Add Tables1

FF8-7#-( 1 to 8)#-(Delete up to 16 digits)#

FF8-8#-( 1 to 8)#-(Add up to 16 digits)

Address 1 Feature I Proaram Otiion’ I Selected O&ion’ I

LCR Delete Table

Trunk 01 - Delete Dialing Digits ’ Delete up to 16 digits

-7#-2%

-7#-3w

-7#-4#

-7#-SW

-7#-6R

-7#-7#

Trunk 02 - Delete Dialing Digits Delete up to 16 digits

Trunk 03 - Delete Dialing Digits Delete up to 16 digits

Trunk 04 - Delete Dialing Digits Delete up to 16 digits

Trunk 05 - Delete Dialing Digits Delete

up

to 16 digits

Trunk 06 - Delete Dialing Digits Delete up to 16 digits

Trunk 07 - Delete Dialing Digits Delete up to 16 digits

-7#-8# Trunk 08 - Delete Dialina Diaits Delete

UD

to 16 diaits

-8#-1X

-8#-2#

-8#-3#

-8#-4#

-8#-5%

-8#-6W

-8#-7#

LCR Add Table

Trunk 01 - Add Dialing Digits Add up to 16 digits

Trunk 02 - Add Dialing Digits Add up to 16 digits

Trunk 03 - Add Dialing Digits Add up to 16 digits

Trunk 04 - Add Dialing Digits Add up to 16 digits

Trunk 05 - Add Dialing Digits Add up to 16 digits

Trunk 06 - kdd Dialing Digits Add up to 16 digits

Trunk 07 - Add Dialing Digits Add up to 16 digits

Trunk 08 - Add Dialina D&its

I

Add UD to 16 diaits

I

l NoentriesutcWoutt

f

a :

L

C

R

d

8

1

8

t

8

/

A

d

, -.

62

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he FF9 Key copies programmed data from exten-

sion to extension, trunk to trunk, or FF key to FF

key. The sub-modes are l# to 3#.

:-

Tnm&s/submode l#.

FF9-l#-(Ol to 64)#-(01 to 64)##

Trunk features can be copied to another txunkwith the single 1

exception of the Private Line feature, which cannot be copied.

m

a

mtensions/submode 2#. FF9-2#-fl

to 144)#-(1 to 144)##

C

With four exceptions, all other features can be copied to any

extension in the DBS system.

7Ie&~- exe@ons are= extension number, telephone type,

station lockout code, and the EM/24 port number (BLF).

EFKeys/submode 3#. FF9-3#-(1

to 144)#-(1 to 14-4)##

Save Your Original Forms!!!

I 1

63

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he FFlO Key is for programming System

Speed Dial (SSD) and Personal Speed Dial

(PSD) numbers. There are 90 SSD codes

and 10 PSD codes in the DBS system.

The Speed Dial List is for recording the SSD and PSD

numbers.

SSD numbers are programmed by the installer/

programmer or the attendant.

PSD numbers canbe programmed by the station user as

well as the attendant and installer/progmmmer. Distrib-

ute a copy of each Speed Dial List to every station user

in the system. Photocopy the original forrn and use only

the copies.

See instmctionsfor thel?FWCey to assignspeed diat

ll-.

Save Your Original Forms!!!

64

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FFlO Key -

Speed

DiaZing

DES Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date Sheet-of

Account Phone (Main List)

P

I

S

P

e

d

D

i

a

1

65

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he Extension Summary form is for

recording all the FF3, 4, 6, and 7

Key features associated with each

extension port.

This form is for the installer/programmer

who will eventually transcribe the informa-

tion onto the Summary Key Plan or the

Key Plan for sign-off by the Customer.

Save Your Original Forms!!!

CL

:

E

X

t

8

n

s

i

0

n

S

U

m

a

r

Y

66

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Extension Summary

DBS Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date Sheet-of

Account Phone (Main List)

Extension General Information (FF3,6)

]16022034CI)Std.

7

Hunf Group (FF4)

~(1. ran

(1 to 144)

Hunt Group Member

Hunt Group Number

Hunt Type

Transfer Extension

Pilot Extension/Name

I to6

T/D/L

Ex-tension Programming 1 (FF3) Mu/k = Defautt

ForcZz

Forced Veriied Acct Code DEnable 0 Ditcrble

1 1

Station Lockout Code

CO Off Hook Signal

Call Waiting . .-

Busy Override

Busy Overridden

I I 1 1 1 4

DEnable

q

Disable

1

Accept

0 Reject

lEnable mm&/e

mAcc&

q

Reiect 1

-

mEnable nDiscrMe 1

~Etlable i$isabie

DEnable 0 Discrble

loYes ONo

Ringing Line Preference

Unsupervised Conference

SMDR Printout

Prime Une Preference

Off Hook signal Puttem

Off Hook Sianal Volume

Page Group Pickup

1.2.3.4 I

i

none b conmfe

00.01,02.03

(External Paaina) I 04.05.06.07 I

Ext. Ring Assign. Ext. 10 to 69 (100 to 699)

lmmediie

Delayed

cdl caverage (FF4)

Tall Resfdcfbn Uass of Resfricfian QF7)

DAY Type (0 to 7) Trunks (1 to 64) DAY Type (0 to 7) Trunks (1 to 64)

-mS VW IRS TYW

~3 Type TRS Type

TFS Type TRS Type

TRS Type TRS TYW

m

E

X

t

e

.n

8

i

0

n

S

U

m

a

r

Y

67

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Extension Summary

DBS Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date

Account

Phone

(Main List)

Ext. Port Extension

____ __ ._ ___ ._ _. .__ ______-_

Ex-lension hrmral InformatIon (FF3.6)

Hunt Group (FF4)

Tdl Reshktion Class of Restriction (FF7)

(1 to 14.4)

NlOto6W/lOto69)

Extension Rogramting 1 (FF3)

h/k = DefauR

Forced LCR (

Forced Verified Acct Code DEnable HfIis.

iEEl

Station Lockout Code

CO OfY Hook Signal

Call Waiting

Busy Override

Busy Overridden

abh9

I- 1 I I :! I; I

4

]

a

anable [7Dis

-

mabk

S1Accec bt OReject

able

!eiect

xept. -I-

Prime tine Preference IllEn Iable ~D&able

Ringing Line Preference I[aErwf9e 0 Disable

Unsupervised Conference mnable 0 Disable

s ‘MDR Printout

q N0

Off Hook Signal Pattern

Off Hook Sianal Volume

Page Group Pickup

(External Paging)

1.2.3.m 1

q one jqcontinue

od ti.02.03 I

04.05.05.07

~1

EXT Ring Pattern

Ringing Assignment QF4)

CO Ring Assiin. Trunks (1 to 64)

Day

4

IO 9,

14

Niaht 1 to

14

Coverage Member

Coverage Group number I to 16

Coverinc~ Extension 1

Covering Extension 2 I 1

0

E

x

t

e

.n

8

i

0

n

S

ll

m

a

r

Y

i

6%

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he Key

Plan

is a summary-of the

programming on each station for

the

FF3,4,5,6,7,8,9,

and 10 keys.

Programmed data is taken from the floor plan

of an installation site which, along with the

Summary Key

Plan,

is the only other place

cable numbers are documented.

This form is used on the final walk-through

of an installation or upgrade to verify the

programming on each station.

Save Your Original Forms!!!

[1:

1

K

8

Y

P

1

a

n

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS Account Name

Account Address

Cutover Date Sheet of

Account Phone (Main List)

70

lms COR

2348

---

Circle or Fill in as Appropriate

co-Llne/FF key

Button

Amignment

Asoment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 10 20 21 22 I23 b-4

my

Ntht

ht

Delayed

PlaI

1

Circle or Fill in as Appropriate

**e Nulhe/Deputmsnt co-Llne/FF key Button

Auignment I

hdmmsnt

1 ll2l3t4i6 IS 17 IS IO I10

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

he Summary Key Plan is a summary

of the programming on the FF3,4, 5,

6, and 7 keys for each station.

The form is for larger installations where most,

but not all the details of an installation are

recorded.

The floor plan, Key

Plan,

and Summary Key

Plan

are the only places where cable numbers

are documented.

The Summary Key

Plan

is used by the in-

staller/programmer and the Customer to sign

off on the installation.

Save Your Original Forms!!!

Q

S

U

m

a

I:

Y

I K

8

Y

71

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

72

S

K

m

a

r

Y

K

e

9

P

1

a

n

Cornme,

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

ppendix A is a master list of FF key

defaults. Following the master list

is a pocket-sized version of the FF

key default chart beginning on page 90.

1 A

P

e

n

d

i

X

A

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix A

FFl-l#-

- 1 #-(MMDDYYj#

-2#-(HHMM)#

1 Default 1 Ca lendar ax td Time I

Date (01 to 12) (01 to 311 (00 to 99)

Time (0000 to 2359)

FFl-2#-1#- Timers and Displays I

-l#-(0 or l)#

- _- -. 1 Call duration display

-a#-(U to 2)#

-3#-(0

or l)#

-4#-(00

to 89)#

-5#-(0

or l)#

-6#-(0

or l)#

-7#-(0

or l)#

-8#-(0

or l)#

-9#-(0 or l)#

-lO#-(0 or l)#

-1 l#-(0 or l)#

-12#-(0 or l)##

-14#-(0 or 11#

-15#-(0 or l)#

SMDR timer 5. 16 or 30 seconds

ii Least-Cost Routing (LCR)

- TRS for SSD

0 Display during SSD

1 iWTO-FLASH REDIAL

1

One-touch dialing t

1

On-hook transfer

0 Key bank hold

1

Non-appearance CO-line hold

1

SLT FLASH control

I

1

1 Sets number of extension -digits

1

1 Attendant intercom

-16#-(0 or l)#

-17#-(0 or l)#

-18#

1

I Extension intercom I

1

1 Splash tone on a voice call

0

1 Splash tone on a busy override I

I

-27#-(11 to 69/ 101

1 -30%(0

or l)#

Attendant transfer ext. number

1

Attendant override switch

1

Alarm LED mode

I 0

1 BLF (extensionrdklayedring

1 FFl-2#-2#- SBMDR and Data

-l#-(0 or I)#

-2#-(0

or l)#

-3#-(1 to 4)#

-4#-(1 to 3)#

-5#-(1 to 4)#

-6#-(0

or I)#

-7#-(0

or l)#

-8#-(0

or l)#

1

SMDR parity check

SMDR parity type

(Al2:4m

SMDR baud rate

1

SMDR stop-bit length

4

SMDR data len&h

1 SMDR printing mode 1

1

SMDR printing mode 2 (long/local)

0 SMDR

~rlntim

mode 3 (title) ,

A

P

1‘

8

.n

d

i

x

A

74

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix A

FFl-2#-2W-

-9#-(0 or l)#

-lO#-(0 or l)#

FFl-2#-3W-

-

Default SB%DR and Data

0 Dump data mode (Xon/Xoff)

1

PAI baud rate switch

PBX Access and Pauses

I I

I

-(l to a)#-(00 to 99) or (Ok to 9k)# - PBX access code (00 to 99) or (Ok to 9k)

49 to 18)#-(1 to 3)# See FF!&l% - Automatic pause after dialing (0 to 9)

FFl-2#-4#-

I I

UNA and EPI I

-1%(0 or 1)8 See

FF4-1#.2#

-(2

to 9)#-(0 or l)#

FFl-2#-5#-

Universal Night Answer (UNA) ring pattern

External Page Interface (EPI) groups (00 to 07)

0

0 I

cos

I

-(l to 8)#-(1 to 20)#-(0 or l)# I O I Class of Service setting

FFl-2#-6#- I Account Codes

I

-(l to lOO)#-l#-(OOOl-9999)# - Verified Forced Account Codes

-(l to lOO)#-2#-(0 to 7)# 0 Verified Forced Account Code toll restriction

FFl-3#- System Timers/Night Switch/Conf.

- l#-(0000 to 2359)#

-2#-(0

or 1 to 12)#

1

-3#-(0

or 1 to 12)#

7

-4#-(0

or 1 to 12)#

1

-5#-(0

or 1 to 12)#

7

-6%(0

or 1 to 12)#

1‘

- -7iWO

or 1 to

-a#-CO

or 1

12)#

to 12)#

7

1

-9#-(0 or 1 to 12)#

7

-lO#-(0 or 1 to 12)# 9

Automatic switch to night mode

Attendant HOLD-recall timer

Extension HOLD-recall tfmer

Attendant transfer-recall timer

Extension transfer-recall timer

Attendant Hunt-Groun recall timer

Extension Hunt-Group recall timer

Attendant park-hold recall timer

Extension park-hold recall timer

Attendant reversion timer

Unsupervised conference ta.Ik time

Automatic pause timer

CO-line FLASH timer

SLT on-hook FLASH

Incoming ring timer

Ring signal delay timer

Dial pause timer

PBX FLASH timer

Call forward/no answer timer

Outbound ground detection tlrner

Incoming ground detection timer

Attendant mtercom HOLD-recall timer

A

P

R

e

n

d

i

x

A

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix

A

e

n

d

i

x

-23#-(0 or 1 to 12)#

-24#. 40 or 1 to 12)#

-25#-(0 or 1 to 12)#

-26#-(0 to 15)#

1 -27#-(0 to 15)#

f

-28#-(0 to 15)#

-29#-(HHMM)#

Extension intercom HOLD-recall timer

Attendant intercom transfer-recall

timer I

I 7

I 1

7 Extension intercom transfer-recall timer

2 CO delayed ringing timer

2 EXT. delayed ringing timer

2 Hunt Group no answer

e Auto Day Mode

I I

A

1 FFl-4#- Remote Maintenance Code I

I

-(4 digits)#

I

9999

Set four digits Also used with DISA I

1 FFl-BW- DISA ID Code

Set four digits See Fl%!-ll#. 19#. 20#

-(4 digits)#

/ FFl-6#- DISA Code for Outgoing Calls

-l#-(0000 to 9999)#

1111

-2#-(0000 to 9999)# 9999

_, (

Code 1. set four dieits See

FF2-11#.19#.20#

Code 2. set four digits See

FF2-11#,19#,20#

FFl-7#- System Programming ID Code

Set four digits

-(4 digits) #

FFl-8#-l#

9999

DID

I

0

-(O or l)# DID reset

DID/T1 reset

I

0

FFl-8#-2W

40 or l)# 0

DID Confirm

Confirmation of DID reset

FFl-8W-4# Sync sources/System Timers

-l#-l#-(0 to 8)#

-l#-2#-(1 to 3)#

- l#-3#-(0 to 3)#

-l#-4#-(0 to 3)#

-2#- l#-(0 to 25)#

-2#-2#-(0 to 15)#

0 System size

3 Sync setting for first sync source

0 Sync setting for second sync source

0 Sync setting for third sync source

2s Network sync source recovery timer

1

Disconnect timer

76

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix A

FFl-SW-4# Default Sync sources/System Timers

-2#-3#-(0 to 15)#

-2#-4#-(0 to 15)#

-2#-5#-(0 to 8)#

-2#-6#-(0 to 15)#

-2#-7#-(0 to 15)#

-2#-8#-(0 to 8)#

-2#-9#-(0 to 15)#

-2#-10%(0 to 15)#

-3#-(1 to S)#-(1 to 8)#-(0 to 30)#

-4#-l#-l#-(0 to l)#

-4#- l #-2#-(0 to 24)#

-4#- l#-3#-(0 to l)#

-4#-l#-4#-(0 to l)#

-4% l#-5#-(0 to l)#

-4#-l#-6#-(0 to l)#

-4#-l#-7#-(0 to l)#

-4%2#- l#-(0 to 15)#

-4#-2#-2#-(0 to 15)#

-4#-2#-3#-(0 to 15)#

-4#-2#-4#-(0 to 15)#

-4#-2#-5#-(0 to 15)#

-4#-2#-6#-(0 to 151#

-4#-3#- l#-(0 to 9000)#

-4#-3#-2#-(0 to 9000)#

-4#-3#-3#-(0 to l)#

-4#-3#-4#-(0 to 9000)#

-4#-3#-5#-(0 to 9000)#

-4#-3#-6%(0 to 9000)#

-(4 or 5)#-4#- l#-(0 to l)#

-(4 or 5)#-4#-2#-(0 to l)#

-4#-4#-3#-(0 to l)#

-(4 or 5)#-4#-4#-(0 to l)#

-(4 or 5)#-4#-5#-(0 to l)#

-4#-4#-6#-(0 to l)#

-5#-l#-l#-(0 to l)#

-5#- l#-2#-(0 to 24)#

-5#- l#-3#-(0 to 1)#

3

9

2

15

7

3

-

0

1

0

1

0

1

Guard timer

Release acknowledge timer

Outpulse delay timer

Wink signal start detection timer

Incoming Detection timer

Answer Supervision

timer

Glare‘timer - immediate start

Glare timer - wink start

Digital pads (loss/gain settings)

Trunk class (Master Cabinet)

Number of channels used (Master Cabinet)

Frame format (Master Cabinet)

Clear Channel format (Master Cabinet)

Failure Mode (Master Cab)

Remote loopback detect-ton (Master Cabinet)

Yellow alarm send (Master Cabinet)

Red alarm detection timer (Master Cabinet)

Red alarm recovery det timer (Master Cabinet)

Yellow alarm detection timer (Master Cabinet)

Yellow alarm recov det timer (Master Cabinet)

Other alarms detection timer (Master Cabinet:

Other alarms recov det timer (Master Cabinet)

Frame loss counter (Master Cabinet)

Slip counter (Master Cabinet)

Red alarm counter (Master Cabinet)

Loss Signal counter (Master Cabinet)

Sync-loss counter (Master Cabinet)

Yellow alarm counter (Master Cabinet)

Yellow alarm relay control

Red alarm relay control

Loss relay (Master Cabinet)

Frame loss

AIS relay

Alarm relay reset (Master Cabinet)

Trunk class (Slave Cabinet)

Number of channels used (Slave Cabinet)

Frame format (Slave Cabinet)

A

P-

P

e

n

d

i

X

A

7

I-

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix A

A / ..

P

e

xl

d

i

X

A

f-

I’

78

Default Sync sources/System Timers

0

1

0

3

0

1

0

-

Clear channel format (Slave Cabinet)

Failure mode (Slave Cabinet)

Remote loopback detection (Slave Cabinet)

Yellow alarm notlficatlon (Slave Cabinet)

Red alarm detection timer (Slave Cabinet)

Red alarm recovery det timer (Slave Cabinet)

Yellow alarm detectton timer (Slave Cabinet)

Yellow alarm recov det timer (Slave Cabinet)

Other alarms detection timer (Slave Cabinet)

Other alarms recov det timer (Slave Cabinet)

Frame loss counter (Slave Cabinet)

Slip counter (Slave Cabinet)

Red alarm notification (Slave Cabinet)

boss signal counter (Slave Cabinet)

Sync-loss counter (Slave Cabinet)

Yellow alarm counter (Slave Cabinet)

Loss relay (Slave Cabinet)

Alarm relay reset (Slave Cabinet)

Trunk type

DID/DNIS settings

Outgolm? tvoe

Incomine tvoe

Trunk mode

Robbing bit setting

Incoming dialing method

Dial tone transmission

Busy tone transmission

Dial tone generation

Rlngback transmission

DNIS number setting

-5#-l#-6#-(0 to l)#

-5#-2#- 1 #-(0 to 15)#

-5#-2#-2#-(0 to 15)#

-5#-2#-3%(0 to 15)#

-5#-2%4#-(0 to 15)#

-5#-2#-5#-(0 to 15)#

-5#-2#-6#-(0 to 15)#

-5#-3#-2#-(0 to 9000)#

-5#-3#-3#-(0 to l)#

-5#-3#-6#-(0 to 9000)#

-5#-4#-3#-(0 to l)#

-5#-4%6#-(0 to l)#

-6#-(1 to 64)#-l#-(0 to 3)#

-6#-(1 to 64)#-2#-(0 to 2)#

-SW1 to 64)#-3#-(0 to 2)#

-6#-(1 to 64)#-4#-(0 to l)#

-6#-(1 to 64)#-5#-(0 to 2)#

-6+(1 to 64)#-6#-(0 to l)#

-6#-(1 to 64)#-7#-(0 to l)#

-6#-(1 to 64)#-8#-(0 to l)#

-6+(1 to 64)#-9#-(0 to I)#

-6#-(1 to 64)#-lO#-(0 to l)#

-6#-(1 to 64)#-1 I#-(0 to l)#

-7t-(0 to 9999)#-(10 to 69 or 100 to 699)R

Alarm Counter

FFl-8#-51

-3#-3#-(0 to 9000)#

FFl-8#-8#

-7t-(0 to 9999)#-( 10 to 69 or 100 to 6991t

Red alarm counter

Dialing Assignment

DID dialing assignment

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix A

i \

!

i

FF2-(01-64)#- Default Trunk Programming

-l#-(0 or l)# 0 Denies trunk use

-2#-(0 or I)# 0 Pulse or DTMF dial type

-3#-(0 or l)# 1 Pooled-trunk-group access 9

-(4 to 9)#-(0 or l)# 0 Pooled-trunk-group access 81 to 86

-lO#-(1 or 2)#

1 Trunk type

-ll#-(dor l)# ’ ^ 0 Enables DISA

-12#-(001 to 144)# Private-he port number

-13#-(0 or l)#

1

Automatic pause

-14#-(0 or l)# 0 Dial-tone detection

-15#-(1 to 3)# 1 IYMF signal sending time

-16#-(0 or l)# 0 Unsupervised conference (trunk capability)

-17#-(0 or 1 to 9)# 0 Incoming ring signal pattern

-18#-(0 or 1 to 15)# 7 Trunk disconnect timer

- 19#-(HHMM) DISA start time

-20#-(HHMM) DISA end time

-21#-(0 to 2)# 0 Loop-start. ground-start or DID trunk card

-2 1 #-(0 to 3)# 0 Trunk selectfon

-22#-(0 or l)# 0 DID - immediate or Wink start

-23#-(0 to 15)# 3 Wink-start timer

-24#-(0 or 1 to 15)# 4 Digit dial time-out

-25#-(0 to 15)# 5 DID interdigit dial time-out

-26#-(4 to 6 or 13)# a Tl port class - trunk

A

P

e

n

d

i

X

A

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix

A

FF3-(001-144)#-

-l#-(10 to 69/100 to 699)#

-2%(0

or 1 to 19)#

-3#-(001 to 144)#

-4#-(0

or l)#

-5th(0

or I)#

-S#-(0000

to 9999)#

-7#-(0

or

l)#

Portsl-

Ports2to144-

-8#-(0

or l)#

-9#-(0 or l)#

-lO#-(0 or l)#

-1 l#-(0 or l)#

-12#-(0 or l)#

-13#-(0 or l)#

-14#-(0 or l)#

-15#-(0 or 1 to 4)#

-16#-(0 or l)#

-17#-(0 or l)#

-(18 to 25)#-(0 or l)#

-26#-(0

or 1 to 24)#

-27#-(0

or 1 to 24)#

-28#-(0

or 1 to 24)#

-29#-(0 or 1 to 24)#

-3O#-(0

or 1 to 24)#

-31%(0 or 1 to 24)#

-32#-(0

or 1 to 24)#

-33#-(0

or 1 to 24)#

-34#-(0

or l)#

-35#-(0000

to

9999)#

-36#-(0

to 2)#

-37#-(

1 to 3 or 7 to 13)#

-38#-(0

or l)#

-39#-(0 to 9)#

-4O#-(0

or l)#

-4

1 #-(000 1 to 9999)#

-42#-(0

to 3)#

-43%(NN(N))

-44#-(0

or l)#

Default

100 to 699

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

2

0

-

Extension Port Specifications

Extension number

Telephone types

EM/24 console station port number

Forced LCR restriction

Forced verified account code

Station lockout code

CO-line off-hook signal for off-hook

voice announce

Call waiting

Busy

override

Busy

overridden

Prime-line pick up

Automatic pickup for a ringing line

Unsupervised conference (ext. capabilib

SMDR printout by incoming call

CO off-hook signal volume

CO off-hook signal pattern

PSD name large-screen display (5 or 10)

Sets extensions to page groups (00 to Oi

Idle screen on the large-display phone

[DT display on the large-screen phone

CO-line display on display while dialing

CO-line-call on large-screen after dialin

Page-call display on large-screen phone

Call-wait display on large-screen phone

Intercom-busy-tone display on large-

screen phone

Extension-directory display on the

large-screen phone (5 or 10 names)

DID outside extension number

Ringback tone with busy signal

Tl port class station

SLT hook flash

Extension ring pattern

D-SLT handset volume level

Auto set relocation codes

Permanent call forward

Permanent call forward extension

ML/MC0 Separation

3

1

P

e

n

d

i

X

A

f

! .-.

80

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix A

FF4-l#- 1 Default 1 Incoming Ring Assignment

-(OOl to 144)#-(01 to 64)#-(0 or l)#

Ports 1 at 2- 1

Port83to144- 0

DayUme ring

FF4- 1 #- Hunt-Group Day Ring Tables

-(151 to 158)#-(01 to 64)#-(0 or l)#

I I

0

FUng signal for pilot number and CO line

FF4-2#- Incoming CO-Line Call Table

-(OOl to 144)#-(01 to 64)#-(0 or l)#

Ports l&k 2- 1

Ports 3 to 144- 0

Nighttime ring

FF4-2#- Hunt-Group Night Tables

-(151 to 158)#-(01 to 64)#-(0 or l)# I 0 I F&g signal for pilot number and CO lin

FF4-3#-(1 to 8)#- Hunt Groups

-1%(11 to 69/101 to 699)#

-2%(0 to 2)# 0

-3#-(10 to 69/100 to 699)#

-4#-(2 to 32)# 2

-15 to 12)#-(11 to 69/101 to 699)# i

Pilot extension number

Search method

Transfer extension number

Transfer timer

Hunt-group extension numbers

FFQ-4#- Call-Coverage Groups (16)

-l#-(1 to 8)#-(lo/69 to 100/699)#

-(3 to lS)#-( 1 to 8)#-( lo/69 to 100/699)#

First~coverine extension

Second covering extension

Other covering extensions

FM-5#- Day Delayed-Ring Tables

-(OOl to 145)#-(01 to 64)#-(0 or l)# 0 Daytime delayed-ring tables

FF4-5#- Hunt-Group tiay Delayed Ring

-151 to 158)#-(01 to 64)#-(0 or l)# 0 Ring signal for pilot number and CO lir

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix

A

FF4-6#- 1 Night Delayed-Ring Tables

-(OOl to 145W(01 to 64)#-(0 or l)#

I I

0 Night delayed-ring tables

FF4-6#- Hunt-Group Night-Delayed

-(151 to 158)#-(01 to 64)#-(0 or l)#

I I

0 Signal for pilot number and CO line

FF4-7#- Extension Ring Tables

-(OOl to 144)#-(001 to 144)#-(0 or l)#

FF4-8#-

-(OOl to 144)#-(001 to 144)#-(0 or l)#

0 intercom ring signal

Ert Delayed-Ring Tables

I

0

Intercom ring signal

Reminder:

82

DEFAULTS

Record changes to the ring default on the Extension

Summary form and the Hunt group Tables form found

elsewhere in this manual. An extension can only be a

member of either a Hunt Group x a Coverage Group.

A

4

I?

e

n

d

i

X

A

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix A

~~ -

I

FF5-(001 to 144)#- Extensions

-(01 to 24)#-CONF-(PROGlO to 69/100 to 699)#

EL keys

_-

:

-(Ol to 24)#-COl’W(81 to 86. 89)W

ML keys

.

FF keys - (01 to 24)

01 to

24

Default

-(Ol to 24)#-CONF-(PROGPROG-6 di&tsJ# Aw key

FF keys - (01 to 24) I Default I

-(Ol to 24)#-CONF-(6 dieits)#

Pre-programmed

codes

(See FF-Key Code Chart)

01 to 24

I

A

P

0

e

n

d

i

X

A

8:

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendi% A

FFS-(145 to 148)#- DSS/72/BLF Consoles

-(Ol to 24)#-CONF-(81 to 86. 89)#

MC0 keys

1 FF keys - (01 to 24) Default

-01 to 24

-(Ol to 72)#-CONF-(PROGlO to SS/lOO to 699)#

DSS keys

I

FF keys - (01 to 72)

01 to 56-

57 to 64-

65 to 71-

72-

Pre-programmed

codes

(See FF-Key Code

Chart]

I

Default

r--

01 to 72 I - I

,'

84

Default

100 to 155 - Extensions

7500 to 7507 - Park hold

#OO to #06 - Page zones

#52 - Day/Night

-(Ol to 72)#-CONF-(PROGPROG6 dis!its)#

-(Ol to 72)#-CONF-(6 ditits)#

1 FFkeys-(01 to72) 1

A

/

i

e

n

d

i

x

A

/

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Amendix A

FFS-(149 to 152)#- Attendant Consoles (4)

-(Ol to 08)#-CONF-(81 to 86. 89)#

MC0 keys

I

FF keys - (01 to 32) I Default

01 to 32

I _.

-(Ol to 32)#-CONF-(PROGlO to 69/100 to 699)#

DSS keys

FF keys - (01 to 32)

01 to 12

13 to 14

15 to 16

17 to 20

21 to 24

25 to 28

29 to 32

Default

7508 to 7509 - Park hold

7504 to 7507 - Park hold

7500 to 7503 - ”

#04 to #07 - Page zones

#OO to #03 - ”

-(Ol to 32)#-CONF-(PROGPROG6 ditits)W

-(Ol to 32)#-CONF-(6 d&its)!!

Pre-programmed

codes

(See FF-Key Code Chart)

r ~~

FF keys - (01 to 32) I Default a

01 to 32

A

P

e

n

d

i

X

A

8-

L

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix A

* Absence Message 71

d Account Code FF12 (#) 7

* Alarm FF12 (#) 4

Answer Key FFll (*) 1

Attendant 0

* Background Music (BGM) FF12 (#) 53

Intercom Transfer

Least-Cost Roulitlg (LCR)

* Meet-Me Answer

*Wessage Waiting (Set)

Message Waking (Answer)

Message waiting (Cancel)

CONF

69

77

2

AUTO REDIAL

AUTO FLASH

$# #Busy Override

* Call Forward/All Calls

m Call ForwardMoAnslBusy

* Call Forward/Busy

4 Mute Key *c#

720 Night Key FF12 (#) 52

721 *Page Groups FF12 (#) (00 to 07)

722 * Park-HOLD Key/Retrieve 75176

Call Forward to CO Line PermnalSpeedDial (PSD) AUTO (90 to 99)

Headset Mode I FF12 (#) 51 1 % Universal Night

AISWK

(UNA) 1 76

Intercom Dial Tone On/Off 1 FF12 (#) 50 I*#voice call/Tone Call I 1

Intercom Key I FF12(#) 8 I I

% These features. tn addition to Crg

Walthg

and OSHook

Volcc

Aaaormcc. can be stored on a

One-Touch key.

*# These features can be stored on a

One-Touch key only if the feature coda is preceded b either an oxtension numbw or mde &I

For example, to store:

Busy Ovwrfdo - enter an rxtonsbn nurnbw followed by code 4.

Tnnlr Qwulng - store as 88 (0144) folbwed by mde 2.

Also:

1 Sotion Lockout - II the feature mda 74 is stored on a One-Touch key with the four-dfgft ID code1

II

(example:741234), theIDcodewilldisphylrhenthestati~kndkckedout -

by pressing ON/OFF and CONF. II

Pufc HOID - IO pa& a call. press the HOLD key plus the ChwTowh key.

To

et

T1 ahrm key: OR/OFF-PROC+FF key-lOl#-HOID

Feature Setttng number for master Setttng number for slave

A.

L‘

e

n

d

i

X

A

I

86

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix A

FF6- Default Name/Message (DSS Console)

-l#-(001 to 144)#-CONF-(10 char.)+/ Extension name

-2#-(00 to 89)#-CONF-(16 characters)# - System speed dial name (00 to 89)

-3#-(001 to 144)#-(90 to 99)#-CONF

-( 16 character+

-4#-(5 to 9)#-CONF-(15 characters)#

-5#-(01 to 64)#-CONF-(6 characters)#

-6#-( 1 to 8)#-CONF-ii0 cha.ractexs)#

-7#-( 1 to 5)#-CONF-( 15 characteIs)#

-

Personal speed dial name (90 to 99)

Absence message numbers (5 to 9)

CO-trunk-line name

Hunt-group pilot name

OHCA Answerback _l.

FF7-l#-

-l#-(0 or l)#

-2#-(0 or l)#

-3#-(1 to 15)#

-4#-(0 or l)#

-5#-(0 or l)#

-S#-(0 or l)#

-7#-(0 or l)#

-8#-(0 or I)#

-9#-(0 or l)#

-lO#-(0 or l)#

-1 l#-(0 or l)#

-(12 to 16)#-(0 or l)#

FF7-2#-

-(3 to S)#-(000 to 999)#-(0 or 1)#

FF7-3#-

-(3 to S)#-(000 to 999)WO or l)#

FF7-4#-

-(l to 4)#-(000 to 999)#

FFT-5#-

-11 to 4)#-(000 to 999)WO or l)#

Default

Toll Restriction Setting

0 TRS for international calls

1

Dialing restriction/incoming calls

F&xQ.riction/maximum digits dialed

0 211 restriction

0. 3 11 restriction

0 411 restriction

0 5 11 restriction

0 6 11 restriction

0 7 11 restriction

0 8 11 restriction

0 9 11 restriction

1 7-digit dial restriction/types (2 to 6)

Area-Code Table

Area code types (3 to 6)

Office-Code Table

OtTice-code types (3 to 6)

Special Area Code Table

Special area codes (1 to 4)

Special Office-Code Table

Of&e codes (1 to 4)

A

87

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix A

FF7-6#- I Default 7-Digit Restriction Table

7-digit TRS codes (1 to 50)

FlW-7#-(001 to 144)#- Daytime TRS

-(Ol to 64)#-(0 to 7)#

-65#-(0 to 7)#

FF7-8#-(001 to 144)#-

-(Ol to 64)#-(0 to 7)#

-65#-(0 to 7)#

7 Daytime TRS

Daytime TRS (all extensions)

Nighttime TRS

7 Nighttime TRS

Nighttime TRS (all extensions)

FF7-9#- Type Blocks for each Area Code

-( 1 to 4)#-(0 or l)#

-(5 to 8)#-IO or l)#

49 to 12)#-(0 or l)#

-(13 to 16)#-(0 or l)#

‘Ibe (3 to 6) Area Codes

Type (3 to 61 Office Codes

‘l&e (3 to 6) Area/Office Codes

Type (1 to 4) Special Area Codes

for Office Codes

FFS-l#-

-(l to 15)#-(000 to 999)#-(0 or l)#

Default Area-Code Table

Time priority tables (1 to 15)

1 LCR area codes (000 to 999)

FFS-2#- Office-Code Table

-11 to 15)#-(000 to 999)#-(0 or l)#

I

- Time priority tables (1 to 15)

LCR offke codes (000-9991

FF&3W- Special Area-Code Table

-(l to 4)#-(000 to 999)#

FFS-4W-

Speclal area codes tables (1 to 4)

Special area codes (000 to 999)

Special Office-Code Table

-(l to 4)#-(1 to 15)#-(000 to 999)#- -

(0 or l)# I

Special office codes (1 to 4)

Time-priority tables (1 to 15)

FFS-5#- Time-Prioritv Tables

-(l to 15)#-(1 to 48)#-(1 to 8)# Time-priority tables -( 1 to 15)

Time bands (1 to 481

LCR trunk groups (1 to 8)

Cn

Y

e

n

d

i

X

A

i

38

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Appendix A

FFS-6#- Trunk-Group Tables

-(l to 8)#-(1 to 8)#-(01 to 64)# LCR trunk groups (1 to 8)

FF8-7#- Dial-Delete Table &CR)

-(l to 8)#-(16 digit&# Dial-delete tables (1 to 8)

FFS-SW- Dial-Add Table &CR)

-(l to 8)#-(16 digits)#

I- I

Dial-add tables (1 to 8)

FF9-

-l#-(01 to 64)#-(01 to 64)##

-2#-(001 to 144)#-(001 to 144)##

-3#-(001 to 144)#-(001 to 144)##

Default Copy Mode

Copy trunk mode

Copy extension mode

Copy FF key mode

FFlO- 1 Default

-l#-(00 to 89)#-(16 d@ts)#

-l#-(001 to 144)#-(90 to 99)#-(16 digits)#

Speed Dialing

System speed dial -

Personal speed dial -

A

39

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

A

T\

L;

e

n

d

Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses t

r--- s --a----------------

1

A

I

1

I

-1r4oa 1v I I

I

90

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses

I

i

I

A

P

e

n

d

i

x

A

L ------------------------ -1

91

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

A

e

xl

d

Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses i

l----

%x

--------------------

1

A

I

1

I

I‘

I

FFI-SI-I#

DID

4oOW 0 DID reset

-_. -

40 to 111 0 OIOrrl Iuet

Rl-s#-l# DrncQnnnn

I

I -----------------,-,,,,,-I

92

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses

r---@&&--------- _--- ------7

I

r

~1” ._ .- ,- .- ..- I

-~

-4u- I@-2r-(0 to 24w 0 - Number dchmnch used Waster Cabhell

__

-4ElKw-m to 114 1 l3unu~(Mwrcab0

-4r-1r-4r4oto IW - -’ _ 0 ._ Un mdtra hmmt Master CabInetI

-aa-ar-4crO to mu

-4ff-21-W-(0 to l&

I

L ----- __-_-____vw------e- -1

A

P

e

n

d

i

X

A

93

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

I?

8

n

d

Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses i

l----

x --------------------

1

A

i

I

f

L --------------------,,-,-I

94

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Pocket-Sized list of Programming Addresses

r ___ --------------------~

if%

i

I

f

I

mm401-64w lD&ult I TnmkR0afomda

~.

-I4woar Ilf -‘-

_ ._-._-

I 0 Dlablme d-

-15e-11 ta31e I 1 ‘bii4FslmalsmdiMtmx ‘.

!

I

t

I

A

P

e

n

a

i

x

A

L ___-_---_-------_------- J

95

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses

I

i

I

FPs+o1-lU)#-

Default Extewlon Port Speclflcatims

-IWlOlo69/lOOt0699J#

--_.---- 100 to 809 ExluWan number

-21.IO or 1 u)

19l#

- _ Tekphme typea

-3wcoI to 1441# EM/24 oonrole station port llumbcr

41io or 111 .-

0 Forced LCR -wn

-5r-(0 oc lI# 0 Fcmxdvulflcd-ntcodc

---_

-6ctoooO lo 9999v s.mlon lakout c0.i; ..

-74-(0 or 114 -I- .1 CO-Une of?-hook ~,@,a, la o,T-,,.,.,k

-

.-n_

-35r-(oooo to 9999M - 0000 DID outside camsion nu&r

-36r-to to 21r 0

-----.--_ -- Iul&ck i&e v&h . . ..~

busy SIgnal

-37r-(1co3ar7t01311 - l-1 MR Ckt) slauon

-36rio or I)#

-

-39140 to 911

-41r4oax ta9999w

.- -..- _--. -_-

-4/I-(0 to 314

-43wNNlNll

---._._. -- __-.

-44wo or IW UlJMcQ .scpanuon

I

f

I

L --------------------------I

&J

e

n

d

i

X

A

96

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

A

P

e

n

d

Pocket-Sized

List of Programming Addresses i

r--- x -m------------------7

I

i

I

FPCIO- Defiult blcolnhg lung Adglmlout

+I01 ,o 144lwJ1 to 64lNO or I)# Dayune rine

FWtS1&2- 1

Pmts2t.a 144 0

-fool to 1441401 lo 641r40 or 111 N&c Nlfi

ratalC2- 1

rortssto144. 0

FF4-21-

Hunt-Group N&bt Table6

FM-Sb-

Da+

lkla~ed-Rlr~ Tabkr I

I

L _____-__------_---_----- J

A

97

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

P

.

. P

P

e

n

d

Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses i

I

1

I

Reminder:

F&cord changes to the rtng default on the Mention

Summary form and the Hunt group Tables form found

elsewhere tn this manual. An atenslon can only be a

member of either a Hunt Croup pi a Coverage Group.

I

L __-----------m--s------- -I

98

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses

I

FFs-(Ool to 144w RtCdOO8

cpl to Z~#-CONF-@BQQ-IO to @,CXNB to 69$9

EL key13

FF

keys

- (01 to 24) 1 Default

01 to 24

I I

401 to 24)WZONF-(PROOPROGB wr JW key

Pm-programmed

codes

_ fsn? R-Rev &de CJmIiJ

FF keys - (01 to 24)

01

to

24

Default

1

I

L,--~-~~---~----~~---- --- A

A

P

e

n

d

i

X

A

99

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

P

e

n

d

Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses i

I

f

I

mlH145 to 14I?w D6s/72/BLFconso1er

q&l to !24wcoNF-~ to 66.88)r

FFkeys-(01 to241

01 to24

MC0 keys

Default

FFkeys-(01 to72) Default

01 to 56- 100 to 155 - Extensions

57to64- 7500

to 7507 - Park hold

65to71- MO

to

x06 - Page zones

72- 152

- Day/Night

---------I--------------------------

401 to 72WCON?~#

Pre-programmed

codes

IsarF-~codrckart

FFkcys-(Olto72)

01 to 72

Default

I

i

I

L -------------------,,--,~

100

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

A

P

e

n

d

Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses i

I

ms414s to 152w

Attaadoat

CoPaoka (41

-to-CONF-@~$fll@

MC0 keys

FF kevs - (01 to 321 I rkfarlll I

I

01 to 32

.

m

-tQlldWto-CONF-O’ROO-10

to 69/166 ma DSS keys

FF

keys - (01 ta 32)

011n I2

13 to 14

15 to 16

17to20

21 lo 24

25 to 28

29 to 32

Dcfnllil

750H lo 7.StXJ Park hold

7504 ,,I 7507 Park hokl

75Ooto7m3- -

x04 IO 107 - Pagr mncs

roolo a03 - -

Re~programmed

codes

(See R-Key Code Chart

FF keys - (01 lo 321

01 IO 32

Iktilrllt

I

101

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

e

n

d

Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses t

r--s i% ---em ----- ---- -_____

1

A

I

1

I

C UFRy 721

t UFm 722

c#FawMtocoLhl 723

FFl2(r,

fmbon

7976

A”lO(Wb”)

I

L __-----------------e--w- -I

102

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

, \

Pocket-Size IList of Programming Addresses

r--$&=-- ------------------,

A

P

e

n

d

i

X

A

I

i

I

r?5-

-Iu-IIXII lo 1441~-CONF-U0ch~l~

--

&00 to 691r-coti-il6 chuacun1r

_.__- _--- __-_

-3r-fco1 to 144l~.160 (0 OOPCONF

416 chalaclcn)d

_ . ..-- - ----

:4r.15 to 918-420NFi15 channcn1r

_-_--- -.

-5~.@l 10 64WCONF-I6 &~~trrslR

.6U-(I to BJWJONF-(1Ochfuaclersl~

-7U-(I LO 5WCONF-(15 chxaclurl~

rP7-l#-

Pm-2#-

_.--

-. _--

A_.

A

-._

m

DeQult

0

1

-.

.- 0

0

.-

0

---

0

1

r

E

;

I

[

_ - I

(

1

(

1

.

- _

~

.

_

- -

-

~uno/Mcuagc DSS Ccndc)

4tas101 -

-- - __ -_. -.

;yslm qmd d&l name ICI3 to 661

-. .__~ _...

. -_ .-___ --

HKA AIlwcrbut

roll Restdctlon Sattia~

2 11 mtrkllna

31 I rcstmkn

- .--.--- --- _ --

41 I mwll-tk.n

51 I rnll4r4loll

_ -_.-.-_-.

Gil-Ion

_-_. ---

711- -... _ _ ---__ . . - ..-.

611 rcItrruw __. ---

I)1 1 Rs(~lon

----

7digil dial raWkthn/lyp% P UI 6l

keecedo Tabk

t

I

103

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses

r--- x ------------ ---- ----

1

I

i

I

1

I

I FF7-71-mo1to 14416 Devtlme nts -1

I

f

I

A

L -----c------------------ -I

104

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

A

P

l?

e

n

d

Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses i

I

C

P-m-74-

1 1

Did-Delete Table &CR)

-1,~(001 10 IUV-(90 lo 99Wl16 dl@lsIL

I

L ___-------------__------ -I

105

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

CC RuZes and Regulations

106

A

p f ':

P

e

n

d

i

X

B

f

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

In compliance with the requirements of Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations for e

connection of Terminal equipment to the telephone network, and for your conven- n

ience. the following information is presented. d

Notifying

the Telephone Company i

x

When connecting or disconnectin Terminal equipment to the telephone network,

notify the telephone company of tfl e following: connection line(s), FCC registration

B

number, and ringer equivalence number of the registered Terminal equipment.

FCC Registration Numbers

Model Numbers Key System Hybrid System

VB-420

10 (DBS308) ACKUSA-61853~KF-E ACKUSA-61855~MF-E

VB-42020 (DBS616) ACKUSA-6185~KF-E ACKUSA-61856-MF-E

When enabling Pooled Trunk Access, inform the telephone company or a Panasonic

service center of the MF-E FCC Registration number. According to FCC rules, Pooled

Trunk Access is regarded as one of the distinguishing features of a PBX as opposed

to a key telephone system.

The REN determines the number of devices you may connect to your telephone line

and still have all those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most,

but not all areas, the total RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed

five (5.0). Contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for .

your calling area.

Service order code

Network address signaling code

Facility interface code

Required network interface code

9.OF

E

02LS2 (2

wire/loop start)

RT25c

DIRECT

C~NNECTIONTOA

PARTYLINE

ORCOIN-OPERATEDTELSPHOXE

LINEIS

PROMBITED

If you are on a party line, please check with your local telephone company for

further information.

107

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Should Terminal equipment cause harm to the telephone network. the telephone company shall. e

where practical. notify the customer that service may be temporarily disconUnued. However, where

prior noUce is not practical, the telephone company may temporarily discontinue service forthwith, n

if such action is reasonable in the circumstances. In case of un-notified temporary discontinuance of d

service. the telephone company shall: i

X

0 Promptly notify the customer of such temporary discontinuance of service.

B

(B)

Afford the customer the opportunity to correct the situation which gave rise

to the temporary disconttnuance.

(Cl

Inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Commission

pursuant to the procedures set out in Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations.

(A)

Availability of telephone information:

Technical information on interface parameters and specifications not set by FCC Rules,

including the number of ringers which may be connected to a particular telephone line

to permit Terminal equipment to operate in a manner compatible with telephone

company commumcaUons facilities, shah be provided by the telephqne company upon

customer’s request.

f

03

Changes in telephone company communications facilities. equipment, operations

and procedures:

The telephone company may make changes in its communicaUons facilities. equip-

ment. operauons or procedures. where such action is reasonably required in the ’

operaUon of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC

Part 68. lfsuch changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer’sTerminal

equipment IncompaUble with telephone company communications facilities or require

modification or alteration of such Terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its

use or performance. the customer shall be given adequate notfce. in writing, to allow

the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.

;

108

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

This system is hearing-aid compatible. e

n

d

i

%iEN bX3

EWHMINQ EMERQENCT

NUMBERS

OR B&JUNG

TEAT CALLS lro

EMEROENCY

NUMBERS:

(A) Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call.

x

B

U.3

Program or test emergency numbers only in off-peak hours: these are usually in the

early morning or late evening.

THE GRANTEE OR ITS Acmm

SHALL

PROWDE THE

USER OF THE

REGISTERED EQUIPMENT WITH

THE FOLLOWING

INFORMATION:

(A1

installation. operation and repair procedures. where applicable.

/

I \ 03

Registered Terminal equipment may not be used with party lines or coin lines.

(Cl

When a malfunction is indicated the customer shall disconnect the registered equipment

from the telephone line to determine the problem. Until the problem is corrected, discon-

nect all equipment.

(D)

If connections other than W25C are needed. contact the local telephone company.

109

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

PLEASE OEBERVE THE

FOLLOW~O GUIDELINES

TO ASSURE THE

SAFE

USE OF Yom

TELEPHONE

(A)

03

(Cl

(D)

(El

(F)

(G)

(HI

This product is an electrical device and

can

be hazardous if immersed in water.

To avoid the risk of electrical shock. do not use this unit while in the bathtub. shower.

or when wet. lf you accidently drop the unit into water. unplug it first. then retrieve it

by pulling the cord.

The telephone should not be exposed to heat sources, direct sunlight. extreme

temperatures. moisture, strong vibrations or greasy or dusty environments.

Never attempt to insert wires. pins or similar objects in the vents or openings of the

telephone.

Never clean the telephone with benzol. paint thinner or other solvent materials.

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

Never install telephone jacks in a wet area unless they are specifically designed for

that purpose.

Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has

been disconnected at the network interface.

Warning -This unit generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. And if not installed and

used in accordance with the instructions manual. may cause radio interference. The Unit has been

tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules,

which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a

commercial environment.

Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case

the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures are necessary to correct the

interference.

If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for

additional suggestions.

The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful:

A

P .,

P

8

n

d

i

X

B

This booklet is available locally from FCC regional offices.

110

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

. . -

. . .

ndex

111

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Index

A

211 restriction 51.87, 103

311 restriction 51, 87. 103

411 restriction 51.87. 103

511 restriction 51.87. 103

611 restriction 51.87. 103

7-digit dial restriction/COR types (2 to 6)

50, 51. 54. 87. 88. 103, 104

711 restriction 51.87. 103

811 restriction 51.87, 103

911 restriction 51.87. 103

ABCD inband si.@alhq 27.78.94

Absence messages (5 to 9) 48. 49.86.87.

102. 103

Account code 35.67.70.86, 102

Add table &CR) 57.62.89

AFP 42.45

Alarm indication sigual (AIS) detection 25.

77.93

Alarm LED mode 4.74.90

Alarm notification

red 24. 26. 77. 78. 93. 94

yellow 24.25. 77. 78.93. 94

Alarm relay recovery mode. 24.25. 77, 78.

93. 94

Alert tone 4.74.90

Analog port transfer ring interval 4.74.90

Answer key 86. 102

Auy key/pre-programmed codes 45. 46.

83-85. 99- 10 1

Appendix A 73- 105

Appendix B 106-l 10

Area Codes

LCR 57.58.88. 104

TRS 50, 52. 56. 87. 88. 103. 104

Attendant 3. 4. 8-13. 18. 19, 42. 45. 74. 86,

90. 102

consoles/flexible feature key assignment

42, 45, 85. 101

feature package (AFP) 42, 45, 85, 101

HOLD-recall ttmer 8, 76.92

Hunt Group recall timer 10. 75. 9.1

intercom

HOLD-recall timer 9, 75, 91

transfer recall timer 9. 75. 9 1

voice/tone call 3. 74. 90

overflow 4, 74. 90

I

Y ‘,

r :

e

X

override switch 4. 74. 90

park-HOLD recall timer 11, 75, 91

reversion timer 12. 75. 91

transfer extension 4. 74. 90

transfer recall timer 9. 75. 9 1

Auto day mode 20.76. 92

AUTO-FLASH-RED&IL 3.74,90

Auto set relocation codes 37. 67, 68. 70,

80. 96

Automatic Dialers 109

Automatic HOLD (key-bank HOLD) 3,74,90

Automatic pause 31.79.95

Automatic pause after dialiug (1 to 9.0)

6. 7. 75.91

Automatic pause timer 13.75.91 c

Automatic switch to uight mode 8.75.91

B

Background music (BGM) 86, 102

BGM (Background music) 86, 102

BLF (busy-lamp field) 4. 74. 90

BLF (extension) delayed ring 4.74.90

BLF port number (EM/24 console station-

port number) 35, 77.93 n

Busy-lamp field (BLF) 4. 74, 90

Busy overridden 35.67.68.77.93

Busy override 35. 67.68.70.71.86, 102

Busy tone (voice mail) 4, 74, 90

Busy tone transmission 27. 78. 94

C

Cable 70, 72

i

112

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Call forward 72.86. 102

/busy 86, 102

/CO line 86. 102

/no answer 86. 102

/no answer/busy 86, 102

/no answer timer 16.75,91

CalI waiting 36, 67.70.86. 102

display/large-display telephone 37. 77. 93

Call Coverage Group 38.4 1.5 1.68. 70. 72,

81.97

covering extension 1 41. 51, 68.81. 97

covering extension 2 41. 51, 68. 81. 97

extensions 41. 97

Call Coverage Group extension tables

(1 to 16) 38. 41. 81

Call duration display 3. 74.90

Chart/FF key codes 86. 102

Circuit number (telephone number) 29. 30.

Class of Restriction (COR) 50-56.87. 88.

100, 101

Class of sedce setting 51.87. 1038.67.68.

70. 72. 75. 91

CO delayed ringing timer 19.76.92

CO line

display after dialing/large-display 37, 77.

91

display during dialing/large-display 37. 77

91

FLASH timer 14, 75. 90

off hook signal 35. 77.91

off hook signal pattern 36. 67. 68. 77. 91

off hook signal volume 36. 67.68. 77. 91

co trunk

name 49.87. 103

preference (access code 881 86. 102

Compatibility of the Telephone Network

and Terminal Equipment 108

CONF key 42

Connection to a Coin-Operated Telephone

Line 107

Connection to a Party Line 107

Copy Mode

extensions 34, 63, 89, 102

LED FF keys 63. 89, 102

trunks 63. 89, 102

113

COR I

(Class of Restriction) 50-56. 87. 88. 103, n

104 d

WRSI types 50-56. 87, 88, 103, 104 e

X

D

Damage to a telephone line 108

Date 3. 74.90

Day 3.74.90

TRS - all extensions 88. 104

Day 3.74.90

delayed-ring tables 81. 97

riw 81.97

TRS 88.104

Debounce timer 22.77.93

Default charts 74-89

pocket-sized version 90- 105

Delayed-ring capability 4.72

Delete table &CR) 57. 62.89, 105

Detection timers 17. 75. 91

Dial time-out for digits, DID 33, 76.92

Dial pause timer 15.75.91

Dial tone detection 3 1.76.92

Dial tone generation 27.78.94

Dial tone transmission 27. 78. 94

Dialing restriction during an incoming call

(TRS) 51. 87. 103

DID

confirmation of reset 21.76. 92

dial setting 27. 78. 94

digit dial time-out 33. 76, 92

Immediate or Wink start 32. 76. 92

interdigit dial time-out 33. 76. 92

outside extension 37. 76. 92

reset 21. 76. 92

trunk card 32, 76. 92

trunk lines 28

DID dialing assignment 27.78.94

DID/DNIS emulation 5.74.90

DID/T1 reset 21, 76. 92

Digital pads 23. 77.,93

Digit restrictions (TRS) 52, 88. 104

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 2 1. 32,

76.92

Direct Station Select (DSS) 42. 46. 48, 49.

84, 100

DISA

enable 32, 76. 92

end timer 32. 76. 92

ID code 32.76. 92

outgoing codes 1 and 2 32, 76. 92

start timer 32, 76. 92

Disconnect timer 22. 76. 92

Display (SSD) 3. 74. 90

DND (Do Not Disturb) 86, 102

DMS dialing assignment 27. 78.94

Do Not Disturb (DND) 86. 102

D-SLT handset volume level 67.68. 70

DSS

(Direct Station Select) 42. 46, 48. 49.84.

85. 100, 101

extensions 46.84, 100

DSS/72

BLF consoles flexible feature key

assignment 46.49.84.85. 100. 101

FF keys 42.46.84

DTMF signal sending time 31.76.92

-p-data mode (Xon/Xoff) 5.74.90

E

EL (extension line) 83.99

EL/ML keys 43.44.83.99

EM (Extension Module) 35.42.47. 77.93

EM/24 console station port number 35.77.

93

Enables DXSA 31. 76. 92

EPI (external page interface) 7. 8, 75.91

Exclusive HOLD 3.74.90

Extension

delayed-ring tables 4. 67. 68, 8 1. 97

delayed ringing timer 20, 76, 92

digits 3. 74. 90

directory display/large-display telephone

37, 80, 96

114

flexible feature key assignment 42-44. I

83-86 n

HOLD-recall timer 9, 75. 91 d

Hunt Group recall timer 11, 75, 91 e

X

intercom

HOLD-recall timer 18, 75. 91

transfer-recall timer 19. 75. 91

voice/tone caIl 3. 74. 90

keys 42-44, 83-85

name assignment 49.87. 103

number 35.80.96

page groups (00 to 07) 36.80.96

page ring 86. 102

park-HOLD recall timer 12. 75. 91

ports 34, 35-37.80.96

programming 34-37. 80. 96

ring tables 81, 97

ring pattern 67. 68, 70

KTEL 37.80.96

SLT/OPX 37.80.96

transfer-recall timer

Extension Module (EM) 35.42.47.77.93

Extension summary 34.38.50.66-70

Extensions - (two or three digits) 86, 102

External Page Interface (Em) page groups

7.8. 75, 91

F

FCC Rules and Regulations 106- 110

FFl key - System programming 2-27. 74-78.

90-94

1’F2 key - Trunk programming 28-33.79.95

FF3 key - &tension programming 34-37.

80.96

FF4

key - Ring

assignment and Hunt

Groups 38-41.81.82. 97, 98

FFS

key

- Flexible feature

key

assignment

42-47, 83-86. 99- 102

FF6

key -

Name assignment 48.49.87.103

FF7 key - Toll restrictions 50-56.87, 88,

104

FFS

key

- Least Cost Routing 57-62.88.89.

104. 105

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

FF9 key - Copy mode 63.89. 105

FFlO key - System speed dialing 64.65.89.

105

FF key code chart 85.86, 101.102

First attendant 46. 84, 100

FLASH 3, 74. 90

FLASH timer (CO line) 14. 75, 91

FLASH timer (PDX) 16. 75.91

Flexible feature

key

assignment 42-44,

83-86

Forced verified account code 35.67. 68. 70.

80.96

Forced LCR restriction 35.67. 68. 70, 80. 96

Fourth attendant 4, 74.90

Frame loss 25. 76.92

Frame loss counter 26, 77.93

Framing format 25. 76, 92

extensions 81. 97

night

I

n

rl

CO line / pilot extension ring tables u

81.97 e

delayed-ring 40. 8 1, 97

X

no answer 20, 76, 92

pilot extension 40. 67. 68. 81. 97

pilot name 40. 67.68.81.97

recall timers

attendant 10, 75. 93

extension 11. 75. 93

search methods 4.67.68.81.97

tables (1 to 8) 38. 40. 8 1. 97

transfer extension 40.67. 68. 8 1, 97

transfer timer 40. 8 1. 97

Hunt Groups 70. 72, 81.82.97.98

I

G

Glare timer

immediate start 22. 77. 93

wink start 22. 77. 93

Group pickup 86. 102

Guard timer 22. 77. 93

H

Headset mode 86. 102

Hearing-aid compatibihty 109

HOLD 3. 74.90

automatic

exclusive

system

HOLD-recall timers

attendant 8. 75, 91

extensions 9. 75.91

Hour 3

Hunt Groups

day CO line / pilot extension ring tables

81.97

delayed-ring 40. 8 1, 97

Idle display / large-display telephone 37.

80.96

IDT(intercom dial tone) 37.86. 102

LDT (laqIedispl& 37

Incoming calls restriction (TRS) 5 1,87. 103

Incoming detection timer 22. 77. 93

Incoming Diahng Method 27.78.94

Incoming ground detection timer 17.75. 91

Incoming ring

delay timer 15. 76. 92

signal pattern 3 1, 76. 92

timer 14. 76. 92

Incoming ring 39.81.97

day rinR

delayed

day

night

night ring

Incoming signaDng class 27. 78,94

Index 111

Instructions 1. 2. 28. 34, 38. 42. 48. 50. 57.’

63. 64. 66. 69. 73, 106. 111

Intercom 4

busy tone display / large-display telephone

37. 80. 96

115

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

call status display (IDT) / large-display

telephone 37. 80, 96

dial tone (IDT) 37. 80. 96

key 86, 102

off hook display / large-display telephone

37, 80, 96

ring signal 81, 97

transfer 86. 102

Intercom timers

attendant 17, 18. 76. 92

HOLD recall 17. 76. 92

transfer recall 18. 76. 92

extensions 18, 19. 76.92

HOLD recall 18.76.92

transfer recall 19, 76.92

Intercom tone

continuous (SLT FLASH control) 3, 74. 90

International call (TRS) 51.87. 103

J. K

Key

Plan 34. 38. 48. 66. 69. 70. 71

Key bank (automatic) HOLD 3.74.90

L

Large-display telephones 4.36, 37, 74. 80.

87.96, 103

LCR

add table 57. 62. 89. 105

area codes/office codes 57. 58.88, 104

delete table 57. 62, 89. 105

forced 35. 67. 68, 70. 80. 96

office codes/special area codes 57. 59, 88.

104

time bands 88. 104

time priority tables 57. 58. 60, 88. 104

trunk groups 57.60.61,88, 104

trunk ports 88. 104

LCR (Least Cost Routing) 28.57-62.86. 102

Least Cost Routing (LCR) 28. 57-62, 86. 102

Line coding format 24. 25, 77. 78. 93. 94

Lockout code 35. 67.68. 70.74.90

Long-distance calls 5. 74. 90

Loop

keys

hmlti-liue) 43.83.99 n

.

hop start, ground start, or DID truuk cards

d

32. 76, 92

e

Loop start trunk card 32, 76.92

X

M

MC0 45.46.84.85. 100, 101

Meet-me answer 86. 102

Message

waiting 86. 102

answer

cancel

set

Mmltes

3.74.90

ML/EL keys 83.99

ML/MC0 separation 37.80.96

Month 3.74.90

Multi-line key assigument 43.44.70. 72,

83.99

Multiple DID 5. 74.90

Mute key 86. 102 f-

N

n

Name and message storing 48.49.87. 103

Name assignment 48.49.87. 103

Network

sync source recovery timer 22.

76, 92

wiw automatic switch 8

/day 82.84.98. 100

delayed-ring tables 82. 98

key 86,102

ring 39.75.91

TRS 55.86

all extensions 55.88

Non-appearance CO line HOLD (exclusive/ .

system) 3.74.90

Number of channels used 24. 25. 77.93

f

116

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

0

Off hook signal (CO line) 36.80.96

Office codes

LCR 57.58

TRS 50. 52. 56

OHCA

answerback 49. 87. 103

Onhook transfer 3, 74.90

One-touch dialing 3.74.90

Operating mode during alarm condition

24, 25. 77. 78, 93. 94

OrQinal forms

1.2.28. 34, 38. 42, 48. 50.

57. 63. 64.66.69. 73, 106. 111

Outbound ground detection timer 17. 75.9

1

Outgoing signaBn% class 27.78.94

Outpulse delay timer 22. 77, 93

Out of sync 25.26.77,78.93,94

Overrides TRS (allows SSD) 3.74.90

P

c 1

Page groups (00 to 07)

extensions 36.67.68. 72.86

relay 7. 8. 75. 91

Page zones 70.84.85. 100, 101

Page call display/large-display telephone 37

Pa@qj duration 5.74.90

Parity check (SMDR) 5.74.90

Park-H&I

key

retrieve 84,85, 100, 101

Park-HOLD recall timers

attendant 11, 75. 91

extensions 12, 75.91

Pause (automatic after dialing 1 to 9,OI 6.

7, 75. 91

Pause-timer (automatic) 13. 75. 91

PBX

access codes 5. 6. 75. 91

FLASH timer 16.75.91

Permanent call forward 37.67.68.

70.80.96

extension 37, 67.68. 70, 80. 96

Personal speed dial (PSD) 36.43.49.64.65.

86,89. 102. 105

Photocopying

1

I

Wet extension (Hunt Group)

40. 81.82.97, n

98 d

Pooled trunk access (MCO) group

settings e

(9, 81 to 86) 28, 31. 86. 102

X

Ports 70

Pre-programmed codes

45.46. 83-85, 99-

10 1

Reface

1

Prime line preference 35.67. 68. 70.86. 102

Private line port number 3

1

Product SafetJr

110

Programming addresses - FFl to FFlO Keys

2-105

PSD

name

assignment (90 to 99) 49.87. 103

names - large display

PSD (personal speed dial) 36.43.49.64.65.

86.89. 102. 105

Pulse or DTMF dial 31. 76. 92

99 R

Radio interference

110

RAl-A baud rate switch 5.74.90

RAI-B baud rate switch 4. 74.90

Recall timers 2. 8-12, 38. 75,

91

Red alarm counter 22.77.93

Red alarm detection timer 24.26, 77, 78.

93.94

Red alarm recovery detection timer 24.26.

77, 78, 93. 94

Red alarm relay control 25.77.93

Redial 3. ?4

Registering equipment 107

Relay (page groups) 7.8. 75.

91

Release acknowledge timer 22.77.93

Remote

loopback

detection 24.25. 77.78.

93.94

Remote Maintenance Code

19. 75.91

Responsibility of Manufacturer of

Registered Equipment

109

Restriction on maximum digits dialed 5 1.

87, 103

Reversion timer (attendant) 12. 75

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Ring assignment and Hunt Groups 38.39.

81. 82. 97, 98

Ring assignments 38.40.67.68, 70, 81.82,

97.98

Rw? signal

delay timer 14, 75, 91

incoming 31. 76. 92

pilot number and CO line 39.8 1.97

Ring timer (incoming) 14.81.97

Ringback tone with busy signal 37.67.68.

80.96

Ringback transmission 27, 78.94

Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) 107

Ringing Une preference 36. 67. 68, 70. 80.

96

S

Save/repeat 86. 102

dial

store

Second attendant 4. 46. 74.90

Signal loss counter 25.26. 77, 78.93. 94

Single line telephone (SLT) 3. 14, 74. 75.

90.91

Slip counter 24. 26, 77. 78. 93.94

SLT

FLASH control 3, 74.90

hook flash 37.67.68.70.80.96

onhook FLASH timer 14. 75.91

SLT (single line telephone) 3. 14. 74. 75.

90.91

SLT DISA ringing pattern 5.74.90

SMDR

baud rate 5. 74. 90

data length 5, 74. 90

print mode 1 5.74.90

print mode 2 (long distance/local calls) 5.

74. 90

print mode 3 (titles and TN data) 5. 74. 90

printout/incoming calls 36. 67. 68, 70

stop-bit length 3. 5. 74. 90

timer 16/30 3. 74.90

lTY parity check 4, 74. 90

TTY parity type 4.74.90

Software versions 1

1.0. 2.0 - B card

3.0. 3.1 - A card

Special area codes

LCR 57. 59,88,89. 104. 105

TRS 50. 53, 56.87. 88. 103. 104

Special office codes

LCR 57,59,88,89, 104, 105

TRS 50. 53. 56.87. 88. 103. 104

Speed dial list 48.64.65.89. 105

Splash tone

busy override 4. 74. 90

voice call 4. 74, 90

SSD

display mode 3.74.90

name assignment (00 to 89) / large-display

telephones 4, 49. 87. 103

toll restriction override 3, 74.90

SSD (system speed dial) 2.3.4.48.49. 64,

65. 74. 86. 89. 90. 102. 105

Stacked calls (attendant overflow) 4.74.90

Station lockout code 35.67.68.70.86. 102

Stored codes 21

Snbmodes 2.34

Summary

key

plan 71.72

Synchronization setting

first sync source 22.76.92

second sync source 22.76.92

third sync source 22. 76, 92

Sync loss counter 25, 26. 77. 78. 93.. 94

System HOLD 3.74.90

System programming 2-27. 76.92

ID code 21. 75.91

System size 2 1. 76.92

System speed dial (SSD) 2.3.4.48.49, 64.

65, 74. 86, 89. 90, 102. 105

T

Tl alarm

keys

43.44.86. 102

Tl port class

station 37. 80. 96

trunk 33.79.95

I

n /

d

e

X

(’

118

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Talk back key 86, 102

Telephone types 34.35.80.96

Telephone line system (trunk type) 3 1. 76.

92

Third attendant 4. 74. 90

Time 2. 3. 74. 90

Time bands (LCR) 59, 88, 104

Time priority tables (LCR) 57. 58. 60. 88.

104

Timers

attendant

HOLD-recall 8, 75. 91

Hunt Group recall 10, 75, 91

intercom

HOLD-recall 17, 75. 91

transfer-recall 18. 75. 91

park-HOLD recall 11.75.9 1

reversion 12. 75, 9 1

transfer-recall 9. 75. 9 1

automatic pause timer 13.75.91

call forward/no answer 16.75.91

CO he FLASH 13. 75.91

dial pause 15.75, 91

DISA end 32.76. 92

DISA start 32, 76, 92

extensions

HOLD-recall 8, 75. 92

Hunt Group recall 10. 75. 92

intercom

HOLD-recall 18. 75. 91

transfer-recall 18. 75, 9 1

incoming ground detection 17. 75. 91

incoming ring delay 15. 75. 9 1

outbound ground detection 17. 75.9 1

PBX FIASH 16.75.91

SLT onhook FLASH 14.75.91

trunk disconnect 32, 76. 92

unsupervised conference talk-time 13. 75,

91

Wink start (DID) 32, 76, 92

Titles 5, 74. 90

Toll Restriction System (TRS) 3, 50-56. 67,

68. 87. 88. 103. 104

Tone busy (voice mail) 4, 74. 90

Tone call 3.86. 102

Tone pattern (incoming ring signal) 3 1. 76.

92

L

Transfer extension (attendant) 4. 74: 90 d

Transfer-recall timers e

X

attendant 9. 75. 91

extension 10.75.91

TRS

area codes/of&e codes 50, 52. 87.88,

103. 104

block mode/area codes (1 to 4)

:,I,c COR types (3 to 61 56. 88, 104

block mode/of&e codes (5 to 8)

COR types (3 to 6) 56.88. 104

block mode/special area office codes

(13 to 16) 56, 88, 104

COR types (3 to 6) 56, 88, 104

block mode/special office codes (9 to 12)

COR types (3 to 6) 56.88, 104

COR 70.87.88, 103. 104

day assignment 50. 55. 67. 68. 88, 104

international calIs 5 1.87, 103

night assignment 50. 55.67.68.88, 104

override 3.87.88. 103. 104

special area code table 50, 53.87. 103

TRS (toll restriction system) 3. 50-56. 67.

68, 87, 88. 103. 104

Trunk class 24.25.77.93

Tmnk mode 27.78.94

-PO-

queueing 86. 102

Trunk selection 32.79. 95

Tnmk-to-trunk conferencing (unsupervised)

2. 13. 31, 75, 76.91.92

Trunk type 26.78,94

disconnect timer 32. 76. 92

features list 28.31-33, 76. 92

LCR

group order 61, 89. 105

group settings 28.88,89. 104. 105

group tables 60. 61. 88.89. 104, 105

lines 28.76.92

names 29.30. 49. 87. 103

port lists 28-30.76.92

port settings 31. 32. 76. 92

119

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

piogramrning 28-33 I

setting 3 n

.

types (CO line/PBX line) 3 1, 76.92 d

use 31. 76. 92 e

lTY data 5.74.90 i

U

UNA (Universal Night Answer) 7. 75.91

Unattended (unsupervised) conference 2.

13. 31. 35. 67. 68, 75, 76, 91, 92

Universal Night Answer (UNA) riug pattern

7. 75, 91

Unsupervised conference

extension capability 35. 75. 91

talk-time 2, 13. 75.91

trunk capability 2, 3 1. 76. 92

V

Verified Account Codes 8.75.91

Verified Account Code Toll Restriction 8,

75.91

Voice call 3. 74. 86.90. 102

Voice mail (busy tone) 4. 74. 90

W

Whk signal start detection timer 22.77.93

Wink start timer @ID) 32.79.95

n

Yellow alarm couuter 25.26. 77. 78.93.94

Yellow alarm detection timer 24.26.77. 78.

93.94

Yellow alarm notification 24.26.77.78.93,

94

Yellow alarm recovery detection timer 24, !’

26. 77. 78. 93. .94

Yellow alarm relay control 25. 77.93

Year 3.74.90

120

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

DBS 40 72 96 Programming Guide

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation